Top 1% Virtual Assistant Partners

Accounting Firm Marketing: What an Assistant Can Do

Accounting Firm Marketing: What an Assistant Can Do

Accountants have a marketing timing problem. The months when you’d most like new clients, just before tax season and at year-end planning time, are the months you have no time to market. And in the quieter months, marketing feels less urgent.

A marketing assistant fixes the timing. They keep accounting firm marketing running all year, including during deadline crunches, with you approving rather than producing.


What a marketing assistant can run for an accounting firm

A useful client newsletter

  • A monthly or seasonal email with deadlines, reminders and plain-English tips

  • Draft from your notes; you check every tax date and figure

  • Segment lists: individuals, small businesses, specific industries


Deadline-driven content

Accounting has a built-in content calendar: tax deadlines, estimated payment dates, year-end planning, new rules. Your assistant can plan posts and emails around it months ahead. They should always link to the official source, like IRS.gov, rather than restating rules from memory.


LinkedIn and website

  • Turn your answers to common client questions into posts

  • Keep service pages, team bios and fees pages up to date

  • Publish short blog posts on recurring questions


Reviews and referrals

  • Send review requests to satisfied clients (where your professional rules allow)

  • Run a simple referral thank-you process

  • Keep testimonials current, with written permission


Lead follow-up

  • Log new inquiries, send intake forms and book consultations


Accounting firm marketing: the rules to keep in mind

Accounting firms have professional rules on top of general advertising law.

  • Accuracy: the FTC says advertising claims must be truthful, not deceptive or unfair, and evidence-based. Be careful with phrases like “maximum refund” or “guaranteed savings”.

  • Professional standards: if you prepare returns or represent clients before the IRS, Circular 230 sets rules of conduct for tax professionals such as CPAs, attorneys and enrolled agents. State boards of accountancy also have their own rules. Check how they apply to your marketing.

  • Confidentiality: no client names, numbers or stories without written consent.

This is general information, not legal or professional advice.


Keep marketing separate from client files

Your marketing assistant doesn’t need access to client records. Keep them in marketing tools only: email platform, social accounts, website editor and a shared folder for approved content. That keeps confidential data out of the marketing workflow.

An example. Mathilde runs a three-person bookkeeping and tax practice in Albany, New York. Her marketing used to stop entirely from February to April. Her assistant now plans the year’s content each December around key deadlines, schedules tax-season reminders in January, and keeps LinkedIn and the newsletter going while Mathilde is buried in returns. Mathilde checks every date and figure before anything goes out. (Mathilde is an illustrative example.)


What should stay with the accountant

  • Technical accuracy: every figure, date and rule

  • Advice for specific situations, which shouldn’t be given in marketing at all

  • Client relationships and engagement letters

  • Fee decisions


Will clients find it impersonal?

Not if the content is yours. Clients value plain-English reminders that save them a penalty. The assistant handles drafting and scheduling; your expertise and checking make it trustworthy. But if you can’t spare 20 minutes a month to check content, don’t publish tax content at all. Errors cost more than silence.

For using AI drafts safely, see AI plus a marketing assistant.


FAQ

What marketing works for accounting firms?

A useful newsletter, deadline-driven content, an up-to-date website, LinkedIn and a steady referral and review process.


Can a marketing assistant write tax content?

They can draft from your notes and official sources. You must check every date, figure and rule before it’s published.


Does a marketing assistant need access to client files?

No. Keep marketing work in marketing tools and away from client records.


When should accounting firms do their marketing?

All year, planned ahead, so tax-season reminders go out on time even when you’re busiest.


Are there advertising rules for accountants?

Yes. General advertising law applies, plus professional rules like Circular 230 for tax practice and your state board’s rules.


Keep your marketing running through tax season

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can plan and run your firm’s newsletter, LinkedIn and website updates year-round. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Every IncludeWork assistant signs an NDA before they start. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
White Label Marketing Virtual Assistant: How It Works

White Label Marketing Virtual Assistant: How It Works

Small marketing agencies hit the same wall. You win new clients, but the delivery work grows faster than your team. Hiring full-time is slow and risky. But turning work away hurts too.

A white label marketing virtual assistant gives you extra hands for delivery, working under your agency’s name. Your clients see your agency’s work, on your schedule, through your account managers. Here’s how it works and how to set it up well.


What “white label” means

The assistant works behind your agency. They:

  • Use your agency’s processes, templates and tools

  • Communicate through your team, or with clients only as “part of the agency” if you allow it

  • Never contact your clients to sell their own services

  • Keep client information confidential

You stay responsible for strategy, client relationships and final quality.


Tasks agencies commonly hand to a white label marketing virtual assistant

  • Social media production: creating, scheduling and posting from approved calendars

  • Community management: replying to comments and messages with approved answers

  • Content formatting: uploading blog posts, adding images, alt text and links

  • Email builds: building campaigns in the client’s email platform from your copy

  • Local listings: Google Business Profile posts, listings checks, review reply drafts

  • Reporting: pulling data into your agency’s report templates

  • Research: competitor snapshots, keyword lists, influencer lists


How to set it up

  1. Document your process for each service: steps, checklists, examples of good work

  2. Start with one client and one service

  3. Give access the safe way: named user accounts in each client’s tools, never shared passwords

  4. Set a review step: your account manager checks work before it goes to the client, at least at first

  5. Agree turnaround times that fit your client promises

  6. Add more clients once quality is steady


Quality and responsibility

Your agency’s name is on everything, so quality control matters. And legal responsibility doesn’t disappear when work is outsourced. The FTC says advertising claims must be truthful, not deceptive or unfair, and evidence-based. Build checks for claims, disclosures and permissions into your process, whoever does the work.

An example. Marcelline runs a five-person social media agency in Colorado Springs. Each new client meant weeks of overtime. She added a white label marketing assistant for 40 hours a month to handle post scheduling, community replies and monthly report building for four clients. Her account managers review everything before it reaches clients. The agency took on two more retainers without hiring, and the account managers moved their time to strategy and client calls. (Marcelline is an illustrative example.)


Common concerns

“Will clients find out?” White label means the assistant works as part of your team. Whether you tell clients you use outside support is your decision; some agencies mention it in contracts.

“What about confidentiality?” Use an NDA, named user accounts and limited access. Remove access promptly when work ends.

“What if quality slips?” Keep your review step, use clear checklists and give fast feedback. Choose a provider that can replace an assistant if needed.

“Will it really save money?” Only if your processes are clear. Vague processes create rework that eats the savings.

For pricing models, see hourly vs monthly retainer.


FAQ

What is a white label marketing virtual assistant?

An assistant who does delivery work for an agency’s clients under the agency’s brand and processes.


What tasks can agencies outsource to a white label VA?

Social media production, community management, content formatting, email builds, listings, reporting and research.


Do white label assistants talk to clients directly?

Only if you allow it. Many agencies keep all client communication with their account managers.


How do agencies protect client data with outsourced help?

NDAs, named user accounts, limited permissions and removing access when work ends.


How should an agency start with white label support?

Document one service, start with one client, review all work at first, then expand.


Add delivery capacity without hiring

IncludeWork provides white label VA support for marketing agencies. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Every IncludeWork assistant signs an NDA before they start. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
SaaS Marketing Assistant: What Startups Should Hand Off

SaaS Marketing Assistant: What Startups Should Hand Off

In an early SaaS startup, the founder is usually the marketing team. Between shipping features, talking to customers and fundraising, marketing becomes a burst of activity before each launch and silence in between.

A SaaS marketing assistant won’t replace a head of growth. But they can take over the repeatable work that eats founder hours, so the marketing you’ve already decided on actually happens every week.


Hand these to a SaaS marketing assistant first

1. Content operations

  • Format, publish and add internal links to blog posts

  • Turn each post into LinkedIn and X posts

  • Maintain the content calendar and a backlog of ideas from customer calls

  • Update old posts when features change

Google’s guidance on helpful, people-first content emphasizes first-hand expertise. In SaaS, that’s your product knowledge and customer insight. Your assistant can turn your notes and call recordings into drafts; you supply the substance.


2. Changelog and product updates

  • Write up each release in plain language

  • Publish to your changelog, help center and social channels

  • Send a monthly “what’s new” email


3. Onboarding and lifecycle emails

  • Draft and set up welcome and onboarding sequences in your email tool

  • Check that links, screenshots and steps match the current product

  • Report open and click rates by email


4. Community and social

  • Post on LinkedIn and X from founder notes

  • Monitor mentions and comments; flag feature requests and complaints

  • Keep review profiles on software directories up to date, and ask happy users for reviews


5. Reporting

  • A weekly snapshot: website visits, sign-ups, trial-to-paid if you share it, top content


What to keep as founder

  • Positioning and messaging: who it’s for and why it’s different

  • Pricing

  • Customer conversations and sales calls

  • Big launch plans

  • Anything technical that needs real product depth


Rules for SaaS marketing emails

Onboarding and product-update emails can mix transactional and promotional content. Your email setup should follow the CAN-SPAM rules for any commercial messages: the FTC’s compliance guide covers a clear opt-out, your physical address and honoring opt-outs within 10 business days. Ask your assistant to keep marketing and account emails clearly separated. This is general information, not legal advice.

An example. Anneliese is the solo founder of a scheduling app for dog walkers. She wrote one strong blog post a month but never repurposed it, and her changelog hadn’t been updated since spring. A SaaS marketing assistant now turns each post into a week of LinkedIn content, writes up every release for the changelog and monthly update email, and keeps her listing on two software review sites current. Anneliese spends about an hour a week on marketing instead of a scattered half day. (Anneliese is an illustrative example.)


Where this falls short

If you haven’t found product-market fit, more content and emails won’t save you. Early SaaS marketing often needs founder-led experiments: talking to users, testing messages, trying channels. An assistant supports that work; they can’t decide it.

And deeper technical content, like integration guides or developer docs, may need someone with engineering knowledge. Start your assistant on operations, not strategy.

For startup operations beyond marketing, see IncludeWork’s support for startups.


FAQ

What does a SaaS marketing assistant do?

They run content operations, changelogs, onboarding emails, social posting, review profiles and weekly reporting from the founder’s direction.


When should a SaaS startup hire marketing help?

When you know which channels work and the founder’s time is the bottleneck.


Can a VA write technical SaaS content?

They can draft from your notes and recordings. Deep technical content usually needs your review or an expert writer.


Should a marketing assistant handle our product emails?

They can set up and maintain them. You should approve the content and any changes to the flow.


How many hours does an early-stage startup need?

Many start with 10 to 20 hours a week.


Get marketing out of the founder’s to-do list

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can run your content operations, changelogs and lifecycle emails. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Every IncludeWork assistant signs an NDA before they start. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Home Service Business Marketing: Plumbers, HVAC, Cleaners

Home Service Business Marketing: Plumbers, HVAC, Cleaners

In home services, the phone rings when something breaks. Customers search, pick one of the first few names they trust, and call. The decision often takes minutes.

That makes home service business marketing different from most. It’s less about clever campaigns and more about being findable, trusted and easy to book at the exact moment someone needs you. A marketing assistant can handle most of that work while you and your crews are out on jobs.


What matters most in home service business marketing

  1. Showing up in local search, especially the map results

  2. Reviews: lots of recent, real ones, with replies

  3. Photos of real work: before and after, clean vans, real technicians

  4. Fast, easy booking: a working phone number, form or online scheduler

  5. Staying in touch with past customers for seasonal and repeat work


What a marketing assistant can handle

Google Business Profile and listings

  • Weekly posts with job photos

  • Accurate hours, service areas and services

  • Matching details across directories

Google’s guidance on local ranking points to complete information, accurate hours, photos and responding to reviews.


Reviews

  • Send a review request by text or email after each completed job

  • Reply to every review, with your approval on negative ones

  • Track recurring compliments and complaints

The FTC’s rule on fake reviews bans fake reviews and undisclosed staff reviews, so ask every real customer, not just the happiest ones.


Social media

  • Before-and-after photos from the crew’s phones

  • Seasonal tips: “check your sump pump before spring rain”, “change your furnace filter”

  • Team introductions, so customers know who’s coming to their door


Seasonal email and reminders

  • Maintenance reminders to past customers (HVAC tune-ups, gutter cleaning, deep cleans)

  • Membership or service plan renewals

  • Holiday hours and emergency service notices


A simple weekly routine

Day

Task

Monday

Review requests for last week’s jobs; reply to new reviews

Tuesday

Google Business Profile post with job photos

Wednesday

Two social posts scheduled

Thursday

Update website or listings if anything changed

Friday

Weekly numbers: calls, forms, reviews; plan next week

An example. Desmond runs a four-van plumbing company in Tulsa. His techs took great before-and-after photos but nobody posted them. His marketing assistant now collects photos from a shared folder every Monday, posts them to Google and Facebook, and sends a review request text after each completed job. A seasonal “winterize your pipes” email goes to past customers each fall. Desmond’s only weekly task is approving replies to any review below four stars. (Desmond is an illustrative example.)


What stays with you

  • Pricing and quotes

  • Warranty and guarantee promises

  • Serious complaints and disputes

  • Hiring messages and anything legal


The catch: your crew has to help

A remote assistant can’t take photos on site. If techs don’t snap a before and after, there’s nothing to post. But you can make it part of the job checklist. Keep it simple: two photos, dropped into one shared folder.

And marketing works best when the basics are right. If calls go to voicemail or quotes take three days, more visibility just means more missed jobs.

For a deeper look at local search tasks, see local SEO tasks to hand to an assistant.


FAQ

What marketing works best for home service businesses?

Local search visibility, recent real reviews, photos of real work and reminders to past customers usually matter most.


Can a virtual assistant manage reviews for my plumbing or HVAC business?

Yes. They can request reviews after jobs, reply with approved wording and flag complaints to you.


Should home service businesses post on social media?

Yes, mainly to build trust: real jobs, real team and helpful seasonal tips.


How do I get my technicians to send photos?

Add two photos to the job checklist and make uploading easy with one shared folder or app.


How many hours of marketing help does a home service business need?

Many start with 5 to 10 hours a week.


Get found when something breaks

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can run reviews, listings and posts for home service businesses. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. IncludeWork has been running remote assistant teams since 2012. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Restaurant Marketing Assistant: What to Hand Off

Restaurant Marketing Assistant: What to Hand Off

Restaurant owners don’t lack marketing ideas. They lack the hour between lunch service and prep to post the new special, update the online menu and answer last night’s reviews.

So the special sells out without anyone knowing it existed. The online menu still lists last season’s dishes. And three reviews from the weekend sit unanswered. A restaurant marketing assistant takes over that steady work so your marketing keeps up with your kitchen.


What a restaurant marketing assistant can handle

Online menus and listings

  • Keep menus accurate on your website, Google Business Profile and delivery apps

  • Update hours, holiday closures and special events

  • Upload fresh food and dining room photos

Google’s help page on improving local ranking recommends complete, accurate business information, current hours, photos and responding to reviews. For restaurants, that profile is often the first thing a diner sees.


Social media

  • Daily or weekly specials, posted on time

  • Short videos of dishes being plated (from your kitchen team’s phone clips)

  • Behind-the-scenes posts: deliveries, prep, the team

  • Event and holiday announcements


Reviews

  • Reply to every review, using approved wording for common situations

  • Flag complaints about food safety, staff or billing to you immediately

  • Track review themes: what diners love and what they complain about


Events and email

  • Promote special nights, tastings, holiday menus and private dining

  • Send a monthly email to regulars

  • Manage RSVPs for ticketed events


Working with food creators

Local food bloggers and creators can bring in new diners. If you give them a free meal, the FTC’s endorsement guidance says that connection should be clearly disclosed. Your assistant can research creators, send invitations and track posts, while you decide who to invite.


A weekly restaurant marketing routine

Day

Task

Monday

Reply to weekend reviews; update menus if anything changed

Tuesday

Plan and schedule the week’s posts from kitchen photos

Wednesday

Google Business Profile post; event promotion

Thursday

Weekend specials and reminder posts

Friday

Quick check of listings and delivery app menus; weekly notes

An example. Giacomo runs a 40-seat trattoria in New Haven, Connecticut. His online menu was eight months out of date, and he posted only when a regular reminded him. His restaurant marketing assistant now updates menus across his website, Google profile and two delivery apps every time the kitchen changes a dish. Line cooks send short plating clips to a shared folder, and the assistant posts specials by 11am. Giacomo approves review replies to anything below four stars. (Giacomo is an illustrative example.)


What to keep in the restaurant

  • Menu and pricing decisions

  • Replies to serious complaints, especially about health or safety

  • Relationships with suppliers, partners and the local community

  • Final say on any promotion or discount


The hard part for restaurants

Your assistant isn’t in the building. They depend on your team for photos, menu changes and news. If nobody sends anything, posts dry up. So assign one person, often a manager, to send photos and updates on set days.

And marketing can’t fix the dining experience. If reviews keep mentioning slow service, the answer is in the restaurant, not on Instagram.

For community replies in more depth, see community management for small business.


FAQ

What does a restaurant marketing assistant do?

They keep menus and listings accurate, post specials and events, reply to reviews and send emails to regulars.


Can a remote assistant take food photos?

No, but they can edit and post photos and videos your team takes on their phones.


How should a restaurant reply to bad reviews?

Calmly and briefly, without arguing. Invite the guest to contact you directly. Serious complaints should go to the owner or manager.


How many hours does a restaurant marketing assistant need?

Many independent restaurants start with 5 to 10 hours a week.


Should restaurants post every day?

Not necessarily. A few well-timed posts a week, especially before busy days, can work better.


Keep your marketing as fresh as your menu

IncludeWork’s social media virtual assistants can run menus, posts and reviews for restaurants and cafes. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Work is checked by IncludeWork’s quality-control team before it reaches you. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Dental Marketing Assistant: What to Delegate Safely

Dental Marketing Assistant: What to Delegate Safely

Dental and medical practices need marketing like any other business: new patients, steady recall visits, good reviews. But they work under rules most businesses never think about. One careless review reply can disclose patient information. One “before and after” post can break privacy rules.

A dental marketing assistant can still take a lot off your plate, as long as the work is designed around those rules from day one. Here’s what to hand over, what to keep and the guardrails to set. This is general information, not legal advice; check with your compliance lead or attorney.


What a dental marketing assistant can safely handle

Most practice marketing doesn’t need patient information at all:

  • Social posts about your team, office, technology and general oral health tips

  • Google Business Profile updates: hours, services, photos of the office, weekly posts

  • Website updates: service pages, team bios, insurance information, FAQs

  • Blog posts and newsletters on general topics, reviewed by a clinician

  • Review requests sent through approved systems

  • Monthly reporting: calls, website forms, new patient sources


The HIPAA rules that shape the work

Patient information in marketing

The U.S. Department of Health and Human Services says HIPAA generally requires a patient’s written authorization before their protected health information is used or disclosed for marketing. So:

  • No patient photos, names or stories without a signed authorization

  • No “before and after” images without authorization

  • No confirming someone is a patient, even in a friendly reply

HHS also explains that some communications aren’t treated as marketing, such as refill reminders and communications about a practice’s own services. Your compliance lead should decide which category each campaign falls into.


If your assistant will see patient data

If an outside assistant will handle protected health information, for example in your scheduling or recall system, HHS guidance on business associates says you need a written business associate agreement first. Many practices avoid this by keeping marketing work fully separate from patient systems.


Review replies: the trickiest part

Patients often share health details in reviews. Your reply must not confirm they’re a patient or add any details.

Don’t reply

Do reply

“Sorry your root canal on Tuesday was painful, Mrs. Lee.”

“Thank you for your feedback. We’d like to talk with you. Please call our office manager at [number].”

“We checked your records and…”

“We take all feedback seriously and would welcome the chance to discuss it privately.”

Your assistant can draft generic replies from an approved list. Anything beyond that goes to your office manager.


Advertising claims

Health claims get extra scrutiny. Avoid “painless”, “guaranteed results” or “best dentist in town” unless you can support them. Your state dental or medical board may also have advertising rules. Your assistant should flag any claim for clinician review.

An example. Dr. Okonkwo runs a three-dentist family practice in Macon, Georgia. His office manager had no time for marketing. Their assistant now posts team spotlights and general oral health tips three times a week, updates the Google profile weekly and sends review requests through the practice’s approved patient communication system, without ever logging into patient records. Review replies follow a short approved script; anything unusual goes to the office manager. (Dr. Okonkwo is an illustrative example.)


What to keep inside the practice

  • Anything involving patient records or identities

  • Responses to complaints about care

  • Clinical content approval

  • Decisions about authorizations and compliance


Is it worth the extra care?

It can be. Most of the marketing workload, like social posts, profile updates, website content and reports, involves no patient data at all. But setup takes more time than for other businesses: written rules, approved reply scripts, clinician review and, if needed, a business associate agreement. If you can’t commit to that setup, start with the lowest-risk tasks only.

For local search tasks in more depth, see local SEO tasks to hand to an assistant.


FAQ

Can a virtual assistant do marketing for a dental practice?

Yes, for tasks that don’t involve patient information, like social posts, website updates and Google profile management, within clear rules.


Can we post patient before-and-after photos?

Only with the patient’s signed authorization. Check with your compliance lead first.


How should we reply to reviews under HIPAA?

Don’t confirm the person is a patient or mention any details. Thank them and invite them to contact the office privately.


Does a marketing assistant need a business associate agreement?

If they’ll handle protected health information, yes. If marketing is kept separate from patient data, it may not be needed. Ask your compliance advisor.


What marketing tasks should a practice keep in-house?

Anything involving patient records, care complaints and clinical content approval.


Marketing help that respects the rules

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can run social, website and Google profile work for practices, kept separate from patient data. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Every IncludeWork assistant signs an NDA before they start. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Marketing Assistant for Coaches: A Practical Guide

Marketing Assistant for Coaches: A Practical Guide

Coaches and consultants have a strange problem. The thing you sell is your time and expertise. So every hour spent on marketing is an hour you’re not billing, and every quiet week of marketing shows up as an empty calendar two months later.

That “feast and famine” cycle is common. But it isn’t inevitable. A marketing assistant for coaches helps break it by keeping your marketing running steadily, even during your busiest client months.


What a marketing assistant for coaches can run for you

Content

  • Turn your voice notes or session insights (anonymized) into LinkedIn and Instagram posts

  • Format and publish blog posts or articles

  • Cut short clips from your talks, webinars or podcast appearances

  • Keep a content calendar so you post during busy months too


Newsletter

  • Draft a weekly or monthly email from your ideas

  • Manage your list, sign-up forms and lead magnet delivery

  • Track replies and flag interested readers


Bookings and follow-up

  • Keep your booking page and discovery call links working

  • Send reminders and pre-call questionnaires

  • Log new leads in your CRM and remind you to follow up


Proof

  • Collect testimonials after programs end (with permission)

  • Turn strong results into short case studies

  • Keep your website’s testimonials page current


The rules on testimonials and results

Coaching marketing often leans on client results: “lost 20 pounds”, “doubled revenue”, “landed a new job”. And that’s where care is needed. The FTC’s endorsement guidance covers testimonials, and in general you shouldn’t present unusual results as typical. Testimonials must also reflect real opinions, and any incentive for leaving one should be disclosed.

Your assistant should:

  • Only use real testimonials, with written permission

  • Avoid editing words in a way that changes their meaning

  • Flag any results claims to you before publishing

This is general information, not legal advice.


A weekly routine that fits around client work

When

You

Assistant

Monday

Record a 10-minute voice note with ideas

Draft the week’s posts and email

Wednesday

Approve the batch (15–20 minutes)

Schedule everything

Ongoing

Coach

Replies, bookings, follow-up reminders

Friday

Read a short note

Weekly summary: leads, calls booked, top post

An example. Kasimir is a leadership coach working with engineering managers. He got most clients from LinkedIn, but only posted in quiet months, so new leads dried up whenever he was busy. His marketing assistant now turns a Monday voice note into three LinkedIn posts and a fortnightly newsletter, and manages his discovery call bookings. During his busiest quarter, the posts kept going out, and his calendar for the following quarter filled sooner than usual. (Kasimir is an illustrative example.)


What to keep yourself

  • Your opinions and frameworks. The assistant shapes them; you supply them.

  • Sales conversations. Discovery calls are where coaching sells.

  • Pricing and offers

  • Anything involving client confidentiality. Never share client details without consent.


Common worries

“My clients hire me, so content has to be mine.” It is. Your ideas, your stories, your opinions. The assistant handles formatting, scheduling and admin.

“I can’t afford help until I have more clients.” That’s the cycle talking. Start with a few hours a week on the tasks that bring leads: posts, newsletter and follow-up.

“What about confidentiality?” Ask for an NDA, share anonymized examples only, and keep client files separate from marketing work.

For the posting side, see LinkedIn ghostwriting and engagement.


FAQ

What can a marketing assistant do for a coach?

Turn your ideas into posts and newsletters, manage bookings and follow-ups, collect testimonials and keep your content calendar running.


How many hours does a coach need from a marketing assistant?

Many solo coaches start with 5 to 10 hours a week.


Can an assistant write content in my voice?

Yes, from your voice notes and examples, with your approval on every piece at first.


Can I share client results in my marketing?

With written permission, and without presenting unusual results as typical.


Should my assistant book discovery calls for me?

They can manage the booking system, reminders and follow-ups. The call itself stays with you.


Keep leads coming during busy months

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants help coaches and consultants post, email and follow up consistently. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Every IncludeWork assistant signs an NDA before they start. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Ecommerce Marketing Assistant: Tasks That Grow Sales

Ecommerce Marketing Assistant: Tasks That Grow Sales

Running an online store means wearing every hat at once: buyer, photographer, customer service, packer, accountant. Marketing tends to get whatever time is left, which is usually none.

But in e-commerce, marketing is directly tied to sales. Fewer emails mean fewer orders. Stale product pages mean lower conversion. An ecommerce marketing assistant can take over the steady work that keeps orders coming in. Here’s what to hand over first.

The tasks with the most direct effect on sales

1. Email flows and campaigns

Email often drives a meaningful share of sales for online stores, because it reaches people who already know you. An assistant can:

  • Set up or check automated flows: welcome, abandoned cart, browse abandonment, post-purchase, win-back

  • Build and send weekly or fortnightly campaigns: new arrivals, restocks, seasonal edits

  • Segment the list: first-time buyers, repeat customers, VIPs

2. Product pages and listings

  • Write and improve product descriptions

  • Add size guides, care instructions and FAQs

  • Check photos, alt text and variant details

  • Keep stock levels, prices and sale badges accurate

3. Social content

  • Product photos and short videos from your shoots

  • User-generated content reshared with permission

  • Behind-the-scenes posts: packing orders, new samples

  • Launch and restock announcements

4. Reviews

  • Send review requests after delivery

  • Reply to reviews, especially critical ones (with your approval)

  • Feature reviews on product pages

Rules for reviews and influencers

Online stores lean heavily on reviews and creators, and the rules matter. The FTC’s rule on fake reviews bans fake reviews, paying for reviews that must be positive, and suppressing negative ones through threats or false accusations. And its endorsement guidance says creators must clearly disclose free products or payment.

Your assistant should only request reviews from real buyers and keep a log of every creator collaboration.

An ecommerce marketing assistant’s weekly routine

Day

Tasks

Monday

Last week’s sales by channel; email performance; plan this week’s campaign

Tuesday

Build and schedule the email campaign; product page updates

Wednesday

Social content batch; send drafts for approval

Thursday

Review requests and replies; customer photos; creator follow-ups

Friday

Listings check (prices, stock, broken links); weekly summary

An example. Dorothea runs an online store selling handmade ceramic tableware. She sent emails only when she remembered, and her abandoned cart email still had last year’s discount code. Her ecommerce marketing assistant rebuilt the welcome and abandoned cart flows, started a fortnightly “new from the studio” email and rewrote her ten best-selling product descriptions with dimensions and care notes. Dorothea still does the shoots and approves every email. (Dorothea is an illustrative example.)

What to keep yourself

  • Product decisions: what to make or stock, and at what price

  • Discount strategy: how often and how deep

  • Big launches and collaborations

  • Customer complaints that need a judgment call

Where online store marketing help falls short

An assistant can make your marketing consistent. But they can’t fix product-market problems: if few people want the product, or margins can’t support discounts, more emails won’t help. And paid ads at scale usually need a specialist, with your assistant handling the day-to-day around them.

For broader e-commerce support like listings across marketplaces, see IncludeWork’s e-commerce virtual assistants.

FAQ

What does an ecommerce marketing assistant do?

They run email flows and campaigns, improve product pages, create social content, manage reviews and report weekly sales by channel.

Which marketing task should an online store hand off first?

Email, especially automated flows like welcome and abandoned cart, because they work around the clock.

Can a marketing assistant manage Shopify?

Yes, with a staff account. They can edit products, collections, discounts (with approval) and connected marketing apps.

Should my assistant contact influencers?

They can research creators, send outreach and track collaborations. You decide who to work with and what to offer.

How many hours does an ecommerce marketing assistant need?

Many small stores start with 10 to 20 hours a week, depending on the number of products and channels.

Keep the orders coming in

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can run your store’s email, listings and social content every week. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. IncludeWork has been running remote assistant teams since 2012. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Real Estate Marketing Virtual Assistant: What to Delegate

Real Estate Marketing Virtual Assistant: What to Delegate

Agents get paid for conversations, showings and closings. Not for resizing listing photos at midnight or writing the fourth “Just listed!” caption of the week.

A real estate marketing virtual assistant takes over the steady marketing work that keeps your name in front of buyers and sellers, so you can spend more time with clients. Here’s what to hand over, what to keep, and the rules your assistant needs to know first.


What a real estate marketing virtual assistant can handle

Listing marketing

  • “Just listed”, “open house” and “just sold” posts across your social accounts

  • Listing graphics and flyers from your templates

  • Short property videos edited from your clips or photographer’s files

  • Drafting listing descriptions from your notes, for you to check

  • Scheduling open house reminders


Staying in touch with your sphere

  • A monthly newsletter with local market notes you provide, recent sales and helpful tips

  • Birthday and home-anniversary emails to past clients

  • Updating your CRM with new contacts and tags


Your online presence

  • Google Business Profile posts and review reply drafts

  • Keeping your website bio, listings page and testimonials current

  • Neighborhood content: local events, new businesses, community guides


Reporting

  • A monthly summary of which posts and emails brought in inquiries


What to keep yourself

Some work needs your license, your judgment or both:

  • Pricing advice and market opinions to clients

  • Anything that counts as licensed activity in your state. Rules on what unlicensed assistants can do vary, so check with your broker and your state’s real estate commission.

  • Final approval on every listing description and ad

  • Client conversations about offers, negotiations and contracts


The Fair Housing rules your assistant must know

This is the part you can’t skip. The federal Fair Housing Act prohibits housing discrimination, and that includes advertising. According to the U.S. Department of Justice, the Fair Housing Act covers discrimination because of “race or color, religion, sex, national origin, familial status, disability.”

In practice, your assistant should describe the property, not the people who might live there:

Avoid

Use instead

“Perfect for young families”

“Three bedrooms, fenced yard”

“Ideal for singles”

“Open-plan one-bedroom”

“Walking distance to St. Mary’s”

List nearby amenities neutrally, or leave out

“Great for active adults” (unless a qualifying senior community)

“Single-level home, no stairs”

Many states and cities add more protected classes. And your brokerage may have its own rules on top. So give your assistant your brokerage’s advertising guidelines, and review every listing description and ad yourself. This is general information, not legal advice.


A weekly routine for one agent

Day

What the assistant does

Monday

Schedule the week’s posts: listings, open houses, one local tip

Tuesday

Create graphics and edit a short property video

Wednesday

Send drafts and descriptions to you for approval

Thursday

Update the CRM, send anniversary emails

Friday

Google Business Profile post, review reply drafts, weekly notes

On 10 to 15 hours a week, this keeps a solo agent visible without daily effort. But the approvals on Wednesday stay with you.

An example. Siobhan is a solo agent in Scottsdale. Her marketing was all bursts: busy when she had listings, silent when she didn’t. Her real estate marketing virtual assistant now runs a steady schedule: listing posts when there are listings, neighborhood guides when there aren’t, and a monthly email to 400 past clients. Siobhan records a 5-minute voice memo each week with market notes and checks every listing description against her brokerage’s guidelines before it goes live. Two past clients replied to the newsletter asking about selling in its first quarter. (Siobhan is an illustrative example.)


Getting started

  1. Write your rules: brand voice, brokerage guidelines, Fair Housing do’s and don’ts

  2. Add them as a user to your social accounts, CRM and email tool, not with your password

  3. Start with listings and one channel, then add the newsletter

  4. Approve everything for the first month

For a fuller plan, see how to onboard a marketing virtual assistant.


The limits of marketing help

A marketing assistant can keep you visible. But it can’t replace your relationships, your local knowledge or your reputation with past clients.

And compliance takes your time too. Every listing description and ad still needs your review against your brokerage’s rules. Plan for that time each week rather than skipping it when you’re busy.


FAQ

What does a real estate marketing virtual assistant do?

They handle listing posts and graphics, newsletters, CRM updates, Google Business Profile posts and reporting, while you handle clients and approvals.


Can a virtual assistant write my listing descriptions?

They can draft them from your notes. You should review every one for accuracy and Fair Housing compliance before it’s published.


Do real estate VAs need a license?

For marketing tasks, usually not, but rules on what unlicensed assistants can do vary by state. Check with your broker.


How many hours does a real estate marketing VA need?

Many solo agents start with 10 to 15 hours a week. Teams often need more.


Can my assistant post on the MLS?

That depends on your MLS and brokerage rules. Check before giving access.


Stay visible between listings

A real estate marketing virtual assistant keeps your name in front of your sphere every week, not just when you have a listing. IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants work in the tools agents already use. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Work is checked by IncludeWork’s quality-control team before it reaches you. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Landing Page Testing for Small Business: Simple Tests

Landing Page Testing for Small Business: Simple Tests

Every ad, email and social post sends people somewhere. If that page is confusing, slow or asks too much, the click is wasted, however good the ad was.

Big companies run complex experiments on their pages. Small businesses don’t need that. Simple landing page testing, done by an assistant with a clear checklist, can fix the obvious problems and try a few sensible changes. Here’s how.


Start with a quick landing page check

Before testing anything, your assistant should check the basics:

  • ☐ The headline matches the ad or email that sent people there

  • ☐ One clear action: book, call, buy or sign up

  • ☐ The action button is visible without scrolling on a phone

  • ☐ The form is short: only ask what you need

  • ☐ The page loads quickly on mobile data

  • ☐ Price or next step is clear

  • ☐ Proof is visible: reviews, photos of real work, guarantees you actually offer

  • ☐ The form works and sends to the right inbox

  • ☐ Tracking works, so you can count results

Fixing these often helps more than any test.


Simple tests worth trying

Change one thing at a time, so you know what made the difference:

Test

Version A

Version B

Headline

“Professional carpet cleaning”

“Carpets dry in 4 hours, or the next clean is free” (only if true)

Button text

“Submit”

“Get my quote”

Form length

Name, email, phone, address, notes

Name and phone only

Proof

No reviews

Three short customer reviews near the button

Image

Stock photo

Photo of your own team at work


How to run a test without special software

Two simple options:

  1. Before and after: run version A for four weeks, then version B for four weeks, with similar traffic. Compare.

  2. Split by link: create two versions of the page and send half your ads or emails to each, tagged with different links.

Your assistant tracks visits and actions for each version in Google Analytics or your website builder.


Keep your claims honest

Testing headlines can tempt people to promise more. The FTC says advertising claims must be truthful, not deceptive or unfair, and evidence-based. That includes landing pages. No fake countdown timers, invented “only 2 left” messages or guarantees you won’t honor.

An example. Rafferty runs a carpet cleaning company in Twin Falls, Idaho. His Facebook ads got clicks, but few people booked. His assistant ran the landing page checklist and found the booking button below three paragraphs of text on mobile, and a seven-field form. Version B moved the button to the top, cut the form to name and phone, and added three real reviews. Over the next month, bookings from the same ad spend went up noticeably. (Rafferty is an illustrative example.)


Landing page testing: when results mean something

Small businesses often have small numbers. Ten visits isn’t enough to judge a test. As a rough guide, wait until each version has had a meaningful number of visitors and several actions before deciding. And watch for outside factors: a holiday, a price change or a new ad can change results more than the page itself.

If traffic is very low, skip formal tests. Just fix the checklist items and use common sense.

For tracking the links that feed your pages, see UTM links explained.


FAQ

What is landing page testing?

Comparing two versions of a page to see which one gets more people to take the action you want.


Do small businesses need A/B testing tools?

Not usually. Simple before-and-after comparisons or two tagged versions are often enough.


What should I test first on a landing page?

The headline, button text and form length are usually the quickest wins.


How long should a landing page test run?

Long enough to get a fair number of visits and actions for each version, often several weeks for a small business.


Can a virtual assistant edit my landing pages?

Yes, in most website builders and landing page tools, with editor access.


Make every click count

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can check, update and test your landing pages. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. And if the fit isn’t right, IncludeWork replaces your assistant at no extra cost. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
UTM Tracking for Small Business: A Simple Guide

UTM Tracking for Small Business: A Simple Guide

You sent a newsletter, posted on Instagram and ran a small Facebook ad, all promoting the same offer. Fifty people visited the offer page. Which one worked?

Without tracking, you’re guessing. But it doesn’t have to be that way. UTM tracking is a simple, free way to label your links so your analytics can tell you exactly where each visitor came from. It sounds technical. It isn’t, and it’s a perfect job for a marketing assistant.


What a UTM link is

A UTM link is a normal web address with a few labels added to the end. For example:

yoursite.com/spring-offer?utm_source=newsletter&utm_medium=email&utm_campaign=spring_offer

When someone clicks it, Google Analytics records those labels. The page looks exactly the same to the visitor.


The three labels you always need

Google’s help page on campaign URLs says you should always use these three:

Label

What it means

Example

utm_source

Where the click came from

newsletter, instagram, facebook

utm_medium

The type of channel

email, social, cpc

utm_campaign

Which promotion or campaign

spring_offer, open_day

Optional labels like utm_content help tell apart two links in the same email or two versions of an ad.


UTM tracking rules your assistant should follow

  1. Lowercase everything. “Email” and “email” show up as two different sources.

  2. Use a naming list. Agree a short list of sources and mediums and stick to it.

  3. Keep a link log. A spreadsheet with every tagged link, where it was used and when.

  4. Use a URL builder to avoid typos. Google offers one, and many email and social tools add tags for you.

  5. Don’t tag internal links on your own website. It can mess up your data.

  6. Shorten long links for social posts if needed, but keep the tags.


Where to use UTM links

  • Newsletter links

  • Links in social media bios and posts

  • Paid ads (if the platform doesn’t tag them automatically)

  • QR codes on flyers, packaging or signs

  • Links in partner newsletters or guest posts

  • Email signatures


Reading the results

Once a month, your assistant can check campaign results in Google Analytics and report:

  • Visits from each source and campaign

  • Which ones led to key actions, like inquiries or purchases

  • Which campaign brought the best visitors, not just the most

For the wider monthly check, see Google Analytics checks your assistant should do every month.

An example. Fenella runs a small yarn and knitting supplies shop in Montpelier, Vermont, with an online store. She promoted a winter sale in her newsletter, on Instagram and with flyers that had a QR code. Her assistant tagged every link. The report showed the newsletter brought the most sales, Instagram brought lots of visits but few orders, and the QR code flyers brought a surprising number of first-time buyers. Fenella put more effort into flyers at the next local craft fair. (Fenella is an illustrative example.)


The limits of UTM tracking

UTMs only track clicks. They won’t capture someone who sees your Instagram post, then types your web address directly or searches for you on Google a day later. Some people also use privacy tools that block tracking.

And UTM results show only part of the picture. Combine them with simple questions, like asking new customers how they heard about you.


FAQ

What does UTM stand for?

Urchin Tracking Module, named after the analytics company Google bought, which became Google Analytics. Today it just means campaign tracking tags.


Do UTM links affect SEO?

Not when used on links from outside your site, like emails and social posts. Avoid them on internal links.


Which UTM parameters are required?

Google recommends always using utm_source, utm_medium and utm_campaign.


Can a virtual assistant set up UTM tracking?

Yes. With a naming list and a link log, an assistant can tag links and report results monthly.


Do I need special software for UTM links?

No. A free URL builder and Google Analytics are enough.


Find out what’s actually working

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can tag your links, keep the log and report results each month. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Work is checked by IncludeWork’s quality-control team before it reaches you. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Website Content Updates: Keep Your Site Fresh With a VA

Website Content Updates: Keep Your Site Fresh With a VA

A customer finds your website, sees last year’s prices, a team member who left in spring and a “summer special” that ended months ago. They don’t call to check. They just leave.

Out-of-date content quietly costs sales and trust. Fixing it isn’t hard. It just needs someone to look regularly. Here’s a simple plan for website content updates that an assistant can run every month and every quarter.


Why fresh content matters

  • Customers trust accurate pages. Wrong hours or prices make people doubt everything else.

  • Search engines want helpful pages. Google’s guidance on helpful, people-first content asks whether content is original, useful and trustworthy. Outdated facts don’t help.

  • Old blog posts can rank again when they’re updated with better, current information.

But “fresh” doesn’t mean changing things for the sake of it. A page that’s accurate and useful can stay as it is.


Website content updates: the monthly checklist

Your assistant can run this in an hour or two:

  • ☐ Prices, packages and offers match what you actually charge

  • ☐ Opening hours, holiday hours and contact details are correct

  • ☐ Expired promotions and old events are removed

  • ☐ Team page reflects current staff

  • ☐ Forms send correctly (submit a test)

  • ☐ No broken links on main pages

  • ☐ Homepage banner or announcement is current

  • ☐ New reviews or testimonials added (with permission)


The quarterly review

Every three months, go deeper:

  1. Top 10 pages: reread each one. Is anything wrong, unclear or missing?

  2. Old blog posts: pick three that get some traffic and update them with current information, better examples and a clear next step

  3. Service pages: add answers to questions customers asked this quarter

  4. Images: replace stock photos with real photos of your work where you can, with alt text

  5. Page titles and meta descriptions: check they still match each page


What to update first

Priority

Page type

Why

1

Contact, hours, prices

Wrong info loses customers right away

2

Top service pages

They do most of the selling

3

Popular blog posts

Small updates can bring more visits

4

About and team pages

Builds trust

5

Old, low-traffic posts

Update, merge or leave alone


How to update an old blog post well

  • Check every fact, date and price

  • Add what you’ve learned since

  • Improve the opening so the answer comes sooner

  • Add internal links to newer pages

  • Update the “last updated” date only if you made real changes

An example. Wilhelmina runs a moving company in Columbia, South Carolina. Her website still listed a “spring moving special” in November and a team photo from three years earlier. Her assistant now runs the monthly checklist on the first Monday of each month and, each quarter, updates three blog posts. One updated post on “how much does a local move cost” had current price ranges from Wilhelmina’s own quotes, and it became one of the most-visited pages on her site. (Wilhelmina is an illustrative example.)


What your assistant shouldn’t do alone

  • Change prices or offers without your sign-off

  • Rewrite your main service pages without a review

  • Delete pages that get traffic (redirect or update instead)

  • Make claims about results or guarantees

And some changes, like site structure or big redesigns, need a web developer. For broader SEO housekeeping, see what SEO tasks a virtual assistant can do.


FAQ

How often should I update my website content?

Check key details monthly and review your main pages and popular posts every quarter.


Does updating old blog posts help SEO?

It can, when the update makes the post more accurate and useful. Cosmetic changes alone usually don’t.


Can a virtual assistant update my website?

Yes, in most website builders like WordPress, Squarespace, Wix or Shopify, with an editor-level user account.


Should I delete old blog posts?

Only if they’re inaccurate and get no visits. Otherwise, update or merge them into a better post.


What’s the most important page to keep updated?

Your contact details, hours and prices. Wrong information there loses customers immediately.


Keep your site accurate without thinking about it

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can run monthly website checks and quarterly content updates. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Every IncludeWork assistant signs an NDA before they start. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Competitor Research Virtual Assistant: An Afternoon Plan

Competitor Research Virtual Assistant: An Afternoon Plan

You probably know your top three competitors by name. But do you know what they’re promising customers this month, which of their pages bring them search traffic, or what their unhappy reviewers complain about?

That information is mostly public. It just takes a few focused hours to gather. A competitor research virtual assistant can do it in an afternoon and hand you a one-page summary with ideas you can use.


What to research (and what it tells you)

1. Offers and pricing

What they sell, how they package it, any visible prices, guarantees and current promotions.

Tells you: where you’re cheaper, dearer or simply clearer.


2. Website and content

Their main service pages, blog topics, FAQs and lead magnets.

Tells you: topics customers care about that you haven’t covered.


3. Reviews

Read their Google, Yelp or industry reviews, especially the three-star ones.

Tells you: what customers value and what frustrates them. Their complaints can be your selling points.


4. Social media

Which platforms they use, how often they post and which posts get responses.

Tells you: formats worth testing, and channels they’re ignoring.


5. Backlinks

Which other websites link to them: local directories, news sites, partners, associations, sponsorships.

Tells you: places where you could reasonably earn a link too.


How to research backlinks

For your own site, Google Search Console’s Links report shows your top linking sites, top linked pages and the link text used. For competitors, your assistant can use the free versions or trials of SEO tools, or simply search for the competitor’s name to find mentions.

Good link ideas to look for:

  • Local business directories and chambers of commerce

  • Industry associations and supplier “find a dealer” pages

  • Local news and community event pages

  • Sponsorships of local teams or charities

  • Guest articles or interviews

What to avoid: buying links to boost rankings. Google’s spam policies list “buying or selling links for ranking purposes” as link spam.


The one-page summary

Ask your assistant to finish with a single page:

Competitor

What they do well

Where they’re weak

Idea for us

Competitor A

Publishes high-quality blog content with strong SEO optimization and clear visuals.Blog posts lack detailed examples and actionable tips.Create in-depth, practical guides with real-world examples and helpful visuals.

Competitor B

Maintains a consistent posting schedule and covers trending industry topics.Content is often generic and lacks original insights.Publish unique, research-backed articles with expert opinions and useful takeaways.

Competitor C

Uses engaging headlines, attractive images, and strong social media promotion.Limited internal linking and weak calls to action.Improve internal linking, add relevant CTAs, and optimize content for lead generation.

Plus three recommended actions, in order.

An example. Ines runs a small pet grooming salon in Orlando. Her assistant spent an afternoon on her three nearest competitors. The reviews were the surprise: two competitors had repeated complaints about long waits and unclear prices. Ines added a clear price list to her website and started posting “in by 9, home by 1” on social media. The backlink check also found a local pet adoption charity’s sponsor page that linked to one competitor; Ines sponsored their next event. (Ines is an illustrative example.)


Competitor research virtual assistant: ground rules

  • Use public information only. No fake inquiries, fake accounts or pretending to be a customer.

  • Don’t copy. Use what you learn for ideas, not text or images.

  • Stay factual in anything you publish about competitors.


The limits of an afternoon

A few hours gives you a snapshot, not a full market study. Websites don’t show margins, costs or how busy a competitor really is. And copying a competitor’s strategy rarely beats understanding your own customers.

Repeat the research every six months, and treat it as inspiration, not a script. For deeper SEO work, see what SEO tasks a virtual assistant can do.


FAQ

What is competitor research for a small business?

Looking at competitors’ offers, websites, content, reviews, social media and backlinks to find opportunities and gaps.


Can a virtual assistant do competitor research?

Yes. It’s methodical work with public information, finished with a summary and recommendations.


How do I find my competitors’ backlinks?

SEO tools show backlinks for any site. Free versions and trials are often enough for a small business snapshot.


Should I buy backlinks?

No. Google’s spam policies treat buying links for ranking as link spam.


How often should I research competitors?

Every six months is enough for most small businesses, or before a launch or price change.


Get a competitor snapshot this week

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can research your competitors and send a one-page summary. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. IncludeWork has been running remote assistant teams since 2012. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Google Analytics for Small Business: Monthly VA Checks

Google Analytics for Small Business: Monthly VA Checks

Google Analytics is installed on millions of small business websites. On many of them, nobody has logged in for months.

That’s a waste, because a short monthly check can tell you which marketing is bringing people to your site, which pages work and whether anything has quietly broken. You don’t need to become an analyst. Your marketing assistant can run these checks and send you a plain-English summary. Here’s what Google Analytics for small business looks like in practice.


First, give the right access

Add your assistant as a user rather than sharing your Google login. Google’s help page on access management describes roles from Administrator (full control, including managing users) down to Viewer (can see data and settings and customize reports). For monthly checks, Viewer or Analyst is usually enough. Keep Administrator for yourself.


Google Analytics for small business: eight monthly checks

1. Is tracking still working?

Look for sudden drops to zero, or days with no data. A website update can break tracking without anyone noticing.


2. How many people visited, and is that changing?

Compare users and sessions with the previous month and the same month last year, if you have it. Seasonal businesses should always compare year on year.


3. Where did visitors come from?

Check traffic sources: organic search, social, email, paid ads, referrals, direct. Which ones grew? Which dropped?


4. Are your key actions being counted?

Check your key events (Google Analytics’ name for important actions, like form submissions, calls or purchases). If they’re not set up, ask your assistant to list what should be tracked.


5. Which pages get the most visits?

And which of those pages lead to inquiries? A popular page with no next step is a missed opportunity.


6. Which pages are new to the top list?

New entries often reveal a blog post that’s started ranking or a page someone is sharing.


7. How are campaign links performing?

If you tag links in emails and social posts, compare campaigns. See UTM links explained.


8. Anything strange?

Spikes from unknown sources, visits from countries you don’t serve, or a page suddenly getting no traffic. Flag them.


What the monthly summary should look like

Ask for five lines, not fifty screenshots:

  1. Visitors vs last month (and last year)

  2. Top three traffic sources and any big change

  3. Key events: inquiries, purchases or sign-ups

  4. Top pages and one opportunity

  5. Any problems or oddities

An example. Lorcan runs a garage door repair company in Dayton, Ohio. He had Google Analytics on his site for three years and never opened it. His assistant’s first monthly check found that the quote form hadn’t been tracked since a website redesign, and that one blog post about “garage door won’t close” brought more visitors than his homepage. They fixed the tracking and added a “book a repair” button to that post. (Lorcan is an illustrative example.)


The limits of analytics

Analytics shows what happened on your website, not everything. Phone calls from your Google Business Profile, walk-ins and word of mouth often won’t appear. Privacy settings and ad blockers also mean some visits aren’t counted.

So treat the numbers as signals, not the full truth. And pair them with simple questions, like asking new customers how they found you.

For weekly tracking, see the weekly marketing report template.


FAQ

Is Google Analytics free for small businesses?

The standard version of Google Analytics is free. Larger organizations sometimes use a paid version.


What should a small business check in Google Analytics?

Whether tracking works, visitor trends, traffic sources, key events like inquiries, top pages, campaign results and anything unusual.


What access should I give my assistant in Google Analytics?

Viewer or Analyst is usually enough for monthly checks. Keep Administrator for yourself.


How often should I check Google Analytics?

Monthly is enough for most small businesses, with a quick weekly look if you’re running campaigns.


What are key events in Google Analytics?

Key events are the actions you mark as most important, such as form submissions, purchases or calls.


Turn your data into five clear lines

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can run monthly analytics checks and explain the results in plain English. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Work is checked by IncludeWork’s quality-control team before it reaches you. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Weekly Marketing Report Template: What to Track

Weekly Marketing Report Template: What to Track

A monthly report tells you what happened. A weekly report tells you while you can still do something about it.

But weekly reports go wrong in a predictable way: they grow. Ten metrics become thirty, and soon nobody reads them. The fix is a short weekly marketing report template with a handful of numbers and a few lines of notes, sent on the same day every week.


What a weekly report is for

  • Spotting problems early: a broken form, an ad overspending, a quiet week for inquiries

  • Checking the work happened: posts, emails, replies

  • Keeping you in the loop without meetings

It’s not for big decisions. Those belong in the monthly review, where trends are clearer.


The weekly marketing report template

1. This week in one line

Example: “Normal week. Inquiries steady; Thursday’s email did well; one form error fixed.”

2. Five numbers

Metric

This week

Last week

Note

New inquiries (calls, forms, DMs)




Website visits




Email sign-ups




Ad spend and leads (if running ads)




Reviews received




3. Work completed

  • Posts published: X of Y planned

  • Emails sent

  • Reviews replied to

  • Anything else delivered

4. Issues and flags

Anything broken, delayed or worrying.

5. Next week

Top three tasks.

That’s it. If it takes your assistant more than 10 to 15 minutes to fill in, it’s too long.


Choosing your five numbers

Pick numbers that connect to sales and that your assistant can check quickly. The U.S. Small Business Administration suggests measuring marketing return on investment by comparing costs with the revenue they generate. Weekly, you’re watching the early signs of that: inquiries, sign-ups, leads.

Swap metrics to fit your business:

  • Online store: orders, revenue from email, cart abandonment emails sent

  • Local service: calls from Google Business Profile, quote requests

  • B2B: discovery calls booked, LinkedIn messages from prospects


Weekly marketing report template rules

  • Same day, same format, every week

  • Numbers before opinions

  • Flag anything that changes by a lot, with a guess at why

  • Keep a running tracker so monthly reviews are easy

An example. Valentina owns a small skincare shop in Sarasota, Florida that sells online and in store. Her assistant sends a weekly report every Friday at noon. One week, the report showed website visits steady but email sign-ups at zero. The assistant had already checked: the sign-up form had broken after a website update. It was fixed the same afternoon instead of being discovered a month later. (Valentina is an illustrative example.)


When weekly reporting is too much

If you only have a few hours of marketing help a week, a full weekly report may take time better spent on the work. In that case, ask for a three-line weekly note and a fuller monthly report.

And don’t overreact to one week. Small numbers swing. Look for patterns over three or four weeks before changing course. For the monthly view of social media, see the monthly social media report.


FAQ

What should a weekly marketing report include?

A one-line summary, five key numbers compared with last week, work completed, issues and next week’s priorities.


How long should a weekly marketing report take?

About 10 to 15 minutes for your assistant to fill in and two minutes for you to read.


Which marketing metrics should small businesses track weekly?

Inquiries, website visits, email sign-ups, ad spend and leads, and reviews are a good starting set.


Weekly or monthly reports: which is better?

Both have a role. Weekly catches problems early; monthly shows trends and guides decisions.


What tool should I use for weekly reports?

A shared spreadsheet or document is enough for most small businesses.


Know what’s happening every Friday

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants send short weekly reports alongside the work. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. And if the fit isn’t right, IncludeWork replaces your assistant at no extra cost. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Ads Virtual Assistant: What a VA Can Do in Your Ads

Ads Virtual Assistant: What a VA Can Do in Your Ads

Paid ads are where marketing mistakes cost real money, fast. A wrong budget setting or a broad audience can burn through a month’s spend in a weekend.

So can you hand ads to a virtual assistant? Partly. An ads virtual assistant can handle a lot of the hands-on work around your campaigns. But strategy and heavy optimization usually need someone with deeper ad experience. Here’s where the line sits.


What an ads virtual assistant can usually handle

  • Building ads from your plan: uploading images, writing ad text variations, setting up campaigns you’ve designed

  • Creating ad graphics and short videos in your brand style

  • Daily checks: is spend on track, are ads running, any disapprovals?

  • Weekly reporting: spend, clicks, leads, cost per lead

  • Managing leads: moving form leads into your CRM and following up

  • Pausing and adjusting within rules you’ve set, like “pause any ad with no leads after $50”

  • Keeping landing pages and offers in sync with ads


What usually needs a specialist (or you)

  • Overall ad strategy: which platforms, which audiences, which offers

  • Budget decisions beyond agreed limits

  • Bidding strategy and complex optimization

  • Tracking setup: conversion tracking, pixels, analytics links

  • Diagnosing poor results across campaigns

A common, affordable setup: a specialist designs the campaigns and reviews them monthly; an assistant handles daily execution and reporting.


Set up access the safe way

Never share your login. Add your assistant as a user with limited rights.

In Google Ads, for example, Google’s help page on access levels explains that Standard access lets someone edit campaigns, but not give account access to others, change access levels, complete advertiser verification or edit payment methods. That’s usually the right level for an assistant. Keep Admin and billing with you.

Meta’s ad tools have their own roles. Use a role that allows managing ads but not payment methods or business settings.


Rules every ads assistant needs

  1. A written monthly budget, with a daily maximum per campaign

  2. Spending limits they can’t go over without approval

  3. Approval required for any new campaign, audience or offer

  4. Truthful ads only. The FTC says advertising claims must be truthful, not deceptive or unfair, and backed by evidence. No invented discounts, fake scarcity or results you can’t support.

  5. Daily check-in on spend during the first month


A weekly ads routine

Day

Task

Daily

Check spend, delivery and disapprovals; flag anything odd

Monday

Pull last week’s numbers into the tracker

Wednesday

Refresh one or two ad creatives if planned

Friday

Send a short summary: spend, leads, cost per lead, notes

An example. Ottilie runs a home organizing business in Durham, North Carolina, with ads on Facebook and Google. A freelance ads specialist set up her campaigns and reviews them each month. Her assistant handles everything in between: checking spend each morning, adding new before-and-after ad images each month, moving form leads into her CRM within the hour and sending a Friday summary. When cost per lead jumped one week, the assistant flagged it on Tuesday instead of at month’s end. (Ottilie is an illustrative example.)


When this setup doesn’t work

If no one has designed a clear plan, an assistant will be guessing, and guessing with ads is expensive. The same goes for very large budgets, where small changes have big effects.

And be careful with anyone, assistant or agency, who promises guaranteed returns from ads. No one can promise that. For a broader view of what assistants can do, see what SEO tasks a virtual assistant can do and the weekly marketing report.


FAQ

Can a virtual assistant run Facebook ads?

They can build, monitor and report on ads within a plan you or a specialist set. Strategy and complex optimization usually need more experience.


What access should I give an ads assistant in Google Ads?

Standard access lets them edit campaigns without managing users, verification or payment methods. Keep Admin and billing yourself.


How do I stop an assistant overspending on ads?

Set campaign budgets and limits in the ad platform, agree written rules and check spend daily at first.


Is an ads VA cheaper than an agency?

Usually, for day-to-day work. Many businesses combine a part-time specialist for strategy with an assistant for execution.


What reports should my ads assistant send?

A weekly summary of spend, clicks, leads and cost per lead, with notes on anything unusual.


Get help with the daily ads work

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can monitor spend, build ads from your plan and report weekly. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Every IncludeWork assistant signs an NDA before they start. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Keyword Research Virtual Assistant: A Simple Process

Keyword Research Virtual Assistant: A Simple Process

You know what you sell. But do you know what your customers type into Google when they need it?

Often the words are different. You say “residential HVAC maintenance”; they type “why is my AC blowing warm air”. Keyword research closes that gap, and it’s methodical work a keyword research virtual assistant can do well, using mostly free tools. Here’s a simple process.


What keyword research is for

The point isn’t a giant list of phrases. It’s a short list of real questions and searches that:

  • Your customers actually use

  • You can answer well

  • Lead to something you sell

Google’s SEO Starter Guide encourages thinking about the words people would use to look for your content and using them naturally on your pages. Keyword research tells you what those words are.


How a keyword research virtual assistant works, step by step

Step 1: Start with what you already know

Your assistant asks you for:

  • Your main services or products

  • Questions customers ask every week

  • The words customers use on calls and in emails

This “seed list” is often the most valuable part.


Step 2: Check what’s already working

If you use Google Search Console, its Performance report shows searches that already bring people to your site. Your assistant pulls the top queries and notes pages that rank on page two, which are often the easiest wins.


Step 3: Expand the list with free tools

  • Google search itself: autocomplete suggestions and the “People also ask” box

  • Google’s Keyword Planner (inside a Google Ads account) for rough search volumes

  • Competitor sites: the topics and headings they cover

  • Forums and Q&A sites where customers ask questions in their own words

Paid tools like Semrush or Ahrefs add more data. But for a small business, free tools are often enough to start.


Step 4: Sort into a simple spreadsheet

Keyword

Rough volume

What the searcher wants

Our page or idea

Priority

ac blowing warm air

Medium

Fix a problem now

New blog post + service page link

High

hvac maintenance plan cost

Low

Compare prices

Update pricing page

High

how often change furnace filter

Medium

Quick answer

Short blog post

Medium


Step 5: Group and prioritize

Your assistant groups similar keywords into topics and marks priority by:

  • How closely it leads to a sale

  • How well you can answer it

  • How hard it looks to rank (big national sites vs small local ones)


Step 6: Turn it into a plan

The output is a short list: three to six topics for the next quarter, each with a target page, either new or updated.

An example. Saoirse runs a small window and door installation business in Allentown, Pennsylvania. Her site talked about “fenestration solutions”. Her keyword research virtual assistant spent four hours on the steps above and found customers searching for things like “drafty windows fix” and “window replacement cost per window”. Saoirse rewrote her service page headings in those words and asked her assistant to draft two blog posts from the list. (Saoirse is an illustrative example.)


The limits of DIY keyword research

Free tools give rough numbers, not exact ones. Search volumes are estimates, and small local searches may show as “no data” even when real people search them.

And research is only the start. A list of keywords does nothing until someone writes or updates pages. For competitive industries, a specialist may be worth it for strategy. For briefing the posts themselves, see our blog post brief template.


FAQ

Can a virtual assistant do keyword research?

Yes. With a clear process and your input on services and customer questions, a VA can research, organize and prioritize keywords.


What tools does a VA need for keyword research?

Google search, Google Search Console and Google’s Keyword Planner cover a lot. Paid tools add more data if budget allows.


How long does keyword research take?

A first pass for a small business often takes a few hours. Updating it each quarter is quicker.


How many keywords should I target?

Focus on a handful of topics at a time, each with one main page, rather than a long list.


Should every page target a keyword?

Pages that you want found in search should have a clear main topic. Some pages, like a thank-you page, don’t need one.


Find the words your customers use

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can run keyword research and turn it into a content plan. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. IncludeWork has been running remote assistant teams since 2012. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Local SEO Virtual Assistant: Listings, Reviews, Posts

Local SEO Virtual Assistant: Listings, Reviews, Posts

When someone nearby searches “plumber near me” or “best tacos downtown”, Google shows a map and a short list of businesses. Getting into that list is called local SEO, and for most local businesses it matters more than any other kind of search.

The good news is that a lot of local SEO is steady housekeeping: accurate listings, fresh posts, answered reviews. It’s ideal work for a local SEO virtual assistant. Here’s what to hand over and what to keep.


What Google says matters for local ranking

Google’s own help page on improving your local ranking names three main factors: relevance (how well your profile matches the search), distance (how close you are) and prominence (how well known you are, including reviews and ratings).

Its tips include completing your business information, keeping hours accurate, responding to reviews, adding photos and encouraging customers to leave reviews. It also says there’s no way to request or pay for a better local ranking.

You can’t change distance. But an assistant can work on almost everything else.


Weekly tasks for a local SEO virtual assistant

Google Business Profile

  • Post an update every week: a recent job, an offer, an event, a tip

  • Add new photos of your work, team and premises

  • Keep hours current, including holiday hours

  • Answer questions in the Q&A section, or flag them to you

  • Check for suggested edits from the public and correct anything wrong


Reviews

  • Draft replies to every new review

  • Thank positive reviewers (often without needing your approval once rules are set)

  • Flag negative reviews to you with a suggested reply

  • Send review requests to real customers after a job or purchase


Listings beyond Google

  • Check your name, address and phone match on Apple Maps, Bing, Yelp, Facebook and industry directories

  • Fix inconsistencies like old addresses or phone numbers

  • Claim missing listings on directories that matter in your industry


A monthly local SEO check

Once a month, your assistant can:

  1. Search your main services plus your town and note where you appear

  2. Review Google Business Profile insights: calls, direction requests, website clicks

  3. Count new reviews and your average rating

  4. Spot-check three directories for accuracy

  5. Send you a short summary with one or two next steps


The review rules

Reviews help prominence. But how you get them matters. The FTC’s rule on fake reviews bans fake reviews, paying for reviews that must be positive and undisclosed reviews from staff.

So your assistant should:

  • Ask real customers only

  • Ask everyone, not just people you expect to be happy

  • Never write reviews or offer rewards for positive ones

An example. Benedikt runs a family locksmith business in St. Louis. His Google profile had old hours, two photos and unanswered reviews from last year. His local SEO virtual assistant updated every detail, started weekly posts with photos from jobs, and set up a simple text asking customers for a review after each call-out. Within a few months, calls from his Google profile were noticeably up, and every review had a reply. (Benedikt is an illustrative example.)


What a local SEO assistant can’t fix

Some things are outside an assistant’s control. Distance is one: if you’re far from the searcher, you’ll rank lower for “near me” searches, whatever you do. Competitors with years of reviews won’t be overtaken in a month.

And bigger issues, like a website that doesn’t work on phones or a business category that doesn’t fit, may need a specialist. For broader SEO, see what SEO tasks a virtual assistant can do.


FAQ

What does a local SEO virtual assistant do?

They manage your Google Business Profile, keep listings accurate, draft review replies, request reviews from real customers and report monthly.


How often should I post on Google Business Profile?

Weekly is a good, sustainable rhythm for most local businesses.


Can a VA reply to Google reviews for me?

Yes, once they’re added as a manager on your profile. Approve replies to negative reviews yourself.


Can I pay to rank higher on Google Maps?

Not in the organic local results. Google says there’s no way to request or pay for a better local ranking. Ads are separate.


How long does local SEO take to work?

It varies with competition. Steady weekly work usually shows results over months, not days.


Keep your local presence active every week

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can manage your Google Business Profile, listings and reviews. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Work is checked by IncludeWork’s quality-control team before it reaches you. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
SEO Virtual Assistant: What SEO Tasks Can a VA Do?

SEO Virtual Assistant: What SEO Tasks Can a VA Do?

SEO can feel like a black box. You know you should show up on Google, but every guide jumps straight to jargon, tools and 47-step checklists.

Here’s the useful part: most of the work that helps a small business show up in search is steady, repeatable housekeeping. An SEO virtual assistant can handle a lot of it. Strategy and technical fixes are a different story, and we’ll be clear about where that line sits.


What an SEO virtual assistant can do

On your website

  • Write or update page titles and meta descriptions so each page has a unique, clear summary

  • Add alt text to images, describing what the image shows

  • Fix broken links and update old pages

  • Format and upload blog posts with clear headings

  • Add internal links between related pages and articles

  • Keep service pages, prices and contact details current

These line up with the basics in Google’s own SEO Starter Guide, which covers clear titles, descriptive URLs, image alt text and helpful content. It also notes that Google Search doesn’t use the keywords meta tag, so no one needs to spend time on it.


Local SEO

For most local businesses, this is where an assistant earns their hours:

  • Weekly Google Business Profile posts and photo updates

  • Keeping hours, services and holiday hours accurate

  • Drafting replies to reviews for your approval

  • Checking your name, address and phone match across directories and listings

  • Sending review requests to real customers after a job


Research

  • Basic keyword research: what customers type when they look for what you offer

  • Competitor checks: which topics and pages competitors rank for

  • Content ideas based on the questions customers ask you


Reporting

  • A monthly report from Google Search Console and Google Analytics: clicks, top pages, top searches

  • Tracking a short list of keywords you care about


What to keep with an SEO specialist

An SEO virtual assistant is strong on execution. But some work needs deeper expertise:

  • SEO strategy: which topics and pages to build, and in what order

  • Technical SEO: site speed, indexing problems, site migrations, structured data

  • Recovering from a big traffic drop

  • Link-building campaigns

Many small businesses get a specialist to set the plan once or twice a year, then have a VA carry it out every week. And if you’re not sure where SEO fits against other channels, a short consultation can save months of guessing.


A simple monthly SEO routine

Week

Task

Time (rough)

1

Pull last month’s Search Console numbers, note top pages and searches

1–2 hours

2

Update titles, meta descriptions and alt text on 3–5 pages

2–3 hours

3

Format and publish one article, add internal links

2–4 hours

4

Google Business Profile posts, review replies, listing checks

1–2 hours

The times are rough guides for a small site. Your assistant’s real hours depend on how many pages you have and how much needs fixing.

An example. Beatriz runs a small family law firm in Fresno, California. Her site had 30 pages, half with the same generic title. Her SEO virtual assistant rewrote titles and meta descriptions for every page over a month, added alt text to old images and set up weekly Google Business Profile posts. A paralegal checked anything with legal content before it went live. Beatriz still uses a specialist for strategy once a year. (Beatriz is an illustrative example.)


How to check an SEO VA’s work

You don’t need to be an expert to keep quality high:

  • Read three titles and meta descriptions. Do they describe the page in plain words?

  • Check a few images for alt text that describes what’s shown

  • Look at the monthly report for trends over months, not single-week jumps

  • Ask “why” on any change. A good assistant can explain it simply.

Watch out for anyone who promises a #1 ranking or guaranteed traffic. No one can promise that.


FAQ

Can a virtual assistant do SEO?

Yes, for most routine work: page titles, meta descriptions, alt text, local listings, publishing content and reporting. Strategy and technical fixes are better with a specialist.


How many hours does an SEO VA need?

For a small site, many owners start with 6 to 10 hours a month and adjust once they see what needs doing.


What tools does an SEO virtual assistant use?

Usually Google Search Console, Google Analytics, Google Business Profile and your website editor. Some also use paid keyword tools.


How long does SEO take to show results?

It varies by competition and starting point. Expect months, not weeks, and watch trends over time.


Is local SEO different from regular SEO?

Yes. Local SEO focuses on your Google Business Profile, reviews and listings so you show up for nearby searches.


Get the SEO housekeeping done

If your site and listings haven’t been touched in months, an SEO virtual assistant can catch up the basics and keep them current. IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants handle local SEO, content updates and reporting. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. And if the fit isn’t right, IncludeWork replaces your assistant at no extra cost. Start your free hours.

For more ideas, see 35 marketing tasks to outsource.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Content Creation Workflow: One Interview, a Month of Posts

Content Creation Workflow: One Interview, a Month of Posts

Some owners can sit down and write. Most can’t, or won’t, because writing feels like homework at the end of a long day.

But almost every owner can talk about their business. Ask them about the job that went wrong, the question every customer asks or the mistake competitors make, and the ideas pour out. This content creation workflow uses that. Your assistant interviews you once a month for 30 to 45 minutes and turns the recording into a month of content.


Why interviews beat blank pages

  • Your real voice comes through. Spoken answers sound like you, not like a brochure.

  • Your experience is the point. Google’s guidance on helpful, people-first content asks whether content shows first-hand expertise and depth of knowledge. Interviews capture exactly that.

  • It takes less of your time. One call replaces a month of “I’ll write something this weekend.”


The content creation workflow, step by step

Step 1: Your assistant prepares questions (before the call)

They pick a theme for the month and draft 8 to 10 questions. Good questions ask for stories and opinions:

  • “What’s the most common mistake customers make before they call you?”

  • “Tell me about a job that didn’t go to plan. What happened?”

  • “What do you wish people knew about [topic]?”

  • “What do competitors say that you disagree with?”


Step 2: The interview (30 to 45 minutes)

A video or phone call, recorded with your permission. Your only job is to answer like you’re talking to a customer. Tangents are welcome; they’re often the best material.


Step 3: Transcribe and pull out ideas

Your assistant gets a transcript (many tools do this automatically) and highlights:

  • Stories

  • Strong opinions

  • Practical tips

  • Quotable lines


Step 4: Turn it into content

From one interview, a typical month might include:

Format

Example output

Blog post

One article built around the main theme

Newsletter

A tip or story from the interview

Social posts

8 to 12 posts: quotes, tips, short stories

Short video

Two or three clips if the call was recorded on video

Website

New FAQ answers for a service page


Step 5: You approve

Your assistant sends the month’s content in one batch. You check facts and tone, usually in 20 to 30 minutes.

An example. Augusta runs a small accounting firm in Spokane that serves restaurants. She never had time to write. Now her assistant interviews her on the first Tuesday of each month. In one 40-minute call about “why restaurants run out of cash in January”, she told three client stories (with details changed), explained her cash-flow rule of thumb and complained about a popular myth. That became a blog post, a newsletter, ten LinkedIn posts and two short videos. (Augusta is an illustrative example.)


Tips for better interviews

  • Do it at the same time each month so it becomes routine

  • Pick one theme per interview

  • Bring a recent example from your week

  • Don’t prepare answers. Natural beats rehearsed.

  • Protect client privacy. Change names and details in stories unless clients have agreed.


When this workflow struggles

If you find it hard to talk on the spot, the first interview may feel awkward. That usually passes by the second or third. And if your business has strict rules about what you can say publicly, like legal or financial services, every piece needs a careful compliance check, which adds time.

Interviews also need a skilled assistant to shape spoken answers into clear writing. Test that with one interview before committing to a monthly routine.

For turning one piece into many more, see the content repurposing system.


FAQ

What is a content creation workflow?

A repeatable process for planning, creating, approving and publishing content, so it doesn’t depend on spare time or inspiration.


How much content can one interview produce?

Often a blog post, a newsletter and a week or more of social posts, depending on length and how many stories come up.


Do I need special equipment to record interviews?

No. A video call tool or phone recording is enough. Many tools create transcripts automatically.


Can my assistant write in my voice from an interview?

Yes. Your own words in the transcript make matching your voice much easier.


How often should we do content interviews?

Monthly works well for most businesses. Some prefer a shorter call every two weeks.


Talk once, publish all month

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can run monthly content interviews and turn them into posts, emails and articles. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Every IncludeWork assistant signs an NDA before they start. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Collect Customer Testimonials (and Use Them Well)

How to Collect Customer Testimonials (and Use Them Well)

Happy customers say lovely things. On the phone. In passing. In a thank-you text you screenshot and never use.

Most small businesses have far more praise than they’ve ever published. The gap is a process: someone has to ask, follow up, get permission and turn a few kind words into something useful. Here’s how an assistant can collect customer testimonials every month and turn the best ones into short case studies.


How to collect customer testimonials 

step 1: ask at the right moment

The best time to ask is right after a good result:

  • A job is finished and the customer is pleased

  • A product arrives and they reply with thanks

  • A client hits a goal you helped with

  • Someone leaves a positive review or comment

Your assistant can set up a simple trigger: when a job is marked complete, a friendly request goes out a day or two later.


Step 2: Make it easy to answer

Blank boxes get blank answers. Give two or three short questions:

  1. What was going on before you came to us?

  2. What did we do that helped?

  3. What’s different now?

Short answers are fine. Your assistant can tidy grammar but shouldn’t change the meaning.


Step 3: Get clear permission

Before publishing anything, your assistant should confirm in writing:

  • That you can use their words, and where (website, social, ads)

  • How they want to be named: full name, first name and town, or initials

  • Whether you can use a photo

Keep a simple log of who agreed to what.


Step 4: Follow the rules

The FTC’s endorsement guidance applies to testimonials. In plain terms:

  • Testimonials must reflect real, honest opinions from real customers

  • Disclose any incentive, like a discount or gift for leaving a testimonial

  • Don’t imply unusual results are typical

  • Don’t edit words to change what the customer meant

And the FTC’s rule on fake reviews bans fake testimonials, including AI-generated ones, and paying for reviews that must be positive. This is general information, not legal advice.


Step 5: Turn the best into short case studies

A case study is a testimonial with a story. Your assistant can turn a good testimonial and a 15-minute call into a one-page case study:

Section

What goes in it

The customer

Who they are, in one or two lines

The problem

What wasn’t working

What we did

The steps, in plain words

The result

What changed, with numbers only if the customer confirms them

In their words

A short quote


Step 6: Use them everywhere

  • A testimonials page on your website

  • Short quotes on service pages, next to the relevant service

  • Social posts, with the customer’s photo if they agreed

  • Your newsletter

  • Sales emails and proposals

An example. Rosamund runs a kitchen remodeling company in Louisville. She had dozens of thank-you texts but only three testimonials on her website. Her assistant now emails three questions a week after each finished job, logs permissions and turns one testimonial a month into a short before-and-after case study with photos. Rosamund approves each case study before it goes live. And her proposals now include two case studies that match the client’s project. (Rosamund is an illustrative example.)


The awkward part

Asking for praise can feel uncomfortable, especially for owners who don’t like to boast. That’s another reason to hand the asking to an assistant: a polite, routine request feels normal to customers.

But not everyone will reply, and that’s fine. Never pressure customers, and never write testimonials for them.

For more ways to put customer stories to work, see the content repurposing system your assistant can run.


FAQ

How do I collect customer testimonials?

Ask soon after a good result, with two or three short questions, and get written permission before publishing.


Can I offer a discount for a testimonial?

You can offer an incentive, but it must not depend on the testimonial being positive, and it should be disclosed.


Can my assistant edit customer testimonials?

Light grammar fixes are fine. Changing the meaning is not.


What’s the difference between a testimonial and a case study?

A testimonial is a short quote. A case study tells the story: problem, solution and result.


Where should I put testimonials on my website?

On a dedicated page and next to the services they relate to.


Start collecting this month

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can run your testimonial requests, permissions log and case studies. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. IncludeWork has been running remote assistant teams since 2012. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Keep a Content Calendar Full With a Part-Time Assistant

Keep a Content Calendar Full With a Part-Time Assistant

The first week of a new content calendar is easy. Everyone’s full of ideas. By week six, the calendar has gaps, and someone is staring at a blank caption at 4pm on a Thursday.

The problem isn’t your assistant’s hours. It’s that most content calendars run on inspiration instead of a system. Here’s how a part-time assistant can keep yours full, month after month, without you supplying every idea.


Start with monthly themes

Themes make planning faster. Each month gets one or two, tied to what’s happening in your business and your customers’ lives:

Month

Example theme for a local home services business

January

Fixing what the holidays broke

March

Spring checklists

June

Summer prep and safety

September

Back-to-routine maintenance

November

Getting the home ready for guests

Your assistant drafts themes for the year; you adjust them in one 20-minute review.


Use content “pillars” for each week

Pick four or five repeating types of post. For example:

  1. How-to or tip

  2. Behind the scenes

  3. Customer story or review (with permission)

  4. Offer or announcement

  5. Question or poll

A weekly calendar then becomes “one of each” instead of “think of five new things”.


Build an ideas bank

Ask your assistant to keep a running list of ideas from:

  • Questions customers ask you or your team

  • Comments and DMs

  • Your photos and videos folder

  • Seasonal dates and local events

  • Posts that did well last year

  • Blog posts or emails that can be repurposed

When it’s time to plan, they pull from the bank instead of starting from nothing.


The monthly content calendar routine

When

What

Who

Week 3 of each month

Draft next month’s calendar from themes, pillars and the ideas bank

Assistant

Week 3

Send any new photos, offers or dates

You

Week 4

Approve the calendar in one sitting

You (about 20 minutes)

Week 4

Create and schedule the posts

Assistant

Weekly

Fill any gaps from the backup list; reply and report

Assistant

The U.S. Small Business Administration describes a marketing plan as the way to turn your strategy into actions. A content calendar is where those actions get a date.


Keep backup posts ready

Busy weeks happen. But they don’t have to leave gaps. Your assistant should keep five to ten “evergreen” posts ready: tips, FAQs, team introductions, past customer stories. When something falls through, a backup goes out and the calendar stays full.

An example. Cornelius runs a window cleaning and gutter business in Wilmington, North Carolina. His content calendar used to empty out every summer, his busiest season. His part-time assistant now builds each month from four pillars and a seasonal theme, and keeps eight evergreen posts ready. In July, when Cornelius had no time to send photos, the backup posts covered two weeks without a gap. (Cornelius is an illustrative example.)


Content calendar problems and fixes

  • “We run out of ideas.” Feed the ideas bank from customer questions every week.

  • “Posts feel repetitive.” Rotate pillars and refresh formats: video, carousel, photo, text.

  • “Approvals are slow.” Approve the whole month at once. See how to approve a month of social posts in 20 minutes.

  • “I never send photos.” Set a five-minute weekly reminder to drop photos in a shared folder.


What a full calendar can’t fix

A full calendar is about consistency, not results on its own. If posts don’t connect to what customers want, filling every slot won’t help. Review what worked every month and drop formats that don’t.

And more isn’t always better. Three good posts a week beat seven rushed ones.


FAQ

What is a content calendar?

A plan that shows what you’ll post, where and when, usually for a month at a time.


How far ahead should I plan content?

A month ahead works for most small businesses, with themes sketched out for the year.


Can a part-time assistant manage a content calendar?

Yes. With themes, pillars and an ideas bank, a few hours a week is often enough to plan and schedule.


What tool should I use for a content calendar?

A shared spreadsheet, your scheduling tool’s calendar or a project board. The best one is the one you’ll open.


How many posts should be on my calendar?

Start with what you can sustain, often three posts a week per platform, and adjust based on results.


Never stare at an empty calendar again

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can build and fill your content calendar every month. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Work is checked by IncludeWork’s quality-control team before it reaches you. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Brand Voice Guide Template: One Page for Your Assistant

Brand Voice Guide Template: One Page for Your Assistant

Ask five people to write a post for your business and you’ll get five different businesses. One sounds corporate. One uses too many exclamation marks. One sounds like a template.

A brand voice guide fixes that. It doesn’t need to be a 40-page brand book. One page is enough for a small business, and it’s the single most useful document you can hand a marketing assistant. Here’s a brand voice guide template, how to fill it in, and an example.


Why one page beats a brand book

Long brand books are rarely read. A one-page guide gets opened every time someone writes a caption. It answers the questions your assistant would otherwise ask you, or worse, guess.


The brand voice guide template

1. Who we are, in one sentence

What you do, for whom, and what makes you different.

2. Who we’re talking to

Two or three sentences about your best customers: what they care about, what they worry about, how they talk. The U.S. Small Business Administration suggests describing your target market in detail in your marketing plan. This is the short version.

3. Three words for our voice

Pick three, and add what each one doesn’t mean. Example: “Friendly, but not silly.”

4. Words and phrases we use

Your real vocabulary. The way you describe your product, your customers, your process.

5. Words and phrases we never use

Jargon, clichés, competitor terms, anything that sounds off.

6. Style rules

Emojis (yes/no, which), exclamation marks, hashtags, capitals, how you sign off, “we” or “I”.

7. Three examples we love

Paste posts or emails that sound exactly right.

8. One example we don’t

And a line on why.

9. Topics to avoid

Politics, competitors, pricing promises, anything sensitive.


A filled-in example

Who we are: a family-run bicycle repair shop that gets you back on the road fast, without upselling.

Our customers: commuters and weekend riders who want honest advice and quick fixes. They hate jargon and being talked down to.

Our voice: practical, but not dry. Friendly, but not silly. Confident, but never pushy.

We say: “tune-up”, “same-day fix”, “ride”, “we’ll take a look”.

We never say: “luxury riding experience”, “best-in-class”, “world-class service”.

Style: one emoji max, no exclamation marks in emails, sign off as “the shop team”.

Topics to avoid: politics, bad-mouthing other shops, promising exact repair prices before inspection.


How to fill in the brand voice guide template

  1. Read your last 20 posts and emails. Mark the ones that sound most like you.

  2. Ask a regular customer to describe you in three words.

  3. Record yourself explaining your business to a friend. Your natural words are your voice.

  4. Write it in under an hour. Don’t polish it. Improve it as you go.


Using it with your assistant

  • Share it on day one, before any writing

  • Ask them to read it before every batch of content

  • Point to it in feedback: “This breaks rule 5”

  • Update it whenever you notice a new rule

An example. Thaddeus runs a craft cider house in Hood River, Oregon. His first assistant’s posts were cheerful and generic: “Cheers to the weekend!!” He spent 40 minutes on a one-page guide: “dry, a bit wry, never twee”, a list of real orchard words and three past posts he loved. The next batch needed two small edits instead of rewrites. (Thaddeus is an illustrative example.)


What a voice guide can’t do

A voice guide gets your assistant most of the way. But it won’t replace feedback in the first few weeks. Voice is learned by doing and adjusting.

And it can’t fix content that has nothing to say. A post in perfect brand voice still needs a real point: news, a tip, a story, an offer.

For the full setup, see how to onboard a marketing virtual assistant.


FAQ

What is a brand voice guide?

A short document that explains how your business sounds in writing: personality, words to use and avoid, style rules and examples.


How long should a brand voice guide be?

One page is enough for most small businesses.


What’s the difference between brand voice and tone?

Voice is your consistent personality. Tone shifts with the situation, like warmer for a complaint reply and lighter for a fun post.


Do I need a brand voice guide if I write everything myself?

It helps the moment anyone else writes for you, even occasionally.


How often should I update it?

Whenever you notice a new rule, and at least once a year.


Give your assistant the one page that matters

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can help you draft your voice guide from your past posts, then write to it. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Every IncludeWork assistant signs an NDA before they start. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Grow Your Email List: A Plan Your Assistant Runs

How to Grow Your Email List: A Plan Your Assistant Runs

Social media followers belong to the platform. Your email list belongs to you. If an algorithm changes tomorrow, your emails still land in the inbox of people who asked to hear from you.

That’s why it’s worth the slow, steady work to grow your email list. And slow, steady work is exactly what an assistant is good at. Here’s a plan they can run week by week, plus the rules to follow so your list stays clean and legal.


Step 1: Put sign-up forms where people already are

Your assistant can set up and check sign-up points in all the obvious places owners forget:

  • Website: footer, blog posts, contact page, a simple pop-up (used gently)

  • Checkout or booking: a clear, unticked opt-in box

  • Social profiles: a link in your bio or page button

  • In person: a QR code at the counter or on receipts

  • Email signature: a one-line invitation with a link

Most small businesses are missing at least two of these.


Step 2: Give people a reason to join

“Subscribe to our newsletter” isn’t much of a reason. Something specific works better:

  • A one-page checklist or guide related to your service

  • Early access to new products, classes or seasonal menus

  • A useful monthly tip, clearly described: “One gardening job for each month, in two minutes”

  • A small first-order discount, if it fits your margins

Your assistant can create the simple version: a PDF checklist in Canva, a landing page and the delivery email.


Step 3: Send a welcome email

New subscribers are most interested right after joining. A short welcome email should:

  • Deliver whatever you promised

  • Say what they’ll get and how often

  • Introduce you in two or three sentences

  • Invite a reply or a first step

Your assistant can set this up as an automation in your email platform.


Step 4: Promote the list every week

  • Mention the sign-up in one social post a week

  • Add a sign-up link to relevant blog posts

  • Ask happy customers in person or in follow-up emails

  • Partner with a complementary local business for a joint giveaway (with clear rules)


The rules for building a list

U.S. commercial email has to follow the CAN-SPAM Act. The FTC’s compliance guide requires, among other things, a clear way to opt out, honoring opt-outs within 10 business days and your valid physical postal address in every email.

Good practice goes further:

  • Never buy or rent lists

  • Don’t add business cards or contacts who didn’t ask to join

  • Use an unticked box for opt-ins at checkout

  • Remove hard bounces after each send

  • Record where each subscriber came from

This is general information, not legal advice. Different rules can apply to subscribers outside the U.S.


Grow your email list without spamming it

Growth only matters if people stay. Your assistant should watch unsubscribes and complaints after each send. If they rise, the emails may be too frequent or not useful enough. Fix the content before pushing for more sign-ups.

An example. Imelda runs a family-owned plant nursery in Sacramento. Her list had barely changed in two years. Her assistant added a QR code at the till, a footer form on the website and a free “what to plant this month” calendar as a sign-up reason. They also set up a three-email welcome series. Sign-ups came steadily from the till and the calendar, and the monthly newsletter now goes to noticeably more local gardeners. (Imelda is an illustrative example.)


What to expect

List growth is usually slow and steady, not explosive. Some months will be flat. And a smaller list of interested people is worth more than a big list of people who never open your emails.

Give the plan three to six months before judging it. Track sign-ups by source each month to see what’s working.

For the monthly sending side, see how a marketing VA can run your email newsletter.


FAQ

What’s the fastest way to grow an email list?

A clear reason to join, placed where people already are: your website, checkout, social profiles and counter.


Can I add my customers to my email list?

Only if they agreed to receive marketing emails. A purchase alone isn’t always enough; ask clearly.


Should I buy an email list?

No. Bought lists hurt deliverability and often break platform rules and email laws.


What is a lead magnet?

Something useful you offer in exchange for an email address, like a checklist, guide or early access.


How often should I email my list?

Monthly is a good start for most small businesses. Increase only if you have useful things to say.


Start growing this month

IncludeWork’s assistants can set up forms, a lead magnet and a welcome series as part of email campaign setup and management. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. And if the fit isn’t right, IncludeWork replaces your assistant at no extra cost. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
AI and Virtual Assistant Content: More Output, Same Quality

AI and Virtual Assistant Content: More Output, Same Quality

AI tools can draft a blog post in a minute. That doesn’t mean you should publish it in a minute.

Owners who use AI alone often end up with content that’s fast, bland and occasionally wrong. Owners who skip AI entirely may be doing more manual work than they need to. The middle path, AI and virtual assistant content work together, gets you more output while a real person keeps it accurate and on brand.


Who does what

Task

AI tool

Marketing assistant

You

Brainstorm topics and angles

Good at it

Filters for fit

Picks

First drafts of captions and emails

Good at it

Rewrites in your voice

Approves

Research summaries

Helpful, but can be wrong

Checks sources

—

Facts, prices, claims

Not reliable on its own

Verifies every one

Confirms

Personal stories and expertise

Can’t supply them

Asks you for them

Provides

Formatting, scheduling, publishing

Limited

Does it

—

Final judgment

No

Flags concerns

Decides


Where AI saves real time

  • Blank-page drafts: a rough first version of a caption, email or outline

  • Variations: five subject lines or three versions of a post

  • Repurposing: turning a blog post into a short email or social posts

  • Summaries: condensing a long transcript or meeting notes

  • Editing help: shortening, simplifying or changing tone


Where a person is essential

  • Accuracy. AI tools can state wrong facts confidently. Your assistant checks every number, price, date and claim.

  • Voice. AI drafts tend to sound generic. Your assistant rewrites them using your brand voice guide.

  • Experience. AI can’t know what happened on your jobs last week. Your stories have to come from you.

  • Judgment. What not to post, what might offend, what’s off-brand.


What Google says about AI content

Google’s guidance on AI-generated content says its focus is on the quality of content, not how it’s produced. But using automation to create content mainly to manipulate search rankings breaks its spam policies.

In plain terms: AI-assisted content is fine if it’s helpful, accurate and written for people. Mass-producing thin pages to game search is not.


Rules to agree with your assistant

  1. Never publish an AI draft without a human edit

  2. Check every fact against a reliable source

  3. No AI-written reviews or testimonials. The FTC’s rule on fake reviews specifically bans AI-generated fake reviews.

  4. Don’t paste private customer data into AI tools unless your business has approved that tool for it

  5. Add your own experience to anything long-form

  6. Keep a note of which content used AI, in case you ever need to review it


A simple AI and virtual assistant content workflow

  1. You send a voice note or bullet points

  2. Your assistant uses AI to create a rough draft

  3. Your assistant rewrites it in your voice and checks the facts

  4. You approve

  5. Your assistant publishes and tracks results

An example. Lucian runs a two-person bookkeeping firm in Boise. He wanted a weekly LinkedIn post and a monthly newsletter but never found the time. His assistant now uses an AI tool to turn Lucian’s five-minute voice note into rough drafts, then rewrites them, checks every tax date against IRS pages and removes anything that sounds like generic advice. Lucian approves in about 15 minutes. One rule stays fixed: nothing goes out without a human edit. (Lucian is an illustrative example.)


The risks to take seriously

AI makes it easy to publish more. That’s also the danger. More bland content won’t help, and errors spread faster when nobody checks.

And there’s a privacy question. Before your assistant uses any AI tool for client or customer information, check the tool’s data terms and decide what’s allowed. When in doubt, keep sensitive details out.

For how to brief long-form content properly, see our blog post brief template.


FAQ

Can AI replace a marketing assistant?

Not for most small businesses. AI drafts quickly, but a person still needs to check facts, match your voice, publish and manage the work.


Is AI-generated content bad for SEO?

Google says it focuses on content quality, not how it’s produced. Thin content made mainly to manipulate rankings breaks its policies.


Should my VA use ChatGPT or other AI tools?

Often yes, for drafts and ideas, with clear rules on editing, fact-checking and data privacy.


Do I need to tell customers when content uses AI?

It depends on the content and platform rules. Never use AI to create fake reviews or testimonials.


How much faster is AI plus an assistant?

It varies by task. Drafting is usually faster; checking and editing still take time. Track it for a month.


Get the speed without losing quality

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can use AI tools for drafts and still give every piece a human edit. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Work is checked by IncludeWork’s quality-control team before it reaches you. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Content Repurposing System Your Assistant Can Run

Content Repurposing System Your Assistant Can Run

You wrote a useful blog post. Or recorded a good video. Or gave a great answer to a customer’s question. Then it went out once, and disappeared.

Most small businesses don’t need more ideas. They need to get more out of the ones they already have. A content repurposing system turns one solid piece of content into a week of posts, an email and a few short clips, and it’s exactly the kind of steady work an assistant does well.


How the content repurposing system works

Each week follows the same loop:

  1. One “core” piece goes in: a blog post, video, podcast episode, talk, long email or a recorded Q&A

  2. Your assistant breaks it down into smaller pieces for each channel

  3. You approve the batch in one sitting

  4. Your assistant schedules everything across the week

  5. They log what was made and how it performed


What one core piece can become

From a single 1,000-word blog post, for example:

Channel

Repurposed piece

Instagram or Facebook

A carousel with five key points; one quote graphic

LinkedIn

One short text post with a lesson or opinion from the article

Email

A short newsletter section with a link to the full post

Short video

A 30-second clip of you explaining the main tip

Google Business Profile

A weekly update linking to the post

Website

An FAQ added to a related service page

That’s six or more pieces from one idea, each shaped for where it’s going rather than copied and pasted.


The weekly routine

Day

Task

Who

Monday

Pick this week’s core piece; send any new notes

You (5 minutes)

Tuesday

Draft all repurposed pieces

Assistant

Wednesday

Approve the batch

You (15 minutes)

Thursday

Schedule across channels

Assistant

Friday

Log what went out; note top performers

Assistant


Rules that keep repurposed content good

  • Reshape, don’t copy. A LinkedIn post and an Instagram caption should read differently.

  • Lead with one idea per piece. Don’t squeeze a whole article into one graphic.

  • Add something new when you can: a fresh example, a photo, a question for followers.

  • Keep the website version the most complete. Google says it aims to reward helpful, people-first content with original information and real expertise. Your full post should be the best version.

  • Credit and permission: if a piece includes a customer’s words or photo, check you have permission.


Build a content library

Ask your assistant to keep a simple tracker: core piece, date, what was made from it, and links. Over months it becomes a library. Good pieces can be refreshed and reused seasonally.

An example. Clementine runs a small stretching and mobility studio in Bangor, Maine. She writes one blog post a month and records a weekly two-minute tip video on her phone. Her assistant turns each video into an Instagram Reel, a Facebook post and a short newsletter tip, and splits each blog post into a carousel and three LinkedIn posts aimed at local employers. Clementine spends about 20 minutes a week on approvals. And her feed no longer goes quiet when she’s busy teaching. (Clementine is an illustrative example.)


When repurposing falls flat

Repurposing amplifies what’s already there. If the core piece is thin, you’ll just get more thin posts. Put your effort into the core piece and let the system do the rest.

And watch for fatigue. If followers see the same point five times in a week on one channel, spread pieces over a longer period.

For the planning side, see how to keep a content calendar full with a part-time assistant.


FAQ

What is a content repurposing system?

A repeatable process for turning one core piece of content into several smaller pieces for different channels, on a regular schedule.


What content is easiest to repurpose?

Blog posts, videos, podcast episodes, talks and detailed answers to customer questions.


How many posts can one blog post create?

Often five to ten, depending on length and how many separate ideas it holds.


Will posting the same idea on several channels annoy followers?

Not if each piece is reshaped for the channel and spread over time.


Can a virtual assistant run the whole system?

Yes, apart from creating the core piece and approving the batch. Those still need you.


Get more from what you already make

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can run a weekly repurposing system from your existing content. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. IncludeWork has been running remote assistant teams since 2012. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Blog Post Brief Template: Help Your Assistant Rank

Blog Post Brief Template: Help Your Assistant Rank

“Write a blog post about spring lawn care” will get you a blog post. It will probably look like the other thousand spring lawn care posts online, and it will probably sit on page five of Google.

Posts that rank usually answer a specific question better than anything else out there, with real experience in them. That only happens with a good brief. Here’s a blog post brief template your assistant can work from, and the part of every post that only you can supply.


Why the brief matters more than the writer

Google says its systems aim to reward helpful, people-first content, and one of its self-assessment questions asks whether content clearly shows first-hand expertise and depth of knowledge.

An assistant can research, outline, format and polish. But first-hand experience comes from you: the mistakes customers make, the job that went wrong, the question you hear every week. The brief is how that experience gets into the post.


The blog post brief template

Copy this for each post.

1. Working title

A plain title with the main search phrase. Example: “When to Aerate Your Lawn in the Midwest”.


2. Main keyword and close variations

The phrase people type, plus two or three related ones.


3. Who’s reading and what they want

One or two sentences. Example: “A homeowner whose lawn looks patchy after winter and wants to know if aeration will help, and when to do it.”


4. The one question to answer

The single question the post must answer clearly, near the top.


5. Outline

Five to eight headings. Your assistant can draft this; you check it.


6. Your expertise (the most important part)

Three to five bullet points only you know: a story from a real job, a common mistake, a number from your own work, an opinion you hold.


7. Links

Two or three of your own pages to link to, plus any official sources to cite.


8. Call to action

What a reader should do next: book, call, download, read another post.


9. Length and format

A rough length, plus any tables, checklists or FAQs to include.


10. Checks before publishing

Title under 60 characters, a meta description, keyword in the first paragraph and one heading, alt text on images, facts checked against sources.


How to fill in the expertise section fast

Most owners skip section 6 because it feels like work. Make it quick:

  • Record a five-minute voice note answering “What do customers get wrong about this?”

  • Forward an email where you explained this to a customer

  • Jot down one story from a real job

Your assistant turns that into paragraphs. And that’s the part competitors can’t copy.


Who does what

Task

You

Assistant

Choose topics

Approve

Research and suggest

Keyword research


Do it

Brief sections 1–5

Check

Draft

Expertise (section 6)

Provide

Turn into text

Writing and formatting

Review

Do it

Publishing and links


Do it

An example. Emeka owns a lawn care company in Indianapolis. His old blog posts were generic and got almost no visits. Now, for each post, his assistant drafts the brief and outline, and Emeka records a short voice note answering three questions about the topic. One post on aeration timing included his own rule of thumb from 12 years of jobs and a photo of a badly compacted lawn. It became one of the most visited pages on his site within a few months. (Emeka is an illustrative example.)


The limits

A great brief doesn’t guarantee rankings. Competition, your site’s history and how many other pages answer the same question all matter. Some posts will take months to show up; some never will.

And quantity doesn’t fix quality. Two strong posts a month with real expertise usually do more than eight thin ones.

For more on SEO tasks your assistant can handle, see what SEO tasks a virtual assistant can do.


FAQ

What should a blog post brief include?

A title, keyword, reader and intent, the key question, an outline, your expertise, links, a call to action, format notes and pre-publish checks.


Can a virtual assistant write blog posts that rank?

They can research, outline and write. Posts rank better when you add first-hand expertise through the brief.


How long should a blog post be?

As long as it takes to answer the question well. Check what currently ranks for the topic as a guide, not a rule.


How much of my time does each post take?

With a good brief process, often 10 to 20 minutes for the expertise notes and a final review.


Should I use AI to write blog posts?

It can help with drafts, but posts still need your experience and a careful human edit. See AI plus a marketing assistant.


Get posts that sound like you

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can draft briefs, write and publish posts from your notes. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Work is checked by IncludeWork’s quality-control team before it reaches you. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Email Marketing Handoff Checklist for Mailchimp or Klaviyo

Email Marketing Handoff Checklist for Mailchimp or Klaviyo

Your email platform is full of things only you understand. That old automation you set up two years ago. The list called “NEW list FINAL (2)”. The template with the broken footer you keep meaning to fix.

Handing it to an assistant is a great idea, but only if they can find their way around without breaking anything. This email marketing handoff checklist covers what to set up, what to explain and what to check before your assistant sends their first email.


Email marketing handoff checklist, 

part 1: access (do this first)

  • ☐ Add your assistant as a user, not by sharing your password

  • ☐ Pick the right user level. In Mailchimp, for example, the Manager level can create and send emails, import audiences and view reports, but can’t view billing, export audiences or close the account. That’s usually a good fit.

  • ☐ Keep owner and billing access yourself

  • ☐ Turn on two-factor authentication for your own login

  • ☐ In Klaviyo or another platform, look for the equivalent role that allows sending but not billing or account deletion


Part 2: Lists and subscribers

  • ☐ Explain each list, audience or segment: who’s on it and why

  • ☐ Mark which lists are active and which are old

  • ☐ Explain any tags and how new subscribers are tagged

  • ☐ Confirm where sign-ups come from (website form, checkout, events)

  • ☐ Agree a rule: never add people who didn’t sign up, like business cards or bought lists


Part 3: Templates and brand

  • ☐ Point to the current newsletter template

  • ☐ Share your logo, colors and fonts

  • ☐ Share two or three past emails you liked

  • ☐ Share your brand voice guide (see our brand voice guide template)

  • ☐ Fix or retire broken templates together


Part 4: Automations

  • ☐ List every active automation: welcome series, abandoned cart, birthday, post-purchase

  • ☐ Explain what each one does and when it sends

  • ☐ Agree that automations aren’t changed without your approval

  • ☐ Turn off any that are out of date


Part 5: Compliance checks

U.S. commercial email must follow the CAN-SPAM Act. The FTC’s compliance guide includes a valid physical postal address in every email, a clear way to opt out, and honoring opt-outs within 10 business days. Add to your checklist:

  • ☐ Footer shows your physical address

  • ☐ Unsubscribe link works

  • ☐ Subject lines and “from” names aren’t misleading

  • ☐ Unsubscribes are never re-added

This is general information, not legal advice. Rules differ for subscribers outside the U.S.


Part 6: The send routine

  • ☐ Agreed send day and time

  • ☐ Who approves each email, and by when

  • ☐ Pre-send checks: links, images, spelling, mobile view, test email to you

  • ☐ What to do after sending: check bounces, replies and unsubscribes

  • ☐ Monthly report: opens, clicks and any replies or orders


Part 7: The first two sends

For the first two emails:

  1. Your assistant builds the email and sends you a test

  2. You review on your phone and desktop

  3. You approve, and they schedule it

  4. You both review the results a week later

After that, move to approving drafts only.

An example. Pilar runs an online tea shop from Tucson. Her Klaviyo account had nine lists, four automations and no notes. Her assistant spent the first three hours mapping it all into a one-page document. They found a welcome series still offering a discount code that had expired a year earlier. Pilar fixed the offer, retired two old lists, and from then on her assistant sent the weekly emails without her opening Klaviyo at all. (Pilar is an illustrative example.)

“What if they break something?”

It’s a reasonable worry. Email platforms can send to thousands of people with one click. But most risks shrink with the right setup: a role without billing or export rights, approval on every send at first, and a test email to you before anything goes out.

And remember that mistakes are fixable. A typo in a newsletter is embarrassing, not fatal. A short correction email is usually enough.

For the monthly routine once the handoff is done, see how a marketing VA can run your email newsletter.


FAQ

How do I give an assistant access to Mailchimp?

Invite them as a user from your account settings and choose a user level. Manager level suits most assistants.


Should my VA have access to billing in my email platform?

No. Keep billing and account ownership with you.


What should I check before my assistant sends their first email?

The footer address, unsubscribe link, all other links, images, spelling, mobile view and the list it’s going to.


Can my assistant change my automations?

Only with your approval. Automations send without anyone watching, so changes need care.


How long does an email platform handoff take?

Often a few hours to map lists, templates and automations, plus two supervised sends.


Hand over your email with confidence

IncludeWork’s assistants can map, tidy and run your email platform, starting with this checklist. See email campaign setup and management. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Every IncludeWork assistant signs an NDA before they start. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Email Marketing Virtual Assistant: Your Monthly Newsletter

Email Marketing Virtual Assistant: Your Monthly Newsletter

The newsletter is the first thing to slip. You plan to send one every month, then it’s every other month, then you can’t remember the last one.

That’s a shame, because your email list is one of the few audiences you own. An email marketing virtual assistant can make sure the newsletter goes out on the same day every month, with you spending about half an hour on it. Here’s how that works.


What an email marketing virtual assistant handles

  • Planning: a simple topic list for the next three months

  • Drafting: writing the newsletter from your bullet points or voice notes

  • Design: building it in your email tool from a saved template

  • Images: picking photos and making simple graphics

  • Checks: links, typos, mobile view, subject line

  • Sending: scheduling it for the agreed day and time

  • List care: adding new subscribers, removing bounces, handling unsubscribes

  • Reporting: opens, clicks and anything that led to a reply or booking

What stays with you: the main idea of each issue, your offers and the final approval.


A monthly newsletter timeline

When

Who

What

Day 1

You

Send 3–5 bullet points: news, offer, one tip or story (10 minutes)

Days 2–5

VA

Draft, design and test the email

Day 6

You

Read and approve, or request changes (15 minutes)

Day 7

VA

Final fixes and scheduling

Send day

VA

Sends, then checks for bounces and replies

A week later

VA

Short report: opens, clicks, replies

Pick one send day and stick to it. Readers notice consistency more than design.


The rules your newsletter must follow

In the U.S., commercial email falls under the CAN-SPAM Act. The FTC’s compliance guide sets out the basics, including:

  • Include your valid physical postal address in every email

  • Give a clear way to opt out

  • Honor opt-out requests within 10 business days

  • Don’t use misleading subject lines or “from” names

The stakes aren’t small. The FTC says each email that breaks the law can bring penalties of up to $53,088. And it’s your business that’s responsible, even if someone else sends the email for you. So add these checks to your assistant’s send checklist.


Who’s on your list matters too

A good email marketing virtual assistant will also protect your list:

  • Never add people who didn’t sign up, like business card contacts or bought lists

  • Remove hard bounces after each send

  • Tag subscribers (customers, leads, partners) so you can send more relevant emails later

  • Keep a simple record of where sign-ups came from


What a good newsletter looks like

Keep it short and useful. A simple structure that works for most small businesses:

  1. One line of news about you or your business

  2. One helpful tip or story your customers care about

  3. One offer or call to action: book, buy, reply, refer

  4. A friendly sign-off from a real person

But keep the length in check. If it takes longer than two minutes to read, it’s probably two newsletters.

An example. Henrik runs a small wine shop in Portland, Oregon, with about 1,200 people on his list. He’d sent four newsletters in two years. His marketing VA now sends one on the first Thursday of every month: a staff pick, a short food pairing tip and the month’s tasting event. Henrik spends about 25 minutes a month on bullet points and approval. Tasting event sign-ups now come mostly from the email. (Henrik is an illustrative example.)


Getting started

  1. Choose your send day

  2. Give your assistant user access in your email tool, not your password

  3. Share two or three past emails you liked

  4. Agree the checklist, including the CAN-SPAM points above

  5. Approve every issue for the first three months

For other email and marketing work you can hand over, see 35 marketing tasks to outsource.


When a newsletter isn’t worth it yet

If your list has only a handful of people, or you don’t have anything useful to say each month, a monthly newsletter can feel like shouting into a quiet room.

In that case, ask your assistant to focus on growing the list first: a sign-up form on your website, a link in your social bios and a simple reason to join. Then start sending.


FAQ

Can a virtual assistant write my newsletter?

Yes. Most write a first draft from your bullet points, and you approve it before it goes out.


Which email tools do marketing VAs use?

Common ones include Mailchimp, Klaviyo, Constant Contact, Kit and HubSpot. A trained assistant can usually learn yours quickly.


How often should a small business send a newsletter?

Monthly is a good, sustainable starting point. Consistency matters more than frequency.


Can my VA set up automated emails?

Many can set up simple ones, like a welcome email for new subscribers. Review them before they go live.


Do I need my address in every email?

In the U.S., yes. CAN-SPAM requires a valid physical postal address in commercial emails.


Send next month’s newsletter on time

If your newsletter keeps slipping, an email marketing virtual assistant can get it back on schedule. IncludeWork can help with email campaign setup and management. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Every IncludeWork assistant signs an NDA before they start. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Social Media Crisis Plan for Small Business: What to Do

Social Media Crisis Plan for Small Business: What to Do

It’s Saturday morning. A customer’s angry post about your business has 200 shares. Or a scheduled post went out with the wrong price. Or your Instagram account has been hacked and is posting crypto ads.

These moments are rare, but they happen. And the first hour matters. A social media crisis plan for small business is a one-page document that tells your assistant exactly what to do, who to call and what not to do while you’re still finding your phone.


What counts as a “crisis”?

Not every complaint is a crisis. Sort problems into three levels:

Level

Examples

Who handles it

1. Routine

A one-star review, a grumpy comment

Assistant drafts a reply; owner approves

2. Serious

A post with a wrong price or error, a complaint gaining traction, a staff member named publicly

Assistant pauses posts and alerts owner right away

3. Urgent

Hacked account, safety issue, legal threat, media inquiry

Assistant alerts owner by phone; owner leads


Your social media crisis plan: the first 30 minutes

  1. Pause all scheduled posts. Cheerful posts during a problem look careless.

  2. Screenshot everything: the post, comments, dates and times.

  3. Alert you through the agreed urgent channel, usually a phone call or text, not email.

  4. Don’t delete critical comments or argue in public.

  5. Post nothing new until you’ve agreed on a response, unless a holding reply is pre-approved.


A pre-approved holding reply

Agree on one or two short replies your assistant can post right away for Level 2 problems:

“Thanks for raising this. We’re looking into it now and will reply properly today.”

“We made a mistake in our earlier post. The correct price is [X]. Sorry for the confusion.”

Short, calm and specific. No excuses, no defensiveness.


If an account is hacked

The FTC’s guide to recovering a hacked social media account recommends changing your password, signing out of all devices, turning on two-factor authentication and checking that the recovery email and phone number are yours. It also suggests warning your contacts to ignore suspicious messages from the account.

For your business, add:

  • Use the platform’s official recovery process

  • Post on your other channels that the account was compromised

  • Review who has access once you’re back in

This is why owners should keep owner-level access and assistants should be added as named users, not given your password.


What never to do

  • Delete honest negative reviews or pressure people to remove them. The FTC’s rule on fake reviews bans review suppression through threats or false accusations.

  • Argue in public or share private customer details

  • Post jokes or “business as usual” content during a problem

  • Make promises about refunds or legal matters without you

An example. Dmitri runs a family bakery in Cleveland. One Friday, a scheduled post announced “50% off all cakes this weekend”. It should have said 15%. His assistant spotted it within 20 minutes, paused the weekend posts, screenshotted the comments and called Dmitri. They agreed on a correction post and decided to honor 50% for anyone who’d already ordered. The comments turned friendly within an hour. (Dmitri is an illustrative example.)


The limits of a plan

No document covers everything. A real legal threat, a safety issue or a story in the local news needs you, and possibly a lawyer, not a template. The plan’s job is to stop small problems getting bigger in the first hour.

And plans go stale. Review it every six months: phone numbers, logins, who’s on holiday.

For the daily side of replies, see community management for small business.


FAQ

What is a social media crisis plan?

A short document that explains what counts as a crisis, who does what and how to respond, so problems are handled quickly and calmly.


What should I do if a post goes wrong?

Pause scheduled posts, correct the mistake publicly and briefly, and reply to people who were affected.


Should I delete negative comments during a crisis?

Generally no. Respond calmly and move details to private messages. Only remove spam, scams or abuse.


What if my business account is hacked?

Use the platform’s recovery process, change passwords, turn on two-factor authentication, and warn followers on your other channels.


Can my virtual assistant handle a social media crisis?

They can handle the first steps: pausing posts, gathering evidence, alerting you and posting pre-approved holding replies. You lead the response.


Have a plan before you need one

IncludeWork’s social media virtual assistants can draft your one-page crisis plan and follow it if something goes wrong. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Every IncludeWork assistant signs an NDA before they start. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Social Media Approval Process: A Month in 20 Minutes

Social Media Approval Process: A Month in 20 Minutes

The posts are ready. Your assistant has sent them. And they’ve been sitting in your inbox for six days, because “approve 16 posts” never feels like a five-minute job.

Slow approvals are one of the most common reasons outsourced social media stalls. The fix isn’t working harder. It’s a better social media approval process: one batch, one place, clear rules, and about 20 minutes a month of your time.


Why approvals get stuck

  • Posts arrive one by one, at random times

  • Drafts are scattered across email, chat and documents

  • You don’t know what really needs your eye

  • Feedback turns into rewriting

  • There’s no deadline, so it waits for a “free moment”


A 20-minute social media approval process

Step 1: One plan, one place

Your assistant puts the whole month in one place: a shared spreadsheet, a calendar view in your scheduling tool, or a simple document. Each row shows the date, platform, image, caption and any link.


Step 2: Sort by risk

Your assistant marks each post:

  • Green: routine posts (behind the scenes, tips, photos of work). Quick glance only.

  • Amber: offers, events, prices or anything time-sensitive. Read carefully.

  • Red: anything new, sensitive, about a customer or a partner. Read and decide.

Most months, the large majority are green. That’s where the time saving comes from.


Step 3: A fixed approval slot

Put 20 minutes in your calendar on the same day each month, a week before the month starts. Your assistant sends the plan two days before.


Step 4: Feedback in one pass

For each post: approve, or leave one short comment. Don’t rewrite. “Shorter”, “mention Saturday hours”, “swap the photo” is enough. Your assistant makes the changes.


Step 5: Silence means go

Agree that green posts go live as planned unless you comment by a set date. Amber and red posts wait for a clear yes.


What always needs a yes

Some posts shouldn’t go out on silence:

  • Prices, discounts and offers

  • Claims about results

  • Customer stories or photos (also check you have their permission)

  • Posts about partners, sponsors or gifted products, which need clear disclosure under the FTC’s endorsement guidance

  • Anything touching news, politics or sensitive events

For a fuller list, see what a marketing VA should never do without your approval.

An example. Marguerite runs a children’s bookstore in Madison, Wisconsin. Approvals used to happen in bits: a post here, a caption there, often late at night. Now her assistant sends a monthly calendar on the 23rd, with each post marked green, amber or red. Marguerite blocks 9am on the 25th for approvals. Most months it takes her 15 to 20 minutes, and the red posts, usually author events, get her full attention. (Marguerite is an illustrative example.)


When monthly batching doesn’t work

Some content can’t wait a month: news, a sudden sell-out, a weather closure, a trending moment. Keep a quick lane for these: a message to you, a reply within a few hours, posted the same day.

And early on, batching may feel risky. In the first month, approve weekly instead. Move to monthly once your assistant knows your voice and you’re editing very little.


FAQ

How do I set up a social media approval process?

Put the whole plan in one place, sort posts by risk, set a fixed approval time and agree what can go out without a reply.


What tool should I use to approve social posts?

A shared spreadsheet or your scheduling tool’s calendar view works for most small businesses. Use whatever you’ll actually open.


How often should I approve social media posts?

Weekly at first, then monthly once your assistant knows your voice.


What if I don’t have time to approve posts at all?

Agree that routine posts go live on schedule, and only approve offers and sensitive posts.


Should my assistant post without approval?

For routine posts, once trust is built, yes. Anything with prices, claims, customers or partners should always get a yes.


Spend less time approving

IncludeWork’s social media virtual assistants send monthly plans sorted by risk, ready for quick approval. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. IncludeWork has been running remote assistant teams since 2012. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Social Media Report Template: What Your VA Should Send

Social Media Report Template: What Your VA Should Send

Most social media reports are either too thin (“we got 1,200 likes!”) or too thick (a 14-page export nobody reads). Neither helps you decide what to do next month.

A good monthly report fits on one page and answers three questions: what happened, what it led to, and what we’ll change. Here’s a social media report template your assistant can fill in, plus what each part is for.


The one-page social media report template

1. Headline (two sentences)

The single most important thing that happened this month, in plain words. Example: “Instagram brought 14 booking inquiries, up from 9. Behind-the-scenes Reels did best.”


2. Did the planned work go out?

Planned

Delivered

Notes

Posts



Stories or short videos



Replies within one business day




3. Results that connect to the business

  • Inquiries (DMs, calls, forms) from social

  • Clicks to your website or booking page

  • Sales or bookings that mention social, if you track them


4. Audience and engagement (briefly)

  • Follower change

  • Reach or views

  • Saves, shares and comments on top posts


5. Top three posts, and why they worked

A link or screenshot of each, with one line on why.


6. What didn’t work

One or two posts or ideas that flopped, and the likely reason.


7. Next month

Two or three changes: more of one format, a new series, a time change, a test.


The numbers that matter most

Likes feel good. But they don’t pay bills. Ask your assistant to put the business numbers first: inquiries, clicks, bookings, sales. Engagement numbers come second, as clues about what people like.

The U.S. Small Business Administration suggests measuring marketing return on investment by comparing what you spend with the revenue it brings in. Your social report is where that starts.


How to track inquiries from social

The hardest number to get is the one you care about most. A few simple fixes:

  • Ask new customers “how did you hear about us?” and log the answer

  • Use a dedicated booking link in your social bios

  • Add tracking tags to links so your website analytics shows where clicks came from. See UTM links explained.

  • Tag DMs that turn into inquiries


What to leave out

  • Every metric the platform shows

  • Long screenshots of dashboards

  • Numbers without a “so what”

  • Comparisons with big brands

If a number won’t change a decision, it doesn’t need to be in the report.

An example. Harriet owns a dog daycare in Omaha. Her old reports were 10-page exports she never opened. Her assistant now sends a one-page report on the first Monday of each month. The headline usually takes Harriet 30 seconds to read. Last spring, it showed that “day in the life” videos brought far more trial-day bookings than photos of dogs napping. They shifted the plan the next week. (Harriet is an illustrative example.)


The limits of a monthly report

One month is a small sample. A single viral post or a slow holiday week can make numbers swing. So look at trends over three months before making big changes.

And some value is hard to count. A customer might follow you for a year before booking. The report shows clues, not the whole story.


FAQ

What should a monthly social media report include?

A short headline, whether planned work was delivered, business results like inquiries and clicks, top and bottom posts, and next month’s changes.


How long should a social media report be?

One page for most small businesses. If you need more detail, ask for it separately.


Which social media metrics matter most for small businesses?

Inquiries, clicks, bookings and sales come first. Reach, followers and engagement help explain what’s working.


How often should my assistant send a report?

Monthly, with a short weekly note if you want quicker feedback.


Can my assistant make the report in a spreadsheet?

Yes. A simple shared spreadsheet or document works well, as long as the headline comes first.


Get a report you’ll actually read

IncludeWork’s social media virtual assistants send clear monthly reports alongside the day-to-day work. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Work is checked by IncludeWork’s quality-control team before it reaches you. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Short-Form Video Assistant: Reels and TikTok on a Budget

Short-Form Video Assistant: Reels and TikTok on a Budget

Here’s the uncomfortable truth about short videos: filming them is the easy part. You probably already have dozens of clips on your phone. It’s the editing, captions, music, cover image, posting and replying that never happen.

A short-form video assistant takes that second part off your hands. You film; they turn raw clips into finished Reels and TikToks. No studio, no agency budget.


What a short-form video assistant does

  • Sorts your clips from a shared folder

  • Edits them into 15- to 60-second videos: trimming, cutting pauses, adding on-screen captions

  • Adds text hooks in the first seconds

  • Chooses audio that’s allowed for business use

  • Creates cover images that fit your grid

  • Writes captions and hashtags

  • Schedules and posts to Instagram, TikTok, Facebook or YouTube Shorts

  • Replies to comments and reports which videos worked


What you still need to do

  • Film. Your assistant can’t be in your kitchen, workshop or salon. But they can send you a weekly shot list.

  • Appear on camera, if your brand works best with a face. Many businesses do well with hands-only or process videos instead.

  • Approve anything with offers, claims or customers in it.


A weekly shot list you can film in 15 minutes

Ask your assistant to send you a short list each week, such as:

  1. A before and after of something you made, fixed or cleaned

  2. A 10-second process clip (hands only is fine)

  3. One quick tip said to camera, in one take

  4. A customer moment, with their permission

  5. Something behind the scenes: setting up, packing an order, a team laugh

Film them vertically, in good light, and drop them in the shared folder. That’s your part done.


Keep costs down

  • Use your phone. Today’s phones film well enough for short-form video.

  • Use simple tools. Your assistant can work in common editing apps; many have free or low-cost plans.

  • Batch it. Filming a week’s clips in one go, and editing them in one session, saves hours.

  • Reuse each video across Reels, TikTok and Shorts instead of making separate ones.

  • Start with two videos a week. Consistency matters more than volume.


Music and content rules

Copyright applies to short videos too. Using a popular song without the right license can get a video muted or removed. Your assistant should use audio that’s cleared for business use on each platform, or royalty-free tracks you’ve licensed.

And “fair use” isn’t a safe shortcut. The U.S. Copyright Office says whether a use counts as fair use “depends on all the circumstances”. When in doubt, use licensed audio or none.

An example. Wendell runs a small furniture restoration workshop in Savannah, Georgia. He always filmed his work but never posted it. Now he drops 10 to 15 phone clips into a shared folder each Friday. His short-form video assistant edits them into three short videos a week: a before and after, a “how it’s done” clip and a quick tip on caring for old wood. Wendell checks each one on his phone before it goes out. (Wendell is an illustrative example.)


Will short videos work for every business?

Not always. They suit businesses with something visual to show: food, beauty, trades, crafts, fitness, products. They’re harder for, say, an accounting firm, where short talking-head tips may work better than process clips.

And results take time. Expect to post steadily for a couple of months before you know which formats your audience likes. If you can’t film anything at all, short-form video probably isn’t the place to start.

For a wider look at social media help, see how a social media virtual assistant can run your accounts.


FAQ

Can a virtual assistant edit Reels and TikToks?

Yes. Many marketing assistants edit short videos from your clips, add captions and music, and post them.


Do I need professional equipment?

No. A recent phone, good light and a steady hand are enough for most small businesses.


How many short videos should a small business post?

Two a week is a good, sustainable start. Increase once you know what works.


Can I post the same video on Instagram and TikTok?

Usually, yes. Your assistant can adjust captions and covers for each platform.


How long does it take an assistant to edit one short video?

It depends on the style. Simple edits with captions are quicker than videos with many cuts and effects. Ask your assistant to track time for the first few weeks.


Turn your phone clips into posts

IncludeWork’s social media virtual assistants can edit and post short videos from your clips. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. And if the fit isn’t right, IncludeWork replaces your assistant at no extra cost. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
LinkedIn Virtual Assistant: Ghostwriting and Engagement

LinkedIn Virtual Assistant: Ghostwriting and Engagement

You have opinions worth sharing. Clients ask you the same smart questions every week. And yet your LinkedIn profile still shows a post from last spring.

The problem usually isn’t ideas. It’s turning them into posts, every week, between client calls. A LinkedIn virtual assistant can take your raw thinking and turn it into a steady stream of posts that still sound like you, plus handle much of the engagement around them.


What a LinkedIn virtual assistant can do

Content

  • Turn voice notes, meeting notes or client questions into posts

  • Draft carousels and simple graphics in your brand style

  • Repurpose blog posts, newsletters or talks into shorter posts

  • Keep a running list of post ideas from your week

Engagement

  • Reply to routine comments on your posts, in your voice

  • Flag comments and messages that need you personally

  • Track people who engage often so you can follow up

Profile and page upkeep

  • Keep your headline, About section and featured links current

  • Post updates to your company page

  • Share team news and client wins (with permission)

Reporting

  • A monthly note on which posts brought profile views, messages or inquiries


How ghostwriting works without losing your voice

The ideas must stay yours. The assistant’s job is to shape them, not invent them.

A simple weekly routine:

  1. You record a 5- to 10-minute voice note with two or three ideas, stories or opinions

  2. Your assistant drafts three posts from it, in your style

  3. You edit and approve in one sitting, usually 15 to 20 minutes

  4. Your assistant schedules them and watches the comments

Give your assistant five of your best past posts or emails as examples. And be specific with feedback: “too polished”, “I’d say this more bluntly”, “cut the last line”.


What to keep yourself

  • Opinions on sensitive topics, industry news or anything controversial

  • Personal stories, at least the first draft of the facts

  • Direct conversations with prospects and clients

  • Comments on other people’s posts, where your personal judgment matters

Some owners also let their assistant leave short, friendly comments on posts from clients and partners. If you do, agree on clear rules first. Your name is on every word.


Rules worth writing down

  • Disclose relationships. The FTC’s endorsement guidance says connections such as payment, free products or employment should be disclosed when you promote something. That includes posts about partners or products you’re paid to mention.

  • Get permission before naming clients or sharing their results.

  • Avoid automation tools that send connection requests or messages for you. Check LinkedIn’s own rules before using any third-party tool on your account.

An example. Solveig runs a small HR consulting firm in Kansas City. She knew LinkedIn brought her best clients, but she posted maybe once a quarter. Now she records a voice note every Monday while driving to her first meeting. Her LinkedIn virtual assistant turns it into three posts and drafts replies to comments for her to check. Solveig spends about 20 minutes a week on LinkedIn, and prospects now mention her posts on discovery calls. (Solveig is an illustrative example.)

“Isn’t ghostwriting a bit fake?”

It’s a fair question. If an assistant invents opinions and experiences, yes. If they shape your own ideas into clear posts, that’s editing, the same help many authors and executives have always had.

The test is simple: could you defend every post in person? If yes, it’s yours. If a post makes you uncomfortable, it shouldn’t go out.


FAQ

What does a LinkedIn virtual assistant do?

They draft posts from your ideas, schedule them, reply to routine comments, update your profile and company page and report on what’s working.


Can a VA post on LinkedIn as me?

They can draft and schedule posts you approve. Agree clear rules for anything they write or comment in your name.


How many LinkedIn posts should a business owner make?

It depends on your goals and time. Two or three a week is a common, sustainable rhythm for many founders.


How much of my time does LinkedIn ghostwriting take?

Usually a short weekly voice note plus 15 to 20 minutes of approvals, once your assistant knows your style.


Can a LinkedIn VA do outreach too?

Some can help with research and personalized messages. For lead generation, see a dedicated sales and lead generation assistant.


Turn your ideas into posts

IncludeWork’s social media virtual assistants can draft, schedule and manage your LinkedIn every week. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Every IncludeWork assistant signs an NDA before they start. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Facebook Virtual Assistant: Grow Your Page and Groups

Facebook Virtual Assistant: Grow Your Page and Groups

Facebook isn’t the newest platform, but for many local businesses it’s still where customers ask for recommendations, check opening hours and join community groups.

The trouble is that Facebook rewards steady activity, and steady activity takes time. A Facebook virtual assistant can keep your Page active, run a customer group and show up in local groups the right way. Here’s what that looks like.


What a Facebook virtual assistant can do for your Page

  • Post three to five times a week: photos of your work, tips, offers and behind-the-scenes

  • Create Facebook events for workshops, sales and open days, and keep them updated

  • Reply to comments and Messenger messages with approved answers

  • Keep Page details current: hours, services, contact info, holiday closures

  • Share customer reviews and photos with permission

  • Track results: reach, messages, event responses and link clicks


Running a customer group

A Facebook group can turn customers into a community: a place for tips, questions, early access and real conversations. But groups need daily care, or they fill with spam and go quiet.

Your assistant can:

  • Approve new members using a few simple questions

  • Post weekly prompts: a question, a tip, a “show us your…” thread

  • Moderate: remove spam and enforce your group rules

  • Answer questions or flag them to you

  • Welcome new members each week

Write your group rules first: what’s allowed, what isn’t and how many promotional posts you’ll make.


Showing up in local community groups

Local groups (like a “Moms of [Town]” or “[Neighborhood] Community” group) are where many people ask for recommendations. But most ban blatant advertising.

A good approach for your assistant:

  • Follow each group’s rules to the letter

  • Answer questions helpfully, not just with a link

  • Post promotions only where allowed, such as dedicated business days

  • Flag recommendation requests to you, so a happy customer or you can reply personally

And be careful with how this is done. The FTC’s endorsement guidance says employees posting about their employer’s products should disclose that connection. So your assistant should never pose as a “happy customer” recommending you.


A weekly Facebook routine

Day

Task

Monday

Schedule the week’s Page posts, reply to weekend messages

Tuesday

Group prompt post, approve new members

Wednesday

Update events, send drafts to owner for approval

Thursday

Check local groups for questions and business days

Friday

Group welcome post, weekly numbers and notes

On 5 to 8 hours a week, this keeps a Page and a small group active for many local businesses.

An example. Augustin runs a family-owned hardware store in Burlington, Vermont. His Facebook Page posted twice a year. His Facebook virtual assistant now posts four times a week, from new stock to “how to winterize your outdoor tap” tips. She also started a group for local DIYers with a weekly “project of the week” thread. Augustin answers the trickier questions himself. The group gives him a direct line to his regular customers. (Augustin is an illustrative example.)


Facebook virtual assistant rules to set

  • Access: add them through Meta’s business access settings, not your personal login

  • Approval: offers, events and anything sensitive need your OK

  • No fake engagement: no buying likes, fake reviews or fake accounts. The FTC’s 2024 fake reviews rule bans fake reviews and buying fake social media indicators.

  • Disclosure: clear disclosure on any partner or sponsored posts

For a wider look at the role, see how a social media virtual assistant can run your accounts.


When Facebook isn’t worth the effort

If your customers aren’t on Facebook, no amount of posting will change that. Younger audiences and many B2B buyers spend their time elsewhere.

A group is also a real commitment. It needs daily attention, or it fills with spam and goes quiet. If you can’t support that, focus on your Page and local groups first.


FAQ

What does a Facebook virtual assistant do?

They post to your Page, create events, reply to comments and messages, run or moderate groups and report on results.


Can a VA manage my Facebook group?

Yes. With clear group rules, they can approve members, post prompts, remove spam and flag questions to you.


Is a Facebook group worth it for a small business?

It can be, if you have regular customers who like to talk and share. It needs steady daily care.


Can my assistant post in local community groups?

Only within each group’s rules, and never pretending to be a customer.


How many hours does a Facebook VA need?

For a Page plus a small group, many local businesses start with 5 to 8 hours a week.


Get your Page and group active again

IncludeWork’s social media virtual assistants can run your Facebook Page and community group every week. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. IncludeWork has been running remote assistant teams since 2012. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Community Management for Small Business: Why People Matter

Community Management for Small Business: Why People Matter

Scheduling tools are great at one thing: putting posts out on time. They’re no help at all when a customer asks a question in the comments, tags you in a photo or leaves a frustrated review at 9pm.

That’s where community management comes in. For a small business, it’s the difference between an account that talks at people and one that talks with them. Here’s what it involves and how an assistant can handle most of it.


What community management for small business covers

  • Comments on your posts, on every platform you use

  • Direct messages and message requests

  • Reviews on Google, Facebook and industry sites

  • Mentions and tags from customers and partners

  • Questions in groups where you’re a member or admin

  • Engagement with local accounts, customers and partners’ posts

Scheduling covers what you say. Community management covers what people say back. And for most small businesses, that second part is where sales are won or lost.


Why it matters

  • Unanswered questions lose sales. Someone asking “are you open Sunday?” is close to buying.

  • Public replies are seen by many people, not just the person who asked.

  • Reviews shape first impressions. Google lets verified business owners and managers reply to reviews, and those replies appear publicly under the review.

  • People remember being ignored. And they remember a kind, quick reply.


What a person does that a scheduler can’t

Situation

Scheduler

A person

“Do you have this in size 10?”

Nothing

Checks and replies, or points to the product page

A customer shares a photo of your product

Nothing

Thanks them and asks to reshare

A one-star review

Nothing

Drafts a calm reply and flags it to you

A joke in the comments

Nothing

Responds in your voice

A spam comment

Nothing

Hides or deletes it


Response rules to agree with your assistant

Write these down so your assistant can act without asking each time:

  1. Reply times: for example, comments and DMs within one business day

  2. Approved answers for common questions: hours, prices, delivery, booking

  3. Escalation: complaints, refunds, press, legal or safety issues go to you

  4. Tone: friendly, short, signed as “the team” or with a first name

  5. Hide or delete: only spam, scams and abusive language, never honest criticism

The last rule matters. The FTC’s rule on fake reviews bans review suppression, such as using threats or false accusations to get negative reviews removed. Respond to criticism; don’t try to make it disappear.


How to reply to a negative comment

A simple pattern your assistant can follow, with your approval:

  1. Thank them for telling you

  2. Acknowledge the problem without arguing

  3. Move it private: “We’d like to sort this out. Could you message us your order number?”

  4. Follow up and, if it’s resolved, reply publicly to say so

An example. Rosalind runs a family-run pizzeria in Providence, Rhode Island. Comments on her posts often went unanswered for days, including “do you do gluten-free crusts?” and several delivery complaints. Her assistant now checks comments and messages twice a day, answers common questions from an approved list and sends Rosalind complaints with a draft reply. Rosalind spends about ten minutes a day on the ones that need her. (Rosalind is an illustrative example.)


How much time community management takes

It depends on your volume. A small local account might need 15 to 30 minutes a day. A busy online store may need an hour or more. Ask your assistant to track time for the first month.

But don’t let replies wait for a weekly batch. Community management works best in short, daily check-ins.

For the posting side, see how a social media virtual assistant can run your accounts.

“Can someone else really speak for my business?”

This is the biggest worry owners have about handing over replies. It’s reasonable. One badly judged answer can be screenshotted and shared.

So start small. Let your assistant handle routine questions with approved answers, and send everything else to you with a draft. For many small businesses, routine questions make up most of the volume. Track it for a month to see your own mix.


FAQ

What is community management for a small business?

Responding to comments, messages, reviews and mentions, and engaging with customers and local accounts on social media.


How quickly should a business reply to comments?

Many businesses aim for within one business day. Set a target you can keep.


Can a virtual assistant handle community management?

Yes. With approved answers and clear escalation rules, an assistant can handle most replies and flag the rest.


Should I delete negative comments?

Generally no. Respond calmly and move the conversation private. Only hide spam, scams or abusive language.


Is community management different from social media management?

It’s part of it. Social media management covers planning and posting; community management covers the conversations that follow.


Answer every customer, on time

IncludeWork’s social media virtual assistants can check comments, messages and reviews every day, using your approved answers. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Work is checked by IncludeWork’s quality-control team before it reaches you. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Instagram Virtual Assistant: Hand Off Without Losing Voice

Instagram Virtual Assistant: Hand Off Without Losing Voice

Instagram is often the most personal channel a small business has. Followers feel like they know you. That’s exactly why handing it over feels risky: what if it suddenly sounds like someone else?

It doesn’t have to. An Instagram virtual assistant can keep your account active, on brand and recognizably you, if you hand it over the right way. Here’s how.


What an Instagram virtual assistant can handle

  • Planning a weekly or monthly content grid

  • Writing captions from your notes, voice memos or photos

  • Editing Reels from your clips: trimming, captions, audio cleared for business use

  • Designing carousel posts and story graphics in Canva

  • Scheduling posts and stories

  • Replying to routine comments and DMs with approved answers

  • Engaging with local accounts, customers and partners

  • Tracking which posts bring in profile visits, link clicks and DMs


What you should keep

  • Your face and voice on camera. Followers can tell when it’s you.

  • Personal stories and opinions

  • Replies to complaints or anything sensitive

  • Partnership and influencer decisions

Your assistant can prepare all of these. But you stay the voice for the moments that matter.


Step 1: Build a voice kit

Before handing over, collect:

  • Five of your best captions, ones that sound most like you

  • Three words that describe your voice (for example: warm, direct, a bit funny)

  • Words and phrases you use often, and ones you never use

  • Emoji and hashtag style: how many, which ones, where

  • How you sign off, if you do

This takes about an hour. It saves many hours of rewriting.


Step 2: Run a caption test

Give your Instagram virtual assistant five photos and ask for captions. Then compare them with how you’d write them. Mark specific changes: “too formal”, “I’d never say ‘delighted’”, “shorter”.

Repeat with a second batch a few days later. Most assistants close the gap quickly with specific feedback.


Step 3: Set up access safely

  • Add your assistant through Instagram’s and Meta’s account access settings, rather than sharing your password

  • Give the access level they need, and keep owner and payment control yourself

  • Share any other logins through a password manager


Step 4: Approve in batches

  • Weeks 1–4: approve every caption and reply that isn’t routine

  • Month 2: routine posts (new work, behind the scenes) go out without approval

  • Month 3 onward: approve only offers, announcements and anything sensitive


Step 5: Keep feeding the account

Your assistant can’t invent your work. Send photos, short clips and voice notes every week. A shared folder that you drop content into from your phone makes this easy.


Rules for every Instagram account

  • Disclose partnerships. The FTC’s endorsement guidance says material connections, like payment or free products, should be disclosed clearly in the post. Your assistant should flag any partner post before it goes live.

  • No buying followers or likes. It breaks platform rules and, under the FTC’s 2024 rule, buying fake social media indicators to misrepresent influence is banned.

  • Use music and images you’re allowed to use. For Reels, use audio that’s cleared for business use. Business accounts may see a smaller music library than personal ones.

An example. Philippa runs a vintage furniture shop in Richmond, Virginia. Her Instagram captions were known for short, dry humor. Her new assistant’s first captions were cheerful and full of exclamation marks. Philippa sent back three examples with notes like “less excited, more deadpan”. By the second week, followers were replying to captions the way they used to, and Philippa was only filming short clips of new finds. (Philippa is an illustrative example.)


Instagram virtual assistant: signs it’s working

  • Posts go out on schedule without reminders

  • You rarely rewrite captions

  • DMs get answered the same day

  • Profile visits, link clicks or DMs from posts are steady or rising

But give it a month before judging. The first weeks are about voice, not numbers.

For a wider look at the role, see how a social media virtual assistant can run your accounts.


FAQ

What does an Instagram virtual assistant do?

They plan, create, schedule and post content, edit Reels, reply to routine comments and DMs and report on results.


Will my followers notice someone else is posting?

Not if you build a voice kit and give specific feedback in the first few weeks.


Should I give my Instagram password to a VA?

No. Use Instagram’s and Meta’s account access settings to add them, and keep owner control yourself.


How many hours does an Instagram VA need?

For three or four posts a week plus stories and replies, many small businesses start with 6 to 10 hours a week.


Can an Instagram VA grow my followers?

They can grow a real audience through consistent posting and engagement. Be wary of anyone promising fast follower numbers.


Keep Instagram sounding like you

IncludeWork’s social media virtual assistants learn your voice and work inside your accounts. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. And if the fit isn’t right, IncludeWork replaces your assistant at no extra cost. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Social Media Brief Template for Your Assistant (Free)

Social Media Brief Template for Your Assistant (Free)

“Just post something about our spring offer” is a brief. It’s just not a very good one. Your assistant has to guess the platform, the tone, the photo, the call to action and whether it needs your approval.

A one-page social media brief template answers all of that once. Your assistant reads it before every month of content, and your posts stop sounding like guesses. Below is the template, how to fill it in and a completed example.


Why a written brief saves you time

Without a brief, every post becomes a small conversation. With one, your assistant can plan a month of content alone and only ask about the exceptions. And when a new assistant joins, or your current one is away, the brief keeps everything consistent.


The social media brief template

Copy this into a shared document and fill in each section.

1. Goal for the next 3 months

One or two goals, as specific as you can. Example: “More bookings for weekday appointments” or “Grow our email list from Instagram”.

2. Who we’re talking to

Two or three sentences about your best customers: who they are, what they care about, what makes them buy.

3. Platforms and frequency

Which platforms, how often on each, and the best days or times if you know them.

4. Our voice

Three words that describe how you sound, plus words and phrases you use and ones you never use.

5. Content mix

What share of posts should be each type. Example: 40% behind the scenes, 30% customer results, 20% tips, 10% offers.

6. What we have to work with

Where to find photos, videos, testimonials and logos. Who sends new material and how often.

7. Key dates this quarter

Launches, events, holidays and seasonal moments.

8. Calls to action

What you want people to do: book, call, visit, reply, sign up. Include the links.

9. Rules

Topics to avoid, how to handle complaints, emoji and hashtag style, competitor mentions (usually none), and disclosure for any partner or gifted product posts.

10. Approvals

What needs your approval, what doesn’t, and your usual turnaround time.


A filled-in example

Business: a neighborhood bakery

Goal: more pre-orders for weekend cakes; fill weekday afternoons.

Audience: local families and office workers within 3 miles; they love seasonal flavors and hate missing out.

Platforms: Instagram 4x a week, Facebook 3x a week, Google Business Profile weekly.

Voice: warm, cheeky, simple. Say “bake”, “fresh”, “while they last”. Never say “artisanal”.

Content mix: 40% bakes coming out of the oven, 25% team and kitchen, 20% customer celebrations (with permission), 15% offers.

Material: photos in the shared “Bakes” folder, updated Mondays and Thursdays.

Key dates: Mother’s Day pre-orders open 3 weeks before; summer menu launch in June.

Call to action: pre-order link for cakes; “come by after 3pm” for weekday treats.

Rules: no politics; send any complaint to the owner; tag the coffee supplier only when we’ve agreed a post.

Approvals: offers and anything new need approval; daily bake posts don’t.


The rules part matters

Two rules belong in every brief:

  • Disclose partnerships. The FTC’s endorsement guidance says connections like payment or free products should be disclosed clearly, and that employees posting about their employer’s products should disclose that relationship.

  • Use content you have the rights to. Your own photos, licensed images, and customer photos only with permission.

An example. Ximena runs a nail salon in Albuquerque. Her assistant kept posting the same nail art photos and missing the salon’s quiet Tuesday slots. Ximena spent 40 minutes filling in a social media brief template: goal (fill Tuesdays), audience (students and young professionals), a content mix and a “Tuesday deal” call to action. The next month’s plan arrived complete, and she approved it in one sitting. (Ximena is an illustrative example.)


How to use the brief each month

  1. Update the goals and key dates at the start of each quarter

  2. Ask your assistant to send a monthly plan based on the brief

  3. Approve the plan, not just individual posts

  4. Add any new rules you discover

But keep it to one or two pages. Your voice details can live in a separate brand voice guide.


Will a brief really change anything?

Only if it gets used. A brief that sits in a folder fixes nothing. Ask your assistant to plan each month from it and to point out when it’s out of date.

And a brief doesn’t replace feedback. Expect to make edits in the first month. The brief just means you make fewer of them.


FAQ

What should a social media brief include?

Goals, audience, platforms and frequency, voice, content mix, available material, key dates, calls to action, rules and approvals.


How long should a social media brief be?

One to two pages. Long enough to answer common questions, short enough to actually read.


How often should I update the brief?

Every quarter, or whenever your goals, offers or audience change.


Is a social media brief the same as a content calendar?

No. The brief explains the rules and goals. The calendar is the plan your assistant builds from it.


Do I need a separate brief for each platform?

Usually not. One brief with platform notes works for most small businesses.


Hand your brief to someone who’ll use it

Once your brief is ready, a social media assistant can turn it into a month of posts. IncludeWork’s social media virtual assistants work from your brief and your tools. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Every IncludeWork assistant signs an NDA before they start. Start your free hours.

For more on the role, see how a social media virtual assistant can run your accounts.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Social Media Virtual Assistant: What They Run for You

Social Media Virtual Assistant: What They Run for You

You know you should post more. You also know that “more” usually means 10pm, phone in hand, trying to think of a caption after a full day of work.

A social media virtual assistant takes that nightly scramble off your list. They plan, create, schedule and reply, while you approve and stay the voice of the brand. Here’s what that looks like each week, and how to set it up so the posts still sound like you.


What a social media virtual assistant does each week

A typical week, on 8 to 12 hours, might include:

  • Monday: schedule the week’s posts, reply to weekend comments and messages

  • Tuesday: create graphics and short videos from your photos and clips

  • Wednesday: send drafts for your approval in one batch

  • Thursday: engage with local accounts, customers and partners

  • Friday: check what performed well and note ideas for next week

Over a month, that adds up to a steady feed, faster replies and a simple report. And you stop being the bottleneck for every post.


What they need from you

The more of these you provide, the less you’ll edit later:

  1. A one-page brand voice guide: how you sound, words you use and avoid

  2. Raw material: photos, short clips, customer stories, upcoming offers

  3. Access: added as a user or admin in Meta Business Suite and similar tools, not your password

  4. Approval rules: what they can post on their own and what needs your OK

  5. A list of “never” topics: politics, competitors, complaints, whatever you choose


The approval system that works

Most owners approve in batches, once or twice a week:

  • Weeks 1–4: you approve every post and every non-routine reply

  • Month 2: routine posts (hours, events, photos of work) go out without approval

  • Month 3 onward: you approve only offers, announcements and anything sensitive

This keeps you in control without making you the bottleneck again.


Which platforms to start with

Don’t try to be everywhere. Start where your customers already are:

Business type

Usually start with

Local services (cleaning, trades, salons)

Facebook, Instagram, Google Business Profile

Retail and food

Instagram, Facebook, TikTok if you’re comfortable on video

B2B and professional services

LinkedIn, plus a monthly email

Visual products (home, fashion, crafts)

Instagram, Pinterest

Two platforms done well beat five done badly.


The rules your assistant must follow

Social media has a few legal guardrails that apply to small businesses too:

  • Disclose connections. The FTC’s endorsement guidance says employees who post about their employer’s products should disclose that relationship in the post itself. The same goes for influencers you give free products to.

  • No fake reviews or fake followers. Buying followers or posting reviews from people who aren’t real customers is off-limits.

  • Use images you have the rights to. Your own photos, licensed stock or customer photos shared with permission.

Put these in writing for your assistant on day one.


How a social media virtual assistant fits with the rest of your marketing

Social media works better when it’s connected to everything else. A good assistant will:

  • Turn your newsletter into three or four posts

  • Share new Google reviews (with the customer’s permission)

  • Point followers to your booking page or offer

  • Note which posts bring in messages or inquiries

For more tasks you can hand over, see 35 marketing tasks to outsource.

An example. Joaquín owns a bike repair shop in St. Paul, Minnesota. He posted twice in six months. His social media VA now posts three times a week: before-and-after repair photos, a weekly “tune-up tip” from a voice note Joaquín records, and seasonal reminders when spring hits. Joaquín spends about 20 minutes a week approving drafts. But the bigger change was replies: messages asking “do you fix e-bikes?” now get an answer the same day, not three days later. (Joaquín is an illustrative example.)


What to watch for

A social media VA isn’t the right fit if:

  • You want viral growth from a standing start. That usually needs paid ads, creative strategy, or both.

  • You can’t provide any photos or raw material. They can’t invent your work.

  • You won’t give feedback in the first month. The voice won’t settle without it.


FAQ

How many hours does a social media virtual assistant need?

For two platforms posting a few times a week, many small businesses start with 8 to 12 hours a week. Adjust after the first month.


Can a social media VA create videos?

Many can edit short videos from your clips using simple tools. Filming usually still happens on your side.


Should I give my VA my social media password?

No. Add them as a user with the role they need in Meta Business Suite, LinkedIn or the platform’s settings.


Will followers know someone else is posting?

Not if the voice guide is good. Many businesses also sign off posts as “the team”.


How do I measure if it’s working?

Track inquiries, bookings or link clicks from social, not just likes. Ask for a short monthly report.


Get your evenings back

If your feed has gone quiet, a social media virtual assistant can get it moving this week. IncludeWork’s social media virtual assistants work in the tools you already use. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. IncludeWork has been running remote assistant teams since 2012. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Marketing Help for Small Business: How Many Hours?

Marketing Help for Small Business: How Many Hours?

“How many hours do I need?” is usually the first question owners ask when they look for marketing help. And the usual answer, “it depends”, isn’t much use when you’re trying to set a budget.

So here’s a more useful answer. Below are four common levels of marketing help for small business owners, what each one covers, and a quick way to work out where you should start.


Start with what you’re doing now

Before choosing hours, write down every marketing task you do in a normal week and how long it takes. Then add the things you should be doing but aren’t: the newsletter you skipped, the reviews you never answered.

That list, with rough times, is your starting point. Most owners find their real need sits between two of the levels below.


Level 1: 5 hours a week

Covers:

  • 2–3 social posts a week on one platform, from your photos and notes

  • Replies to routine comments and reviews

  • A weekly Google Business Profile post

Good for: very small businesses, sole traders and anyone testing whether delegation works for them.

Not enough for: a newsletter, several platforms or any content creation from scratch.


Level 2: 10 hours a week

Covers:

  • 3 posts a week on two platforms

  • Comments, messages and review replies

  • Google Business Profile updates

  • A monthly newsletter

  • A short monthly report

Good for: most local service businesses and small shops with steady, predictable marketing.

See what 10 hours a week of marketing help covers for an hour-by-hour plan.


Level 3: 20 hours a week

Covers everything in Level 2, plus:

  • Short video editing for Reels or TikTok

  • One blog post a month, formatted and published

  • Basic SEO updates: titles, descriptions, alt text

  • A welcome email series and list tagging

  • More active community engagement

Good for: growing businesses, online stores and B2B firms that win customers through content.


Level 4: 40 hours a week

Covers a full-time role:

  • Daily posting across three or more platforms

  • Weekly blog posts or newsletters

  • Campaign support for launches, events and seasonal promotions

  • Coordination with designers, agencies or ad specialists

  • Detailed monthly reporting

Good for: businesses where marketing is a main growth engine and there’s a clear plan to follow.


Marketing help for small business: how to pick your level

Ask three questions:

  1. How many channels do you need? One channel fits Level 1. Two plus email fits Level 2. Content and video push you to Level 3.

  2. Who creates the raw material? If you send photos and notes, fewer hours. If the assistant creates from scratch, more.

  3. How fast do you want to grow? Steady upkeep needs fewer hours than a growth push.

But start smaller than you think. It’s easier to add hours once the first channels run smoothly than to fill hours you don’t need.

The U.S. Small Business Administration suggests setting a marketing budget based on goals and tracking return. Choose the hours that match your goals, then review after 90 days.

An example. Odette runs a family-owned garden center in Asheville, North Carolina. Her one-week task list showed about 6 hours of marketing, mostly spring and autumn posts, plus a newsletter she kept skipping. She started at 10 hours a week. In spring, her busiest season, she moved to 20 hours for three months to cover workshop promotions and short planting videos, then dropped back. (Odette is an illustrative example.)


Signs you need more hours

  • Planned posts or emails keep slipping

  • Your assistant’s backlog keeps growing

  • You’ve added a new channel, product or location

  • You’re about to launch something big


Signs you have too many

  • Your assistant often runs out of work

  • You can’t keep up with approvals

  • Results haven’t changed after adding hours


FAQ

How many hours of marketing does a small business need?

Many start with 5 to 10 hours a week of help. Businesses with several channels or content plans often need 20 or more.


Can I change hours month to month?

With many agencies, yes. Check the notice period before you sign.


How much does 10 hours a week of marketing help cost?

It depends on the provider. At IncludeWork, 40 hours a month is $250 on the Professional plan. See pricing.


Should seasonal businesses change hours by season?

Often, yes. Add hours before and during busy seasons, and reduce them when things are quiet.


Is full-time marketing help worth it for a small business?

Only if marketing is a main growth channel and there’s a clear plan. Many small businesses get more value from part-time help.


Find your starting point

Not sure which level fits? Start small and test it. IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants work on flexible plans. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Work is checked by IncludeWork’s quality-control team before it reaches you. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Offshore Marketing Assistant: Benefits, Risks, How-To

Offshore Marketing Assistant: Benefits, Risks, How-To

Many small businesses now work with marketing assistants based in other countries. For some, it’s the best hire they’ve made. For others, it’s a frustrating mix of late replies and posts that don’t quite sound right.

The difference is rarely the person’s location. It’s how the work is set up. Here’s what an offshore marketing assistant can offer, the risks to plan for, and the setup that makes it work.


The benefits

Lower cost for the same hours

Rates for assistants in many countries are lower than U.S. rates for similar work. That means more hours of marketing help for the same budget, or the same help for less.


Work done while you sleep

A time difference can be an advantage. You send notes in the evening; drafts are waiting in the morning. Scheduled posts, reports and list cleanup happen overnight.


A wider pool of skills

Looking beyond your city or country gives you more candidates with experience in specific tools or industries.


The risks to plan for

Voice and cultural fit

An assistant who doesn’t know your local customers may miss references, holidays or tone. “Football” means different things in different countries. So do date formats and spelling.

Fix: a brand voice guide with local references, a list of holidays and events that matter to your customers, and approvals for the first month.


Time zones

Too little overlap makes quick questions slow. And small delays add up over a month of posts.

Fix: agree on two to three hours of overlap, or a fixed daily check-in window.


Data and account security

Your assistant will work inside your social, email and website accounts.

Fix: add them as a named user with limited permissions, never share your passwords, use a password manager for shared logins and keep owner and billing access yourself.


Payments, contracts and tax paperwork

Paying someone abroad works differently from paying a local employee. If you contract directly, the IRS explains that foreign individuals may provide Form W-8BEN to the payer to document their foreign status for U.S. tax purposes. Ask your accountant what applies to you. Agencies usually handle contracts and payments for you.


Legal responsibility stays with you

Your business is still responsible for what’s published and sent in its name. For example, U.S. email marketing rules apply to your newsletters wherever the person sending them sits.


How to make an offshore marketing assistant work

  1. Write things down. Clear written briefs matter more when you’re not in the same room or time zone.

  2. Share local context. Your customers, competitors, local events, holidays and phrases.

  3. Set overlap hours and a reply-time expectation for messages.

  4. Start with one channel and approve everything for the first few weeks.

  5. Use a shared task board so nothing lives in someone’s inbox.

  6. Hold a short weekly call to keep the relationship human.

An example. Margit owns a small chain of two yoga studios in Minneapolis. Her offshore marketing assistant works eight hours ahead. In the first month, posts used British spelling and missed the local “Twin Cities” references her students knew. Margit added a short local guide to her brand voice document: local events, phrases to use and U.S. spelling. She also set a two-hour overlap each morning. By the second month, she was editing very little, and posts were scheduled before she woke up. (Margit is an illustrative example.)


Agency or direct hire?


Through an agency

Direct hire

Screening

Done for you

You do it

Contracts and payments

Handled by the agency

You handle them, with your accountant

Backup if they leave

Usually provided

You start over

Cost

Agency rate

Often lower rate, more of your time

But whichever route you take, test the work before committing. See paid test tasks for a marketing VA.


FAQ

Is it safe to hire an offshore marketing assistant?

It can be, with the right setup: named user access, no shared passwords, clear rules and a trial period.


Will an offshore assistant understand my customers?

Not at first. A good local guide, clear examples and early feedback close the gap quickly.


How do I handle time zones with an offshore VA?

Agree on a few hours of overlap or a daily check-in window, and use written briefs for everything else.


Do I need to file tax forms for an offshore assistant?

It depends on how you pay them and your situation. Ask your accountant. Agencies usually handle this.


What tasks suit an offshore marketing assistant best?

Scheduled work like social posts, newsletters, listings, reports and design from templates.


Try remote marketing help, risk-free

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants are screened, trained and managed for you. See how remote help works for your business with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. And if the fit isn’t right, IncludeWork replaces your assistant at no extra cost. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Is a Marketing Virtual Assistant Worth It? ROI Breakdown

Is a Marketing Virtual Assistant Worth It? ROI Breakdown

Every owner asks the same question before hiring help: will this pay for itself, or is it one more monthly bill?

So, is a marketing virtual assistant worth it? For some businesses, clearly yes. For others, not yet. This guide gives you a simple way to work out the return for your own business, a worked example, and the situations where it doesn’t add up.


Two kinds of return

A marketing VA pays you back in two ways:

  1. Time: hours you no longer spend on marketing tasks

  2. Revenue: extra customers from marketing that now happens every week instead of occasionally

Most owners only count the second one. But the first is often bigger, and easier to measure.


Step 1: Work out the value of your time

Write down how many hours a week you spend on marketing tasks you could hand over. Then put a value on an hour of your time. A simple way: what could you earn or save in that hour doing your actual job, like serving clients, selling or quoting?

Time return per month = hours saved × value of your hour


Step 2: Estimate the extra revenue

This is harder, so be conservative. Ask:

  • How many new customers does a typical month of consistent marketing bring in?

  • What’s a customer worth to you over a year?

Use your own records if you have them. If you don’t, track it for three months after hiring.


Step 3: Add up the full cost

Include everything:

  • The assistant’s fee

  • Tools, if you’re paying for new ones

  • Your time managing and approving (count all of it, especially at the start)

The U.S. Small Business Administration recommends measuring return on investment by comparing marketing expenses with the revenue they generate. The same idea works here.


A worked example

Let’s say a business owner:

  • Spends 8 hours a week on marketing tasks, about 34 hours a month

  • Values an hour of their time at $60, based on what they bill clients

  • Hires a marketing VA for 40 hours a month at $250 (IncludeWork’s Professional plan)

  • Spends about 4 hours a month on approvals and check-ins


Monthly figure

Owner hours freed (34 − 4)

30 hours

Value of time freed (30 × $60)

$1,800

Assistant cost

$250

Tool costs (estimate)

$30

Time-based return

$1,520 a month

That’s before counting any extra customers. These are illustrative figures. Your hours, value of time and costs will differ.

An example. Viktor runs a small architecture practice in Denver. He was spending Friday afternoons on LinkedIn posts and a quarterly newsletter. He worked out that those hours were worth more spent on client design work, which he bills by the hour. After hiring a marketing VA, he moved Friday afternoons back to billable work. The marketing also became steadier: monthly instead of quarterly newsletters, and weekly LinkedIn posts. (Viktor is an illustrative example.)


Is a marketing virtual assistant worth it? Not always

It may not pay off if:

  • You only have an hour or two of marketing tasks a month

  • You won’t use the freed-up time for anything that earns or matters

  • You don’t know what marketing works and need strategy first

  • You can’t give feedback in the first few weeks, so the work never improves

  • Your offer or website has a bigger problem that marketing can’t fix

In these cases, fix the bigger issue first. And then run the numbers again.


How to make sure it pays off

  • Track inquiries and sales by source from the first month

  • Use the freed time on purpose: block it in your calendar for sales or client work

  • Start with the tasks that take you the longest

  • Review after 90 days: time saved, work delivered and any change in inquiries

For a fuller cost comparison with freelancers and in-house hires, see how much a marketing virtual assistant costs.


FAQ

Is a marketing virtual assistant worth it for a small business?

Often, if you spend several hours a week on marketing tasks and can use that time on higher-value work. Run the numbers for your business.


How do I measure the ROI of a marketing VA?

Add the value of the time you save to any extra revenue, then subtract the full cost: fees, tools and your management time.


How long before a marketing VA pays off?

Time savings usually start within the first month. Revenue effects often take a few months of consistent marketing to show.


What if my marketing VA doesn’t bring in more sales?

Check whether the problem is the work, the plan or the offer. A VA executes a plan; they can’t fix a weak one.


Is a marketing VA cheaper than doing it myself?

In cash, no. In time, often yes, if your hour is worth more than the assistant’s rate.


Test the return with free hours

The best way to answer the question is to try it. IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can take over your most time-consuming tasks. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Every IncludeWork assistant signs an NDA before they start. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Marketing Assistant Pricing: Hourly vs Monthly Retainer

Marketing Assistant Pricing: Hourly vs Monthly Retainer


The rate is only half of the price. The other half is how you pay: by the hour, by a monthly block of hours, or by a fixed retainer for agreed work.

Each model changes how much you spend, how predictable it is and how the work gets done. This guide explains marketing assistant pricing in plain terms, with worked examples, so you can choose the model that fits your business.


The three common pricing models

Model

How it works

Best for

Watch out for

Hourly (pay-as-you-go)

Pay for hours worked, usually tracked

Irregular or small amounts of work

Costs vary month to month; time tracking needed

Monthly block of hours

Buy a set number of hours each month at a lower rate

Steady weekly work

Unused hours may not roll over

Fixed retainer for deliverables

A set fee for agreed outputs (e.g., 12 posts, 1 newsletter)

Clear, repeatable work

Extra requests may cost more; scope needs to be clear


Hourly pricing

You pay for each hour worked. It’s simple and flexible.

Pros: no commitment, easy to start, good for one-off projects.

Cons: monthly costs change, and you’ll need to check timesheets. Hourly rates are usually higher than block rates.

On freelance marketplaces, Upwork’s rate guide puts VAs doing marketing, customer service or accounting work at around $20 to $35 or more an hour. Platform fees may be added on top for clients.


Monthly blocks of hours

You buy a set number of hours each month, often at a lower hourly rate than pay-as-you-go.

Pros: predictable cost, lower effective rate, steady availability.

Cons: you pay for the block whether you use it or not, unless the provider allows rollover.

At IncludeWork, for example, pricing is $8 an hour pay-as-you-go, $250 a month for 40 hours ($6.25 an hour) on the Professional plan, and $800 a month for 160 hours ($5 an hour) on Enterprise.


Fixed retainers for deliverables

You agree on outputs, such as “12 Instagram posts, 1 newsletter and a monthly report”, for a fixed monthly fee.

Pros: you know exactly what you get. No timesheets to check.

Cons: scope creep. If you ask for “just one more thing” every week, the retainer needs reworking. And quality can slip if the provider rushes to fit the fee.


A worked example

Say you need about 40 hours of marketing work a month:

Option

Monthly cost

Notes

Freelance VA at $25/hour

$1,000, plus any platform fees

Rate within Upwork’s range for marketing VAs

Agency pay-as-you-go at $8/hour

$320

Pay-as-you-go rate above

Agency monthly block (40 hours)

$250

Professional plan above, includes project manager and quality checks

These are illustrative calculations, not quotes. Your real costs depend on the provider, skills and hours.


Marketing assistant pricing: how to choose

  • Choose hourly if your work is irregular, or you’re testing whether you need help at all.

  • Choose a monthly block if you have steady weekly work like posting, emails and review replies.

  • Choose a fixed retainer if your work is very predictable and you’d rather pay for outputs than hours.

But whichever model you choose, write down what’s expected each month. Clear expectations matter more than the pricing model.

An example. Nkechi runs a home staging business in Charlotte, North Carolina. She started paying a freelancer hourly and found her bill swinging between $300 and $900 a month, depending on how many listings she had. She moved to a 40-hour monthly block and set a standing list of tasks: staging photos posted within two days of each job, a monthly newsletter and weekly Google posts. Her costs became predictable, and slow weeks went into a backlog of blog posts. (Nkechi is an illustrative example.)


Questions to ask any provider

  • What’s included in the price: management, quality checks, tools?

  • Do unused hours roll over?

  • How are hours tracked and reported?

  • What’s the notice period to change or cancel?

  • Are there extra fees for rush work or extra channels?

For the full cost picture, see how much a marketing virtual assistant costs.


The hidden cost in every model

Whichever way you pay, your own time is part of the price. A cheap hourly rate that needs constant rewriting can cost more than a higher rate with work you barely touch.

So compare providers on the work you get back, not just the number on the invoice. A short paid trial is the easiest way to see that.


FAQ

How do most marketing assistants charge?

Hourly, by monthly blocks of hours, or by a fixed monthly retainer for agreed deliverables.


Is a monthly retainer cheaper than hourly?

Often, because block hours usually come at a lower rate. It depends on whether you use the hours.


What should a marketing assistant retainer include?

A clear list of deliverables, hours or both, plus how extra work, reporting and approvals are handled.


Do I pay for tools separately?

Usually, yes. Tools like Canva or an email platform are typically paid by the business.


Can I switch pricing models later?

Most providers allow it. Start hourly or with a trial, then move to a monthly plan once you know your needs.


Start before you commit

Not sure which model fits? Test the work first. IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract, and marketing virtual assistants on flexible plans afterwards. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
11 Red Flags When Hiring a Marketing Assistant

11 Red Flags When Hiring a Marketing Assistant

Most bad hires show warning signs early. The problem is that they’re easy to miss when you’re busy and someone seems friendly and keen.

When hiring a marketing assistant, a few signs are worth taking seriously, even if everything else looks good. Here are 11 of them, why each one matters and what a good candidate does instead.

Red flags in samples and experience

1. Every sample sounds the same

If a candidate’s posts for a dentist, a gym and a bakery all use the same phrases and tone, they’ll sound the same for you too.

Good sign instead: samples that clearly sound like different businesses.

2. They can’t explain their own work

Ask why a post worked or why they chose a headline. If they can’t say, the work may not be theirs, or they were only scheduling someone else’s content.

Good sign instead: a clear answer about the audience and goal.

3. Only screenshots of big brands

Samples from famous companies are hard to check and often small parts of a big team’s work.

Good sign instead: real work for small businesses like yours, with links you can view.

Red flags in promises

4. Guaranteed results

“10,000 followers in 90 days.” “First page of Google.” No one can promise these, and anyone who does is either guessing or cutting corners.

Good sign instead: a realistic plan and a promise about the work: posts every week, emails on time.

5. Offering to buy followers, likes or reviews

This one is serious. And it can put your business at risk, not just theirs. The FTC’s rule on fake reviews bans fake reviews and buying fake social media indicators like followers or views when they misrepresent influence for business purposes.

Good sign instead: they talk about asking real customers for reviews and growing a real audience.

6. They want your passwords

A good marketing assistant knows how to be added as a user in each tool. Asking for your main password, or your email login, is a warning.

Good sign instead: they ask to be added as a user with the right role.

Red flags in how they communicate

7. Slow, vague replies during hiring

Candidates are usually at their most responsive while hiring. If replies are slow or miss your questions now, expect worse later.

Good sign instead: clear, timely answers that address what you asked.

8. No questions about your business

A candidate who doesn’t ask about your customers, offers or goals is planning to post generic content.

Good sign instead: thoughtful questions before the test task.

9. They resist a paid test

A short, paid test is fair and normal. Pushing back on it, or asking for a long contract first, suggests they don’t want their work judged.

Good sign instead: they welcome the test and ask for a clear brief.

Red flags in the details

10. Errors in their own application

Typos, the wrong business name or a copy-pasted message in a job about writing and attention to detail is a bad sign.

Good sign instead: a short, accurate, personal reply.

11. Vague answers about who does the work

Some “assistants” pass work to others you’ve never met. Ask who will actually do the work, every week.

Good sign instead: a clear answer, and, through an agency, a named assistant plus a clear backup plan.

Hiring a marketing assistant: what to do when you spot a red flag

One small red flag isn’t always a deal-breaker. But some are:

  • Walk away: offers of fake followers or reviews, demands for your passwords, refusal to do any test

  • Dig deeper: generic samples, slow replies, guaranteed results

For the deeper checks, use a paid test and scenario questions. See 20 marketing assistant interview questions.

An example. Gustavo runs a family-owned tile importer in Phoenix. One candidate had great samples and a low rate. On the call, she promised “5,000 real Instagram followers in the first month” and asked for his Instagram password to “get started quickly”. Gustavo thanked her and moved on. The candidate he hired promised three posts a week, asked to be added as a user and grew his following more slowly, with real customers. (Gustavo is an illustrative example.)

Prevent problems with a clear process

Most red flags show up if you follow a simple process:

  1. A clear job description

  2. Real samples and a short call

  3. A paid test task

  4. A trial period with approvals

For the full steps, see how to hire a marketing virtual assistant.

FAQ

What are the biggest red flags when hiring a marketing assistant?

Guaranteed results, offers to buy followers or reviews, requests for your passwords and resistance to a paid test.

Is it a red flag if a marketing VA is very cheap?

Not always, but check samples and test the work. A low rate with poor quality costs more in your time.

Should I hire someone who promises fast follower growth?

Be very careful. Fast growth promises often rely on fake followers or tactics that break platform rules.

How do I check if samples are real?

Ask for live links, ask them to explain the work and run a short paid test using your own brief.

What if I’ve already hired someone showing red flags?

Raise it directly, set clear rules and a short review period. If it doesn’t improve, replace them.

Hire with fewer surprises

IncludeWork screens and trains its marketing virtual assistants, and they work in your tools as named users. Try one with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. IncludeWork has been running remote assistant teams since 2012. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Where to Find a Marketing Virtual Assistant You Can Trust

Where to Find a Marketing Virtual Assistant You Can Trust

Search for “marketing virtual assistant” and you’ll get thousands of profiles, agencies and ads. All of them promise reliable, creative, experienced help. Very few tell you how to check.

This guide looks at the four main places to find a marketing virtual assistant, what each one is good and bad at, and the checks that matter wherever you look.


The four main places to look

Where

Best for

Watch out for

Freelance marketplaces

Choice, flexible budgets, short projects

You do all the screening and managing

VA agencies

Speed, pre-screened assistants, backup if someone leaves

Less choice of individual; check what’s included

Referrals

Trust, a proven track record

Limited options; a friend’s great VA may not fit your business

Job boards and social media

Direct hires, longer-term roles

Lots of applications to sort through


1. Freelance marketplaces

Platforms like Upwork and Fiverr list thousands of virtual assistants. You post a job or search profiles, interview, and hire.

The good: lots of choice and reviews from past clients. Upwork’s own rate guide says virtual assistants on the platform typically charge $10 to $20 an hour, with VAs doing marketing, customer service or accounting work at around $20 to $35 or more.

The not-so-good: screening is on you. Reviews can reflect very different kinds of work. And if your assistant leaves, you start over.

Tip: filter for marketing samples, not just high ratings. Read reviews for words like “on time”, “followed the brief” and “matched our voice”.


2. VA agencies

Agencies recruit, screen and train assistants, then match you with one. Many also handle replacements and quality checks.

The good: faster to start and less hiring work. If your assistant is sick or leaves, the agency covers it.

The not-so-good: you choose from a smaller pool, and terms vary widely.

Tip: ask how assistants are screened, whether they’re trained in marketing tools, who checks the work and what happens if it isn’t a fit.


3. Referrals

Ask other business owners, your accountant or local business groups who they use.

The good: you hear about real reliability from someone you trust.

The not-so-good: a great VA for a bakery may not be right for a law firm. Still run a test.


4. Job boards and social media

Posting on job boards, LinkedIn or industry groups can work well for longer-term or full-time roles.

The good: you can find people who want a steady role with one business.

The not-so-good: many applications to sort, and you handle contracts, pay and admin.

Tip: a specific job description saves hours of screening. See our marketing assistant job description template.


How to find a marketing virtual assistant you can rely on

Wherever you look, the same checks apply:

  1. Real samples of marketing work for real businesses

  2. A short video call to check communication

  3. A paid test task using your own brief

  4. References or reviews that mention reliability

  5. A trial period before a long commitment

But don’t skip the test, even with a strong referral. It’s the fastest way to see how someone works on your business. See paid test tasks for a marketing VA.

An example. Felicity runs a kids’ swim school in Columbus, Georgia. She first hired a marketplace VA with perfect ratings, but the posts sounded generic and the VA disappeared during the summer rush. Next time, she asked three local business owners for referrals, ran a paid two-hour test with two candidates and agreed a one-month trial. The assistant she hired is still with her a year later. (Felicity is an illustrative example.)


Questions to ask before you commit

  • Who will actually do the work, and will it always be the same person?

  • What happens if they’re sick, on holiday or leave?

  • Who owns the content, accounts and files?

  • How much notice is needed to stop or change hours?

  • Is there a minimum contract?

“Can I trust a remote stranger with my accounts?”

It’s a fair worry. You’re giving someone access to your brand’s public voice.

But you can limit the risk. Add them as a named user instead of sharing passwords, keep owner and billing access yourself, approve everything for the first few weeks, and ask for an NDA. If something feels wrong, you can remove their access in minutes.


FAQ

Where is the best place to find a marketing virtual assistant?

It depends on how much hiring work you want to do. Marketplaces offer the most choice; agencies offer the least effort; referrals offer the most trust.


How much do marketing virtual assistants charge?

Upwork’s rate guide puts marketing-focused VAs at about $20 to $35 or more an hour. Agencies often price by monthly blocks of hours.


Is it safer to hire through an agency?

Agencies usually screen and replace assistants for you, which lowers risk. Still check what’s included and test the work.


How long does it take to find a good marketing VA?

Through a marketplace, often one to three weeks. Through an agency, often a few days.


Should I hire someone local or remote?

Remote works well for most marketing tasks. Local helps if you need someone at events or taking photos on site.


Skip the search

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants are screened and trained before they start. Test one on your own brief with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Work is checked by IncludeWork’s quality-control team before it reaches you. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Marketing Assistant Test Task: 6 Paid Tests That Work

Marketing Assistant Test Task: 6 Paid Tests That Work

Portfolios can be polished by someone else. Interviews reward people who talk well. Neither tells you what a candidate will produce for your business on a normal Tuesday.

A short, paid marketing assistant test task does. You give two or three finalists the same brief, pay them for an hour or two, and compare real work. Below are six test ideas, a scoring sheet and tips for running the test fairly.


Why the test should be paid

Unpaid “tests” that look like real work put off good candidates, and they can feel like free labor. Paying for one or two hours:

  • Shows you respect their time

  • Attracts experienced people who won’t do free work

  • Makes it fair to ask for real effort

Keep it short. A test that takes more than two hours is a project, not a test. But make it real: use your own photos, offer and voice guide.


6 marketing assistant test task ideas

1. Captions in your voice (1 hour)

Give them your brand voice guide, five photos and one upcoming offer. Ask for three captions for Instagram or Facebook.

Shows: writing, voice matching, following a brief.


2. A one-week social plan (1–2 hours)

Ask for a simple plan for one week: what to post each day, on which platform, and why.

Shows: planning, judgment, understanding of your customers.


3. A newsletter draft (1–2 hours)

Send bullet points: one piece of news, one tip, one offer. Ask for a short newsletter draft and two subject line options.

Shows: writing, structure, attention to the call to action.


4. Review replies (30–60 minutes)

Share three real (anonymized) reviews: one glowing, one mixed, one angry. Ask for draft replies.

Shows: tone, judgment, calm under pressure.


5. A simple graphic (1 hour)

Give them your logo, colors and a message. Ask for one post graphic in Canva.

Shows: design sense, brand consistency, tool comfort.


6. A quick audit (1–2 hours)

Ask them to look at your Instagram or Google Business Profile and list five improvements, in order of importance.

Shows: observation, priorities, practical ideas.

You don’t need all six. Pick one or two that match the work you’ll actually give them.


How to score the test

Use the same sheet for every candidate:

Criterion

Score 1–5

Notes

Sounds like our business



Followed the brief (offer, photos, length)



Accuracy (prices, dates, spelling)



Good judgment (what to say and not say)



Asked smart questions before starting



Delivered on time



The last two matter more than people expect. Someone who asks one good question and delivers on time is often a better hire than someone with slightly prettier work.


Keep the test fair

The U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission’s guidance on employment tests says tests should be job-related and applied consistently to all candidates, with reasonable accommodations for people with disabilities. In practice:

  • Give every finalist the same brief and deadline

  • Test the actual work of the role, nothing unrelated

  • Be ready to adjust format or timing if someone asks for an accommodation

And don’t publish test work unless you’ve agreed that and paid for it.

An example. Yvette runs a catering company in New Orleans. She gave three finalists the same test: three captions for a wedding tasting event and replies to three reviews. Two submitted polished captions. Only one asked whether the tasting was free or paid before writing, and her reply to the angry review offered to call the customer rather than arguing. Yvette hired her and paid all three for their time. (Yvette is an illustrative example.)


Common mistakes

  • A test that’s too long or that looks like free work

  • Different briefs for different candidates

  • Scoring on looks alone instead of accuracy and judgment

  • No deadline, so you can’t see reliability

  • Not giving feedback to the candidates you don’t hire

For the full hiring process, see how to hire a marketing virtual assistant. For interview questions to pair with the test, see 20 marketing assistant interview questions.


FAQ

Should I pay for a marketing assistant test task?

Yes. Paying for one or two hours shows respect, attracts better candidates and makes it fair to expect real effort.


How long should a test task take?

One to two hours is enough to see writing, judgment and reliability.


What’s the best test for a marketing VA?

Writing captions in your voice from your photos and an offer. It tests the skill that matters most.


How many candidates should do the test?

Two or three finalists is usually enough to compare.


Can I use the test work afterwards?

Only if you agree that upfront and pay for it.


Run your test for free

With IncludeWork, the test is on us. Give a trained marketing virtual assistant your brief and judge the work with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Work is checked by IncludeWork’s quality-control team before it reaches you. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
20 Marketing Assistant Interview Questions to Ask

20 Marketing Assistant Interview Questions to Ask

Most interviews with marketing candidates go the same way. They say they’re creative, organized and great with social media. You nod. Everyone sounds fine.

The right marketing assistant interview questions get past that. They ask for real examples, test judgment and show you how someone thinks. Below are 20 questions in five groups, with what a good answer sounds like for each.


Marketing assistant interview questions about experience

1. Walk me through a week of marketing work you did for a business.

Good answer: specific channels, tasks and tools, in order. Not “I handled their social media”.

2. Show me a post or email you’re proud of. Why does it work?

Good answer: they explain the audience and the goal, not just that it “looked nice”.

3. Which tools have you used every week, not just once?

Good answer: a short, honest list with what they did in each.

4. What’s a marketing task you’ve done that didn’t go well?

Good answer: a real example and what they changed afterwards.


Questions about writing and voice

5. How would you learn to write in my brand’s voice?

Good answer: reading past posts, asking for a voice guide, starting with drafts for approval.

6. Here are two of our past posts. Which is better, and why?

Good answer: a clear opinion with a reason tied to the customer.

7. Rewrite this caption to be shorter and friendlier. (Give them one.)

Good answer: clearly shorter, still accurate, sounds like a person.

8. How do you check your work before it goes live?

Good answer: a routine: spelling, links, prices, dates, tagging.


Questions about judgment

9. A customer posts an angry comment about a late order. What do you do?

Good answer: don’t argue in public, flag it to the owner, draft a calm reply, move the conversation to a private message.

10. You notice a post scheduled for tomorrow has the wrong price. The owner is unreachable. What now?

Good answer: pause or unschedule it, then tell the owner.

11. What would you never post without approval?

Good answer: prices, offers, complaints, anything sensitive or new.

12. An influencer offers to promote us in exchange for free products. What do you do?

Good answer: pass it to the owner, and mention that the post would need a clear disclosure.


Questions about organization and results

13. How would you organize a month of content for two platforms?

Good answer: a calendar, themes, batch creation, a clear approval step.

14. How do you keep track of deadlines across several clients or projects?

Good answer: a named tool or system, not memory.

15. Which numbers would you report to me each month, and why?

Good answer: inquiries, clicks or bookings, not just likes and followers.

16. Last month a post got far more engagement than usual. What would you do with that?

Good answer: look at why, make more like it, report it.


Questions about working together

17. How do you prefer to get feedback?

Good answer: specific, regular and in writing, plus openness to change.

18. What do you do when you’re stuck or a task is unclear?

Good answer: ask early, with a suggested solution.

19. How many hours could you give us each week, and when?

Good answer: clear availability, including overlap with your hours.

20. What questions do you have about our business?

Good answer: thoughtful questions about customers, offers or goals. No questions at all is a warning sign.


Questions you should avoid

Some questions can create legal risk, even when asked casually. The U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission’s guidance on prohibited practices says information about race, sex, national origin, age and religion is irrelevant to whether someone is qualified, and employers should not ask about disability before a job offer. So avoid questions about:

  • Age, family plans, marriage or children

  • Religion or religious holidays

  • Health or disability

  • Where someone is “originally from”

Stick to skills, experience and availability. This is general information, not legal advice. And if you hire through an agency, ask how they screen candidates.

An example. Lorenzo owns a small coffee roastery in Pittsburgh. He interviewed three candidates for a marketing assistant role. All three described themselves as “detail-oriented”. But only one, when shown a scheduled post with a wrong price (question 10), said she’d unschedule it first and message him second. Lorenzo hired her, and later said that answer told him more than the rest of the interview. (Lorenzo is an illustrative example.)


Pair the interview with a test

An interview shows how someone talks about work. A paid test task shows how they do it. Use both. See paid test tasks for a marketing VA for examples.


What interviews can’t tell you

Interviews reward people who talk well. Some great assistants are quiet on calls and excellent in writing, which is where most marketing work happens. Others interview brilliantly and miss deadlines.

So treat the interview as one data point. The paid test, references and the first month of work tell you much more.


FAQ

What should I ask a marketing assistant in an interview?

Ask for real examples of their work, how they’d learn your voice, how they’d handle tricky situations and which numbers they’d report.


How long should a marketing assistant interview be?

Thirty to 45 minutes is usually enough, followed by a short paid test for finalists.


What’s a good question to test judgment?

Give them a real scenario, like an angry public comment or a wrong price in a scheduled post, and ask what they’d do.


Which interview questions are illegal to ask?

In the U.S., avoid questions about protected characteristics like age, religion, national origin and disability. Check the EEOC’s guidance.


Should I interview a VA from an agency?

A short call is useful to check communication and fit, even if the agency has already screened them.


Skip the interview rounds

IncludeWork screens and trains its marketing virtual assistants before they start. See how one works on your business with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. And if the fit isn’t right, IncludeWork replaces your assistant at no extra cost. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Marketing Virtual Assistant Cost in 2027: Real Numbers

Marketing Virtual Assistant Cost in 2027: Real Numbers

Most owners asking about marketing virtual assistant cost are really asking a different question: can I afford to stop doing my own marketing?

You’re writing posts at 10pm. The newsletter hasn’t gone out since spring. Your Google profile still shows last year’s holiday hours. You know marketing matters. You just don’t have the hours, and you’re not sure what it costs to buy them.

Here are the real numbers, where they come from, and what you get at each price.

Rates checked September–October 2026.


Marketing virtual assistant cost: the short answer

Type of marketing help

Typical cost

What you get

Marketing VA through an agency

$5–$8/hour at IncludeWork, depending on plan

A trained assistant, plus management and quality checks on monthly plans

Freelance marketing VA on a marketplace

Often $20–$35+/hour

One person you find, test and manage yourself

In-house marketing specialist (US)

About $78,760/year median wages, more with benefits

A full-time employee

Marketing agency

Varies widely by scope

Strategy and execution, usually on a monthly retainer


Where those numbers come from

Agency marketing assistants

IncludeWork’s pricing is $8 an hour pay-as-you-go, $250 a month for 40 hours ($6.25 an hour) on the Professional plan with a project manager and quality control, and $800 a month for 160 hours ($5 an hour) on Enterprise. Its marketing assistants work in tools like Canva, Meta Business Suite, Mailchimp, HubSpot and Semrush.


Freelance marketing VAs

Upwork’s own rate guide puts virtual assistants doing marketing, customer service or accounting work at around $20 to $35+ an hour, higher than general admin VAs. Marketplace fees come on top: Upwork charges clients a marketplace fee of up to 7.99% on its free plan.


In-house marketing staff

The Bureau of Labor Statistics puts the median pay for market research analysts and marketing specialists at $78,760 a year, or $37.87 an hour (May 2025). Benefits add more: BLS data shows benefits were 30% of private employers’ compensation costs in June 2026. Using that split, a $78,760 salary is roughly $112,500 a year in total cost.


Marketing agencies

Agency retainers vary too much to give a fair range. They usually include strategy and campaign management, which a marketing assistant typically doesn’t. We compare the two in marketing VA vs marketing agency.


What changes the price

  • Skill level. Scheduling posts costs less than running ads or doing SEO research.

  • Hours. Monthly blocks cost less per hour than ad-hoc work.

  • What’s included. Management, quality checks and backup cover cost money, or your time if you do them yourself.

  • Location. Assistants in lower-cost countries charge less for the same tasks.

  • Ownership of strategy. If you want someone to decide what to do, not just do it, you’ll pay more.


The costs nobody mentions

The assistant’s rate isn’t your whole marketing budget. Plan for:

  • Tools. For example, Canva Pro is $12 a month billed yearly, and Buffer charges $5 per social channel a month billed yearly. Many tools have free plans to start.

  • Ad spend, if you run paid ads. That’s separate from the assistant’s time.

  • Your time, especially in the first two weeks: briefing, approving and giving feedback.

  • Content inputs: photos, product samples, customer stories.


A worked example: 40 hours a month

Rhiannon runs a small interior design studio in Charlotte. She wanted three Instagram posts a week, a monthly newsletter, weekly Google Business Profile posts and a simple monthly report. About 40 hours a month.

Option

Approximate monthly cost

Agency marketing VA (Professional plan above, 40 hours)

$250

Freelance marketing VA at $25/hour

$1,000, plus marketplace fees

Part-time in-house at the BLS median ($37.87/hour)

About $1,515 in wages, before payroll taxes and benefits

Add roughly $20 to $40 a month for tools either way. Rhiannon still approves every post and writes the main idea for each newsletter. But she went from about 10 hours a week on marketing to about two. (Rhiannon is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: cheap isn’t the same as good value

A low hourly rate doesn’t help if you spend your evenings fixing the work. Ask what’s included: is someone checking quality? Is there backup if your assistant is sick? Does the assistant already know your tools?

And a marketing assistant won’t fix an unclear offer or a product nobody wants. They make good marketing consistent. They don’t replace knowing who your customer is.


FAQ

How much should I pay a marketing virtual assistant per hour?

It depends on skills and where they’re based. Agency rates can start under $10 an hour, while experienced freelance marketing VAs on marketplaces often charge $20 to $35 or more.


Is a marketing VA cheaper than an agency?

Usually, for execution work like posting, scheduling, emails and reports. Agencies cost more but often include strategy and campaign management.


How many hours does a small business need?

Many start with 10 to 20 hours a month for social media and email, then add more. See how many hours of marketing help a small business needs.


Do I pay for tools separately?

Usually, yes. Most assistants work inside your accounts, so you pay for your own tools and ad spend.


Can I try before committing?

Some agencies offer trial hours. IncludeWork offers 5 free hours with no credit card.

Try it before you decide

Write down the marketing tasks you did last week and how long each took. That’s your real hour count.

Then test it. IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Hand over one task, like next week’s social posts, and judge the result. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Hire a Marketing Virtual Assistant (Step by Step)

How to Hire a Marketing Virtual Assistant (Step by Step)

Hiring a general assistant is mostly about reliability. Hiring a marketing assistant adds something harder to check: taste. Can they write a caption that sounds like you? Do they know a good post from a filler one? Will your customers notice the difference?

That’s why marketing VA hires often go wrong in a specific way. The person is organized and on time, but the posts feel generic, and you end up rewriting everything.

Here’s how to hire a marketing virtual assistant so that doesn’t happen, with a test that shows you what you’ll actually get.


How to hire a marketing virtual assistant, step 1: pick the channels

“Help with marketing” is too vague to hire for. Pick the channels and the outcomes:

Channel

Example of the work

What good looks like after 90 days

Instagram or Facebook

3 posts a week, replies to comments

Posts every week without you, replies within a day

Email

Monthly newsletter

Sent on time every month, opens steady or rising

Google Business Profile

Weekly post, review replies drafted

Profile active weekly, every review answered

Reporting

Monthly one-page report

You know what worked without logging into five tools

Start with two or three channels. But don’t try to cover everything at once. A marketing assistant spread across seven channels on 10 hours a week does none of them well.


Step 2: Write a one-page brand voice guide

This is the step that saves the most rewriting later. One page is enough:

  • Who your customers are, in a sentence

  • Three words for how you sound (for example: friendly, plain, confident)

  • Words and phrases you use, and ones you never use

  • Two or three past posts or emails you liked, and one you didn’t

  • Your rules: emojis or not, how you sign off, topics to avoid

Our guide to the one-page brand voice guide has a template.


Step 3: Choose how you’ll hire

  • Freelance marketplace: you choose one person and manage them yourself. More control, more vetting work.

  • VA agency: candidates are screened and trained, and someone checks the work. Less hiring work, less choice of individual.

  • Direct hire: best if you’ll need 30+ hours a week of steady work.

If cost is the deciding factor, see how much a marketing virtual assistant costs.


Step 4: Review real samples, not just a CV

Ask for:

  • Posts they’ve written or scheduled for real businesses

  • A newsletter they formatted or wrote

  • Examples of reports they’ve prepared

  • Which tools they’ve used day to day (Canva, Meta Business Suite, Mailchimp, a scheduler)

Look for work that sounds like different businesses. And be wary of polish alone. If every sample sounds the same, so will yours.


Step 5: Run a paid marketing test task

This is where you learn the most. Pay two or three finalists for one to two hours each, using the same brief. Keeping it the same for everyone is also fairer: the EEOC says employment tests should be job-related and applied consistently.

A sample brief:

“Using our brand voice guide and these five photos, write three Instagram captions and one short email announcing our spring offer. Then tell us which post you’d publish first, and why.”

Judge them on:

  • Voice: does it sound like you, or like a template?

  • Following the brief: did they use the photos and the offer correctly?

  • Thinking: is their “why” sensible?

  • Questions: did they ask anything smart before starting?

An example. Paolo runs a family-owned Italian deli in Philadelphia. Two finalists for a marketing VA role both had great reviews. On the test, one wrote polished but generic captions (“Indulge in authentic flavors!”). The other wrote, “Nonna’s lasagna is back on Thursdays. It sells out by 2pm, so come early.” Paolo hired the second, and barely edits her posts. (Paolo is an illustrative example.)


Step 6: Set up access safely

  • Add them as a user or staff member in each tool, rather than sharing your password

  • Share any passwords through a password manager

  • Give the lowest access level that still lets them do the work

  • Keep admin and billing access with you

And write down every account you gave them access to. When the work ends, you’ll know exactly what to remove.


Step 7: Plan the first 30 days

  1. Week 1: one channel only. You approve everything before it goes out.

  2. Week 2: add a second channel. Keep approving.

  3. Week 3: approve in batches, once or twice a week.

  4. Week 4: first short report and a 20-minute review: what’s working, what’s next.

Our full onboarding plan for a marketing VA covers the first 14 days in detail.


Where marketing VA hires go wrong

  • No brand voice guide, so the assistant guesses

  • Too many channels at once

  • Judging on a CV instead of a test

  • No approval process, so either everything waits on you or nothing does

  • Expecting strategy from an execution role. A marketing assistant carries out the plan. You, or a strategist, still set it.


FAQ

What should I look for in a marketing virtual assistant?

Writing that can match your voice, comfort with your tools, reliability, and good judgment about what to post. A paid test task shows all four.


How long does it take to hire a marketing VA?

Through a marketplace, usually one to three weeks. Through an agency, often a few days, since screening is already done.


Should my marketing assistant create content or just schedule it?

It depends on their skills and your budget. Many small businesses have the assistant draft captions and emails from the owner’s notes, with the owner approving.


Do I need to give them my passwords?

No. Add them as users in each tool, and share any shared logins through a password manager.


Can one assistant handle social media, email and SEO?

Some can, but start with two or three channels and add more once those run smoothly.


Skip most of the hiring work

If steps 3 to 5 feel like more than you have time for, an agency can shortlist and test for you. IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Send them your brand voice guide and a test brief, and judge the work. Every IncludeWork assistant signs an NDA before they start. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Generalist VA or Specialist Marketing Virtual Assistant?

Generalist VA or Specialist Marketing Virtual Assistant?


Many owners hire a general virtual assistant for email and scheduling, then add “and maybe some social media” to the list. Sometimes that works well. Often the marketing ends up as the task that always gets pushed to Friday.

The other option is a specialist marketing virtual assistant, someone whose whole week is posts, emails, graphics and listings. Here’s how the two compare, and how to choose.


The difference in a sentence

A generalist VA handles a wide range of admin tasks, with marketing as one of many. A specialist marketing virtual assistant focuses on marketing work and usually has deeper skills and samples in it.


Side by side


Generalist VA

Specialist marketing VA

Typical work

Inbox, calendar, data entry, customer service, some posting

Social media, email marketing, graphics, listings, reporting

Marketing skills

Basic: scheduling, simple posts

Stronger: writing in your voice, design, tools, simple analysis

Best when

Marketing is a small part of the job

Marketing is a main part of the job

Risk

Marketing gets pushed aside by urgent admin

Admin tasks fall back to you


When a generalist VA makes sense

  • Your marketing needs are light: a few posts a week, maybe a monthly email

  • You need more help with admin than with marketing

  • You already create the content, and just need it scheduled

  • Your budget allows only one assistant

The trick is protecting the marketing time. Agree on fixed hours each week for marketing, so urgent emails and calls don’t eat it.


When a specialist marketing virtual assistant makes sense

  • Marketing is how you win most new customers

  • You want someone to create content, not just post yours

  • You’re running two or more channels plus email

  • You want reports that tell you what’s working

  • Your past attempts with a general VA kept stalling

A specialist also brings ideas from other businesses they’ve supported. And they’re usually quicker with marketing tools, so the same hours produce more.


A third option: split the work

Some businesses use both:

  • A generalist VA for inbox, scheduling and customer service

  • A specialist marketing VA for a set number of hours each week

This keeps each person on work they’re good at. It also stops the marketing from being the first thing to slip when the inbox gets busy.


How to decide

Ask yourself three questions:

  1. What share of the work is marketing? More than half points to a specialist.

  2. Who creates the content now? If it’s you, and you want that to stop, go specialist.

  3. What happened last time? If marketing kept slipping with a general VA, a specialist or protected hours will fix it.

The U.S. Small Business Administration recommends that a marketing plan set clear goals, a budget and a way to measure return. Whichever assistant you choose, give them those three things.

An example. Arjun runs a small IT consultancy in Seattle that wins clients through LinkedIn and referrals. His general VA handled his inbox well, but LinkedIn posts went out once a month at best. He kept the general VA for admin and added a specialist marketing VA for eight hours a week to draft LinkedIn posts from his notes and send a monthly client newsletter. Posting went from monthly to three times a week. (Arjun is an illustrative example.)


What to check with either type

  • Samples of real marketing work from real businesses

  • A paid test task using your own brief

  • Tool experience in the platforms you use

  • How they handle approvals and feedback

For a fuller hiring guide, see how to hire a marketing virtual assistant. And for the skills to look for, see marketing virtual assistant skills.


The risk with either choice

Pick a generalist and the marketing may keep sliding behind urgent admin. Pick a specialist and the admin comes back to your desk, unless someone else covers it.

And neither type replaces a strategy. Both need you, or a strategist, to say what matters most this quarter.


FAQ

What’s the difference between a VA and a marketing VA?

A general VA handles a mix of admin tasks. A marketing VA focuses on marketing work like social media, email and listings.


Can a general virtual assistant do marketing?

Yes, for simple work like scheduling posts. For writing, design and reporting, a specialist is usually stronger.


Is a specialist marketing virtual assistant more expensive?

Sometimes, depending on the provider and skills. Compare what each produces in the same hours, not just the hourly rate.


Should I hire one VA for everything?

If your needs are light, one VA with protected marketing hours can work. Heavier marketing needs usually justify a specialist.


Can I start with a generalist and switch later?

Yes. Many businesses add a specialist once marketing becomes a bigger part of growth.


Try a specialist

IncludeWork offers both general and marketing virtual assistants. See how a specialist handles your marketing with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. IncludeWork has been running remote assistant teams since 2012. Start your free hours.




Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Marketing Assistant Job Description: Template and Examples

Marketing Assistant Job Description: Template and Examples

A vague job post brings in vague candidates. “Looking for a creative marketing assistant to help grow our brand” gets you hundreds of replies and no easy way to tell them apart.

A clear marketing assistant job description does the opposite. It tells the right people exactly what the work is. And it quietly puts off the wrong ones. Below is a template you can copy, examples for three kinds of business, and tips for making it your own.


What a good marketing assistant job description includes

  • A plain job title people actually search for

  • Two or three sentences about your business and customers

  • The channels and tasks, specific enough to picture the week

  • The hours and schedule, including any overlap you need

  • The tools they’ll use

  • The skills that matter, separated into must-haves and nice-to-haves

  • How you’ll hire, including a paid test task


The marketing assistant job description template

Copy this and fill in the brackets.

Marketing Assistant (Part-Time, Remote)

About us: [Business name] is a [type of business] in [location or “online”], serving [type of customers]. We’re known for [one thing customers love].

The role: You’ll keep our marketing running every week, working with the owner, who sets the plan and approves the work.

What you’ll do:

  • Create and schedule [number] posts a week on [platforms]

  • Reply to routine comments and messages using our approved answers

  • Design graphics in Canva using our brand kit

  • Format and send our monthly email newsletter in [email tool]

  • Post weekly updates on our Google Business Profile and draft review replies

  • Keep our content calendar up to date

  • Prepare a short monthly report on what worked

Hours: [number] hours a week, with at least [number] hours overlapping [time zone] business hours.

Tools: Canva, [social media tools], [email tool], Google Business Profile, [website platform].

You’ll be great at this if you:

  • Write clear, friendly copy and can match a brand’s voice

  • Are organized and meet deadlines without reminders

  • Have used social media and email tools for a business

  • Ask questions instead of guessing

Nice to have: short video editing, basic SEO, experience in [industry].

How to apply: Send two or three examples of posts or emails you created for a business, and tell us which one you’re proudest of and why. Shortlisted candidates will complete a paid 1–2 hour test task.


Examples by business type

Local service business (cleaning, trades, salon)

Focus duties on Facebook, Google Business Profile, review requests and before-and-after photos. Mention seasonal promotions.


Online store

Focus on Instagram, product photos, email campaigns for new arrivals and sales, and simple performance tracking.


B2B or professional services

Focus on LinkedIn posts from the owner’s ideas, a monthly newsletter, case study formatting and website updates.

An example. Hildegard runs a tutoring center in Salt Lake City. Her first job post said “help with social media and marketing” and drew 140 applications, mostly generic. She rewrote it using a template like the one above: three Facebook posts a week, a monthly parent newsletter, Google review requests after each term and 12 hours a week. Fewer people applied. But most shortlisted candidates fit the role. (Hildegard is an illustrative example.)


Tips for adapting the template

  • Be specific about volume. “Three posts a week on Instagram and Facebook” beats “manage social media”.

  • Say who approves the work. It tells candidates the role is execution, not strategy.

  • List real tools. Candidates can then tell you which ones they already know.

  • Keep it fair and job-related. The EEOC’s guidance on prohibited practices says information about race, sex, national origin, age and religion is irrelevant to whether someone is qualified. Stick to skills and duties.

  • Don’t inflate the title. “Marketing Manager” for an assistant role attracts the wrong people and sets the wrong expectations.


What the job description shouldn’t promise

Avoid promising things the role can’t deliver, like “grow our followers by 10,000” or “own our marketing strategy”. If you want strategy, you need a different role. See marketing assistant vs marketing manager.


A job post won’t do the screening for you

Even a clear job description brings in people who don’t fit. Plan for a few hours to read applications, a short call with the best five or six, and a paid test for two or three finalists.

If that’s more time than you have, it’s a fair reason to use an agency that screens for you.


FAQ

What should a marketing assistant job description include?

A clear title, a short business intro, specific tasks and channels, hours, tools, must-have skills and how you’ll hire.


What are a marketing assistant’s typical duties?

Creating and scheduling social posts, sending newsletters, making graphics, updating listings, replying to routine messages and reporting.


Should I include pay in the job description?

Many candidates look for it, and some U.S. states and cities require pay ranges in job posts. Check the rules where you hire.


How long should a marketing assistant job description be?

One page is enough. Clear and specific matters more than long.


Can I use this template for a virtual assistant?

Yes. Add the hours of overlap you need and your preferred way of communicating.

Skip the job post

If writing the post, screening applicants and running tests sounds like too much, an agency can do it for you. IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants are screened and trained already. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Work is checked by IncludeWork’s quality-control team before it reaches you. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Delegate Marketing Tasks: 12 Jobs to Stop Doing Yourself

Delegate Marketing Tasks: 12 Jobs to Stop Doing Yourself

You started a business to cook, build, teach, fix or sell. Not to spend Sunday evenings resizing images and hunting for the right hashtag.

Most owners know they should delegate marketing tasks. The hard part is deciding which ones. This guide lists 12 jobs you can hand over now, the few you should keep, and a 15-minute audit to find where your marketing hours actually go.


First, find your hidden marketing hours

For one week, write down every marketing task you do and how long it takes. Include the small ones: replying to a comment, editing a photo, checking how a post did.

Most owners are surprised. A few minutes here and there often add up to several hours a week. But the total matters less than the pattern: which tasks repeat every week?

Repeated tasks are the easiest to delegate.


Delegate marketing tasks like these 12 first

Social media

  1. Scheduling posts. Once the content is approved, scheduling is pure admin.

  2. Making graphics. With a brand kit and templates, an assistant can produce clean, on-brand designs.

  3. Writing first drafts of captions. Send a voice note or bullet points and approve the draft.

  4. Answering routine comments and messages. Opening hours, prices, “do you deliver?” all have standard answers.


Email

  1. Formatting the newsletter. Building the email in your platform takes time and no special knowledge of your business.

  2. List cleanup. Removing bounces, tagging subscribers, adding new sign-ups.


Local search and reviews

  1. Google Business Profile posts and updates. Weekly posts, new photos, holiday hours.

  2. Drafting review replies. Google lets owners and managers reply to reviews once the profile is verified. Your assistant can draft replies, and you approve the tricky ones.

  3. Asking happy customers for reviews. A simple follow-up message after each job or order.


Website and reporting

  1. Small website updates. Prices, menus, team photos, broken links.

  2. Uploading blog posts. Formatting, images, alt text and internal links.

  3. Monthly reporting. Pulling numbers from different platforms into one page.

For a longer list, see 35 marketing tasks to outsource.


What to keep doing yourself

When you delegate marketing tasks, keep the few that need you:

  • Deciding the plan: who you’re trying to reach and with what offer

  • Being the face and voice: videos, stories, community events

  • Approving anything public that matters: offers, prices, announcements

  • Handling complaints and sensitive replies

  • Building relationships: partners, referrers, local media

These are the jobs where your time has the most value. Everything else is a candidate for handing over.


How to delegate without losing quality

  1. Start with three tasks, not twelve

  2. Write a short brief for each: what, where, how often, an example

  3. Record yourself doing it once with a quick screen recording

  4. Approve everything for the first few weeks

  5. Move tasks to “no approval needed” as trust builds

And give feedback that’s specific. “Shorter, and mention the Saturday hours” helps. “Not quite right” doesn’t.

An example. Celeste runs an event floristry business in Nashville. Her one-week audit showed she spent about six hours on marketing, mostly on editing photos and writing Instagram captions late at night. She handed over captions, graphics and scheduling first, then review requests a month later. She still films short videos of her arrangements, because clients want to see her. But her evenings are hers again. (Celeste is an illustrative example.)


The real cost of doing it all yourself

Every hour you spend formatting a newsletter is an hour you’re not spending with customers, on sales or on rest. Ask yourself: what would you do with five extra hours a week?

If the answer is “more of the work that makes money”, delegating your marketing pays for itself in time, even before it shows up in sales.


FAQ

Which marketing tasks should I delegate first?

Repeated, time-consuming tasks that are easy to check: scheduling posts, making graphics and formatting your newsletter.


What marketing tasks should owners keep?

Strategy, offers, final approvals, sensitive replies and anything where customers want to see you personally.


How do I delegate marketing tasks without losing my voice?

Share a one-page brand voice guide, give specific feedback, and approve everything for the first few weeks.


How many hours of marketing can I delegate?

That depends on your audit. Many owners find several hours a week of repeated tasks they can hand over.


Who should I delegate marketing to?

A marketing virtual assistant suits steady weekly work. Strategy or specialist campaigns may need an agency or consultant.

Hand over your first three tasks

Pick three tasks from your audit and write a short brief for each. IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can start this week with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. And if the fit isn’t right, IncludeWork replaces your assistant at no extra cost. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Part-Time Marketing Assistant: What 10 Hours a Week Covers

Part-Time Marketing Assistant: What 10 Hours a Week Covers

Ten hours a week sounds small. It’s about two hours a day, or one long Tuesday and a short Friday.

But for many small businesses, a part-time marketing assistant on 10 hours a week is enough to go from “we post when we remember” to steady, consistent marketing. The trick is choosing what goes into those hours. Here’s a realistic plan.


What 10 hours a week can cover

A focused plan for a local or small online business:

Task

Hours per week

Social media: 3 posts a week on 2 platforms, created and scheduled

3

Replies to comments, messages and reviews

2

Google Business Profile post and listing updates

1

Newsletter (monthly, spread across the weeks)

1.5

Content calendar, approvals and planning

1

Simple tracking and a short weekly note

1

Buffer for small fixes and requests

0.5

Total

10

These are rough estimates. Your assistant’s real hours depend on how much raw material you provide and how many edits each draft needs.


What doesn’t fit in 10 hours

Be realistic. A part-time marketing assistant on 10 hours can’t also do:

  • Daily posting on four or five platforms

  • Weekly blog posts plus SEO work

  • Video production beyond simple edits

  • Running and optimizing paid ads

  • A full website rebuild

If you need several of these, plan for 20 hours or more, or add a specialist for the bigger projects.


How to make 10 hours go further

Give them raw material

The biggest time cost is starting from nothing. Send photos, voice notes and quick bullet points. Your assistant turns them into posts and emails instead of inventing ideas.


Batch the work

Creating a week’s posts in one sitting is faster than one post a day. Ask for batched drafts and approve them in one go.


Use templates

A Canva brand kit and a few saved post designs save hours each month. So does a newsletter template.


Cut the platforms

Two platforms done well beat four done badly. Pick the ones your customers actually use.


Keep approvals quick

Every day a draft waits for you, the plan slips. Set one approval time each week and stick to it.


What a part-time marketing assistant costs

Ten hours a week is roughly 40 to 43 hours a month. At IncludeWork, the Professional plan is 40 hours for $250 a month, about $6.25 an hour, with a project manager and quality checks included. Pay-as-you-go is $8 an hour. See current pricing.

Add tool costs on top. Many tools have free plans to start. For a full breakdown, see how much a marketing virtual assistant costs.


Set a goal for the 10 hours

Hours alone don’t tell you much. The U.S. Small Business Administration suggests that a marketing plan should have clear goals and a way to measure return. For a 10-hour assistant, simple goals work best:

  • Post every week, without gaps, for three months

  • Answer every review within two days

  • Send the newsletter on the same day each month

  • Track inquiries from each channel

An example. Hamid runs an independent auto repair shop in Houston. His marketing VA works 10 hours a week, mostly on Tuesdays and Fridays. She posts three times a week on Facebook and Instagram, answers reviews within a day and sends a monthly email with a seasonal maintenance reminder. Hamid sends photos from the shop floor and spends about 20 minutes a week approving drafts. But he chose to skip TikTok and the blog for now, to keep the hours focused. (Hamid is an illustrative example.)


When to add more hours

Consider more hours when:

  • The first two channels run smoothly without much editing

  • You have a clear next channel or project in mind

  • Your assistant keeps running out of time for planned work

For a step-by-step approach, see how many hours of marketing help a small business needs.


FAQ

Is 10 hours a week enough for a marketing assistant?

For two channels, a newsletter and review replies, it often is. Bigger plans need more hours.


How should a part-time marketing assistant split their hours?

Most of the time goes to creating and scheduling content, with smaller blocks for replies, listings, the newsletter and reporting.


Can a part-time assistant handle paid ads too?

Not well, on top of everything else in 10 hours. Ads usually need separate time or a specialist.


What days should a part-time marketing assistant work?

Many work two or three set days, with a short daily check for comments and messages.


How much does a 10-hour-a-week marketing VA cost?

It depends on the provider. At IncludeWork, 40 hours a month is $250 on the Professional plan.

Try 10 hours’ worth of work

A part-time marketing assistant is a low-risk way to make your marketing steady. IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can start on your first week of tasks with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Marketing Virtual Assistant Skills: What to Look For

Marketing Virtual Assistant Skills: What to Look For

Every marketing VA profile lists the same things: “creative”, “detail-oriented”, “social media expert”. That doesn’t help you choose.

What helps is knowing which marketing virtual assistant skills actually matter for a small business, and how to check each one before you hire. Some skills you can teach in a week. Others are hard to teach at all. This guide shows you which is which.


The core marketing virtual assistant skills

1. Writing that can match your voice

This is the most important skill, and the hardest to fake. A good marketing VA can write a caption that sounds like you, not like a template. Look for clear, short sentences and the ability to change tone between businesses.

How to test it: give them your brand voice guide and ask for three captions. Do they sound like you?


2. Judgment

Knowing what not to post. Knowing when to reply and when to flag something. Knowing that a joke that works on Instagram may not work in an email. Judgment saves you more trouble than any technical skill. And it shows up fast in a simple scenario question.

How to test it: ask, “A customer posts an angry comment about a late delivery. What do you do?”


3. Basic design

Not a professional designer, but able to make clean, on-brand graphics from templates, resize images and keep things consistent.

How to test it: ask for one post graphic in Canva using your colors and logo.


4. Organization

Marketing is a lot of small moving pieces: calendars, drafts, approvals, deadlines. A good VA keeps them in order without reminders.

How to test it: ask how they’d organize a month of content for two platforms. Look for a clear system, not “I just remember”.


5. Tool comfort

They don’t need to know every tool, but they should pick up new ones quickly. Common ones include Canva, Meta Business Suite, an email platform like Mailchimp, Google Business Profile and a website editor.

How to test it: ask which tools they’ve used day to day, and what they did in each.


6. Reading the numbers

The Bureau of Labor Statistics lists analytical skills, communication, critical thinking and attention to detail as important qualities for marketing specialists. A marketing VA needs a lighter version: pulling simple numbers and saying what they mean.

How to test it: show them a screenshot of last month’s post results and ask, “What would you do more of?”


7. Reliability and communication

Showing up, meeting deadlines, saying early when something’s late, and asking questions instead of guessing.

How to test it: notice how they communicate during hiring. Late replies and missed details now usually mean the same later.


Skills you can teach (and ones you can’t)

Easy to teach

Hard to teach

Your specific tools

Writing well

Your brand voice rules

Judgment

Your approval process

Reliability

Your posting schedule

Curiosity

Your reporting format

Taking ownership

Hire for the right column. Train the left.


Nice-to-have skills

Depending on your plans, these are worth paying for:

  • Short video editing for Reels and TikTok

  • Email automation setup, like welcome series

  • Basic SEO: page titles, meta descriptions, alt text

  • Copywriting for ads

  • Experience in your industry, especially if it’s regulated

But don’t pay extra for skills you won’t use in the next three months.

An example. Ingrid owns a bridal boutique in Milwaukee. She interviewed two marketing VAs. One listed 14 tools and had strong design samples. The other listed six tools, but her test captions sounded like Ingrid, and she asked smart questions about which dresses brides asked about most. Ingrid hired the second and taught her the two tools she didn’t know in an afternoon. (Ingrid is an illustrative example.)


How to check skills during hiring

  1. Review real samples from real businesses

  2. Ask scenario questions to check judgment

  3. Run a short paid test using your own brief

  4. Check how they communicate throughout

For the full process, see how to hire a marketing virtual assistant.


The catch: skills on paper aren’t the same as fit

A candidate can tick every box above and still not suit your business. They may not know your industry, your customers or your way of talking. And even a skilled assistant needs direction; they won’t set your strategy.

That’s why the paid test matters more than the CV. It shows how their skills work on your brief.


FAQ

What skills does a marketing virtual assistant need?

Writing that matches your voice, good judgment, basic design, organization, tool comfort, simple analysis and reliable communication.


Does a marketing VA need a marketing degree?

Not necessarily. Samples and a test task tell you more than a degree for most small business work.


Which tools should a marketing VA know?

Canva, a social media scheduler, an email platform, Google Business Profile and your website editor cover most small business needs.


Can I train a VA in skills they don’t have?

Tools and processes, yes. Writing, judgment and reliability are much harder to teach.


Should a marketing VA know SEO?

Basic SEO is useful. For strategy or technical SEO, use a specialist.

Skip the skill-checking

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants are screened and trained before they start. Test their skills on your own brief with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Every IncludeWork assistant signs an NDA before they start. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Marketing Assistant Responsibilities: What Needs Approval

Marketing Assistant Responsibilities: What Needs Approval

Handing over your marketing is a relief. Until a post goes out with the wrong price, or someone replies to an angry customer in a way you’d never have chosen.

Most of those problems come from unclear marketing assistant responsibilities, not bad assistants. Nobody said where the line was. This guide draws that line: 10 things a marketing VA should never do without your approval, and a simple list you can share on day one.


Why approval rules protect both of you

Clear rules aren’t about distrust. They help your assistant work faster, because they know exactly what they can do alone. And they protect you from the few mistakes that are hard to undo: public posts, money and legal promises.


10 things that always need your approval

1. Changing prices, offers or discounts

Any post, email or ad that mentions a price, sale or discount should be checked by you. A wrong number in public can turn into a promise you have to honor.


2. Making claims about results

“Guaranteed”, “best in town”, “doubles your sales”, “cures”, “approved by”. Claims like these can create legal problems, especially in health, finance and legal services. Your assistant should flag them, not publish them.


3. Replying to angry customers or bad reviews

Routine thank-yous are fine. But a reply to a complaint, a one-star review or a public argument needs your eyes first.


4. Spending money

New tools, boosted posts, ad budget changes, stock photos with a fee, giveaways. Agree on a spending limit, even if it’s zero.


5. Asking for or handling reviews in a risky way

Asking real customers for honest reviews is fine. Writing reviews, offering rewards only for positive reviews, or having staff post reviews without saying who they are is not. The FTC’s rule on fake reviews bans fake reviews, buying positive ones and undisclosed insider reviews.


6. Working with influencers or partners

Any deal with an influencer, partner or another business needs your approval. So does the disclosure. The FTC’s endorsement guidance says material connections, like free products or payment, should be clearly disclosed.


7. Commenting on news, politics or sensitive events

Even a well-meant post can land badly. Agree in advance that anything touching news, politics, tragedies or social issues waits for you.


8. Changing account settings or ownership

Your assistant shouldn’t change passwords, remove users, add new admins or change billing details. Keep owner and billing access yourself.


9. Using images, music or content you don’t own

Customer photos need permission. Music in videos needs the right license. Content from other websites can’t be copied. When in doubt, ask.


10. Launching anything new

A new channel, a new campaign, a new newsletter section or a contest. New things go through you first, so you can check they fit the plan.


Marketing assistant responsibilities they can own

Here’s the other side. Once your assistant knows your voice, these can usually happen without approval:

  • Scheduling posts from an approved calendar

  • Replying to routine comments with approved answers

  • Thanking customers for positive reviews

  • Updating opening hours and photos

  • Fixing typos and broken links

  • Preparing reports and drafts

Moving tasks into this list over time is how you get your hours back. See how to onboard a marketing virtual assistant for a 14-day plan.


The approval list to share on day one

Category

Needs approval

Assistant can do alone

Social posts

Offers, prices, announcements, anything new

Approved calendar posts, routine updates

Comments and messages

Complaints, refunds, press, sensitive topics

Thanks, simple questions with approved answers

Reviews

Replies to 1–3 star reviews

Thank-you replies to positive reviews

Email

Every send for the first 3 months

Fixing typos, list cleanup

Money

Any spending

Nothing

Accounts

Any settings or user changes

Nothing

An example. Declan runs a small craft brewery in Boston. His marketing VA once scheduled a “2-for-1 pints” post that Declan had only mentioned as an idea. The post went out on a Friday, and the taproom honored it all weekend. After that, they wrote a one-page approval list. Anything with a price now waits for Declan’s thumbs-up. Everything else runs on schedule. (Declan is an illustrative example.)


The trade-off: control or speed

Every rule on the approval list slows things down a little. If everything needs your OK, posts wait for you and the assistant sits idle. If nothing does, mistakes go public.

So treat the list as something that changes. Start strict, then move tasks across as your assistant proves they’ve got your voice and judgment. Most owners loosen up within the first two months.


FAQ

What are a marketing assistant’s main responsibilities?

Creating and scheduling content, managing routine replies, sending newsletters, updating listings and reporting on results, within the rules you set.


Should I approve every post my VA makes?

For the first few weeks, yes. After that, many owners approve only offers, announcements and sensitive posts.


Can my marketing assistant reply to negative reviews?

They can draft the reply. You should approve it before it’s posted.


How do I set a spending limit for my VA?

Agree on a monthly amount in writing, even if it’s zero, and ask them to get approval for anything above it.


What if my assistant makes a mistake?

Fix it quickly, explain what went wrong and update the approval list so it doesn’t happen again.

Clear rules, faster work

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants work within approval rules you set, and the Professional plan adds a project manager and quality checks. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Marketing Assistant vs Marketing Manager: Who You Need

Marketing Assistant vs Marketing Manager: Who You Need

When marketing becomes too much to handle alone, most owners picture hiring a “marketing person”. But that person could be two very different roles.

In the marketing assistant vs marketing manager decision, one role does the work and the other decides what work to do. Hiring the wrong one first is an expensive mistake. Here’s how to tell which you need.


The difference in one table


Marketing assistant

Marketing manager

Main focus

Doing: posting, emails, graphics, listings, reports

Deciding: strategy, budget, campaigns, goals

Who sets direction

You or a manager

They do, with you

Typical experience

Entry to mid level

Several years, often leading people

Cost

Lower; can be part-time or virtual

A senior salary

Success looks like

Work done well, on time, every week

Growth in leads, sales or market share


What a marketing manager does

A marketing manager owns the plan. According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, marketing managers estimate demand, identify potential markets and help set pricing strategy, working with sales and product teams. In a small business, that usually means:

  • Choosing which customers and channels to focus on

  • Setting the budget and goals

  • Planning campaigns and launches

  • Managing agencies, freelancers or assistants

  • Reporting results to the owner

The same BLS page puts the median pay for marketing managers at $166,790 a year (May 2025). That’s before benefits.


What a marketing assistant does

A marketing assistant carries out the plan, week after week:

  • Writing and scheduling social posts

  • Formatting and sending newsletters

  • Creating graphics from templates

  • Updating listings, reviews and website content

  • Preparing simple reports

You can hire one part-time, full-time or as a virtual assistant. For comparison, BLS puts median pay for marketing specialists, a broader and more senior category, at $78,760 a year. A virtual marketing assistant through an agency costs much less, from $5 to $8 an hour at IncludeWork depending on plan.


Marketing assistant vs marketing manager: how to decide

Answer these questions:

1. Do you know what marketing works for your business?

If you can name the two or three channels that bring in customers, you probably need execution help. That’s an assistant.

2. Is your problem time, or direction?

If you know what to do but never get to it, hire an assistant. If you don’t know what to do, an assistant won’t fix that.

3. Who will manage the person?

A marketing assistant needs someone to set priorities and approve work. If you can give that an hour or two a week, you’re fine. If you can’t, you need a manager, or a part-time strategist.

4. What’s your budget?

For most small businesses, a full-time marketing manager is a big fixed cost. An assistant is easier to start small and scale.


The middle path many small businesses use

You don’t have to choose one or the other forever. A common lean setup:

  • A part-time or fractional strategist sets the plan a few hours a month

  • A marketing assistant carries it out every week

  • You approve and stay the voice of the brand

This gives you direction without a senior salary. And when the business grows, the assistant often becomes the first member of a bigger team.

An example. Dagny runs an online yoga apparel brand from San Diego. She nearly hired a full-time marketing manager. Then she listed her actual problem: she knew Instagram and email drove her sales, but she posted twice a month and emailed twice a year. She hired a marketing assistant for 20 hours a week and booked a strategist for a half-day planning session each quarter. The posting and emails went from occasional to weekly. (Dagny is an illustrative example.)


Signs you need a manager instead

  • Sales are flat and you don’t know why

  • You’re spending on ads and can’t tell what’s working

  • You need someone to lead a team of three or more

  • You’re entering a new market or launching a new product line

In these cases, a manager or strategist comes first. But an assistant can still help them get more done.


FAQ

Should my first marketing hire be an assistant or a manager?

If you know what works and lack time, start with an assistant. If you don’t know where customers come from, get strategy help first.


Can a marketing assistant grow into a manager?

Sometimes, with time, training and experience running campaigns. Don’t expect it in the first year.


How much does a marketing manager cost compared with an assistant?

BLS puts median pay for marketing managers at $166,790 a year. A virtual marketing assistant can cost a fraction of that, depending on hours.


Can I be my own marketing manager?

Many owners are. If you set the plan and approve the work, an assistant can handle the rest.


What’s a fractional marketing manager?

A senior marketer who works part-time for several businesses, usually a set number of hours or days each month.

Start with the doing

If your plan is clear but the work keeps slipping, you need hands, not another strategy. IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can take over the weekly work. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. IncludeWork has been running remote assistant teams since 2012. Start your free hours.

For more on agencies, see marketing virtual assistant vs agency.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
35 Marketing Tasks to Outsource to a Virtual Assistant

35 Marketing Tasks to Outsource to a Virtual Assistant

Most small business owners don’t have a marketing problem. They have a marketing time problem. The posts, emails and review replies all matter, but they pile up behind customer work.

The good news: most of that work follows a pattern, so it can be handed off. Below are 35 marketing tasks to outsource to a virtual assistant, grouped by channel. Pick five to start, not 35.


Marketing tasks to outsource: social media (1–9)

  1. Scheduling posts from your content plan in a tool like Meta Business Suite or a scheduler

  2. Writing captions from your notes or voice memos, for your approval

  3. Making simple graphics from your templates in Canva

  4. Resizing one image for each platform

  5. Replying to routine comments using your approved answers

  6. Sorting direct messages, answering the simple ones and flagging the rest

  7. Finding and saving customer posts you might reshare (with permission)

  8. Building a monthly content calendar from your offers and events

  9. Tracking hashtags and local accounts worth following or engaging with


Email marketing (10–16)

  1. Formatting and scheduling your newsletter

  2. Writing a first draft of the newsletter from your bullet points

  3. Setting up a simple welcome series for new subscribers

  4. Cleaning your list: removing bounces and duplicates

  5. Tagging subscribers by interest or customer type

  6. Checking every email for broken links and typos before it goes out

  7. Making sure each email has an unsubscribe link and your address, as U.S. anti-spam rules require


Local search and reviews (17–23)

  1. Posting weekly updates on your Google Business Profile

  2. Keeping your hours, photos and services up to date across listings

  3. Drafting replies to reviews, good and bad, for you to approve

  4. Sending review requests to happy customers after a job

  5. Checking your business details match on Yelp, Facebook, Apple Maps and directories

  6. Uploading new photos of your work, team or premises

  7. Answering common questions in your listings’ Q&A sections


Content and website (24–29)

  1. Turning one blog post into several social posts

  2. Formatting and uploading blog posts to your website

  3. Adding alt text and meta descriptions to pages and images

  4. Updating prices, menus or service pages

  5. Basic keyword research for your next few articles

  6. Checking for broken links on your site each month


Research and reporting (30–35)

  1. Pulling monthly numbers from social, email and Google into one report

  2. Tracking what competitors post and promote

  3. Collecting customer testimonials into one folder, with permission

  4. Researching local events or partners worth working with

  5. Keeping a swipe file of marketing ideas you like

  6. Logging which posts and emails brought in inquiries

For more on how this work fits into a week, see what a marketing virtual assistant is.


Marketing tasks to keep yourself

Some marketing tasks to outsource are obvious. Some you should hold on to:

  • Deciding your offers and prices

  • Setting the strategy: which channels, which customers, which goals

  • Final approval on anything public, at least for the first month

  • Responding to angry customers or anything sensitive

  • Being the face of the business in videos, interviews and community events

Your assistant can prepare all of these. But the decision stays with you.


How to hand over a task in 15 minutes

For each task, write a short brief:

  1. What it is and why it matters

  2. Where it happens (which tool, which account)

  3. One example of it done well

  4. How often and by when

  5. What needs your approval before it goes live

Record a quick screen video the first time you do the task yourself. And save every brief in one shared folder so the process doesn’t live in one person’s head.


Start with these five

If you’re not sure where to begin, these give most owners the fastest relief:

  1. Scheduling social posts (#1)

  2. Drafting review replies (#19)

  3. Formatting the newsletter (#10)

  4. Weekly Google Business Profile posts (#17)

  5. A monthly one-page report (#30)

An example. Tamsin runs a mobile dog grooming business in Tampa. She listed every marketing task she did in a week and found 7 hours of it: posting, replying, updating her Google listing and chasing reviews. She handed over the first five tasks above. Within a month, her weekly marketing time was about an hour, mostly approving drafts on her phone between appointments. (Tamsin is an illustrative example.)


A word of caution

Handing over tasks doesn’t hand over your judgment. Some things need extra care:

  • Reviews: the FTC’s rule on fake reviews bans fake and undisclosed insider reviews. Your assistant should never write reviews, and should only ask real customers.

  • Access: add your assistant as a user in each tool instead of sharing passwords.

  • Claims: anything about results, prices or guarantees should be checked by you before it goes out.


FAQ

What marketing tasks can a virtual assistant do?

Most repeatable work: scheduling posts, writing drafts, formatting newsletters, updating listings, drafting review replies and preparing reports.


Which marketing tasks should I outsource first?

The ones that are repetitive, time-consuming and easy to check, like scheduling posts or formatting emails.


Can a virtual assistant write my content?

Many can draft it from your notes. You review and approve, especially in the first few weeks.


How many hours a week do these tasks take?

It depends on your channels and volume. List what you do for one week and time it before you decide on hours.


Is it safe to give a VA access to my social accounts?

Yes, when you add them as a user with limited permissions rather than sharing your password.

Hand over your first five

Pick five tasks from this list and write a short brief for each. IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can start on them with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Work is checked by IncludeWork’s quality-control team before it reaches you. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
What Does a Marketing Assistant Do Day to Day?

What Does a Marketing Assistant Do Day to Day?

Job titles don’t tell you much. “Marketing assistant” can mean someone who only schedules posts, or someone who keeps your whole marketing engine running while you serve customers.

So what does a marketing assistant do, hour by hour? Below is a realistic picture of a typical day and week for an assistant supporting a small business, plus the tools they work in and how you’ll know the work is paying off.


What does a marketing assistant do in a typical day?

Here’s a sample day for an assistant working four hours for one small business:

Time

Task

First 30 minutes

Check messages, comments and reviews; reply to routine ones and flag the rest

Next hour

Create this week’s posts: captions from your notes, graphics in Canva

Next hour

Work on the bigger project of the week: newsletter, blog upload or listing updates

Next 45 minutes

Schedule approved content and update the content calendar

Last 45 minutes

Log results, update the tracking sheet and send you a short end-of-day note

Not every day looks the same. But most days mix three kinds of work: responding, creating and organizing.


A typical week

Most marketing assistants work in a weekly rhythm:

  • Monday: plan the week, schedule posts, catch up on weekend comments

  • Tuesday and Wednesday: create content: captions, graphics, short videos, email drafts

  • Wednesday: send drafts to you for approval in one batch

  • Thursday: listings, reviews, website updates, community engagement

  • Friday: numbers and notes: what worked, what didn’t, ideas for next week

Over a month, they’ll also handle the newsletter, a monthly report and a content calendar for the month ahead.


The tools they work in

A marketing assistant spends most of the day inside your tools. Common ones include:

  • Design: Canva, with your brand kit

  • Social media: Meta Business Suite, LinkedIn, a scheduler like Buffer or Later

  • Email: Mailchimp, Klaviyo, Constant Contact or similar

  • Local search: Google Business Profile

  • Website: WordPress, Squarespace, Wix or Shopify

  • Tracking: Google Analytics, Google Search Console, a shared spreadsheet

  • Organizing: Trello, Asana or a shared calendar

They should be added as a user in each tool, not given your password. And a good assistant will tell you when two tools overlap and you’re paying for both.


How it compares with an in-house marketing role

The U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics describes market research analysts and marketing specialists as people who monitor trends, measure how well marketing works and turn data into reports. A small business marketing assistant does a lighter, more hands-on version of that: less formal research, more posting, emailing and updating.

For a deeper explanation of the role, see what a marketing virtual assistant is.


What they don’t do

A marketing assistant usually doesn’t:

  • Set your marketing strategy or budget

  • Decide prices, offers or discounts

  • Speak for you on sensitive issues or complaints without your input

  • Promise results like “first page of Google”

They carry out the plan. You, or a strategist, set it.

An example. Tobias owns a heating and cooling company in Raleigh with six technicians. His marketing assistant works 15 hours a week. Mornings start with review replies and Google Business Profile updates. Midweek, she turns technicians’ job photos into “before and after” posts. Before each season, she schedules a reminder email for furnace or AC tune-ups. Tobias approves drafts on Wednesday and reads her Friday note in two minutes. (Tobias is an illustrative example.)


How you’ll know the work is paying off

Look past likes and follower counts. Ask your assistant to track:

  • Inquiries from social, email and Google

  • Bookings or sales that mention a post, email or offer

  • Consistency: did everything planned actually go out?

  • Response time to messages and reviews

But give it time. Marketing that runs steadily for three months tells you much more than one busy week.


“Isn’t it faster to just do it myself?”

At first, yes. The first two or three weeks take your time: a short voice guide, feedback on drafts, quick approvals. But a task you’ll repeat every week for years is worth a few hours of handover.

If you can’t spare those hours right now, start with one task that needs almost no training, like scheduling posts you’ve already written. Then add more once you have room.


FAQ

What does a marketing assistant do?

They handle the daily and weekly marketing work: social posts, email newsletters, graphics, listings, review replies, content calendars and simple reports.


How many hours a day does a marketing assistant work?

It depends on your plan. Many small businesses start with 10 to 20 hours a week, spread across a few days.


Do marketing assistants create content or just post it?

Most do both: they draft captions, emails and graphics from your notes, and you approve them before they go out.


What skills does a marketing assistant need?

Clear writing, basic design, comfort with marketing tools, organization and good judgment about what to post. See our guide to marketing virtual assistant skills.


Is a marketing assistant the same as a marketing coordinator?

The roles overlap. Coordinators often manage schedules and projects across a team, while assistants focus more on hands-on tasks.

See a week of it for yourself

The easiest way to understand the role is to try it. IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants can take over a week of posting, emails and listings. Start with 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. And if the fit isn’t right, IncludeWork replaces your assistant at no extra cost. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
What Is a Marketing Virtual Assistant? Plain-English Guide

What Is a Marketing Virtual Assistant? Plain-English Guide

You know you should be posting more, emailing your customers, keeping your Google profile up to date and checking what’s working. You also know none of it happened last month.

A marketing virtual assistant is a remote assistant who handles the day-to-day work of marketing, so it gets done every week instead of when you find a spare evening. Not the strategy. The doing.

Here’s what a marketing virtual assistant actually does, how they fit alongside you, and when hiring one makes sense.


What does a marketing virtual assistant do?

Most marketing VAs work across a handful of channels. Typical tasks include:

Social media - Scheduling posts from your content plan - Writing captions from your notes, for your approval - Replying to routine comments and messages - Creating simple graphics with templates

Email - Formatting and scheduling newsletters - Building simple automated emails, like a welcome series - Cleaning and organizing your email list

Local and search visibility - Posting weekly updates on your Google Business Profile - Drafting review replies - Basic keyword and competitor research - Updating website content

Reporting and admin - Pulling numbers from different platforms into one monthly report - Keeping the content calendar full and organized - Coordinating with designers or writers

For a longer list, see 35 marketing tasks you can hand to a virtual assistant.


What a marketing VA doesn’t do (usually)

  • Set your strategy. They carry out the plan. You, or a strategist, decide the direction.

  • Know your customers better than you, at least at first.

  • Make final calls on offers, prices or anything sensitive.

  • Fix a weak offer. Consistent marketing amplifies what’s there.

But that doesn’t mean they just follow orders. A good marketing VA will notice which posts work and suggest more of them.

The best setups are a partnership: the owner sets the direction and approves, the assistant makes it happen every week.


Marketing VA vs marketing manager vs agency


Marketing VA

Marketing manager

Marketing agency

Main job

Execution: posting, scheduling, emails, reports

Strategy and execution, managing campaigns

Strategy and campaigns, often specialized

Who directs the work

You

They do, with you

They do, with you

Cost

Lowest, often hourly or monthly blocks

A full salary

Monthly retainers

Best for

Owners who know what they want but lack time

Growing companies with bigger budgets

Larger campaigns or specialist channels

For a sense of scale, the Bureau of Labor Statistics puts median pay for marketing managers at $166,790 a year (May 2025), before benefits. See marketing VA vs marketing agency for a deeper comparison.


How it works day to day

A typical setup:

  1. You share a short brand voice guide and your goals.

  2. The assistant drafts a week or month of content in your tools.

  3. You approve in batches, once or twice a week.

  4. The assistant schedules, posts, replies and keeps things moving.

  5. Once a month, you get a short report and decide what to change.

Most of the communication happens in writing, with a short weekly check-in. And once the routine settles, many owners only need those batch approvals.


A day with a marketing VA

Laura owns a small pilates studio in Austin. Her marketing VA works 12 hours a week. On Monday, the assistant posts the week’s class schedule to Instagram and Google, replies to weekend comments and drafts three posts from photos Laura sent. On Wednesday, Laura approves them in ten minutes on her phone. On the first Friday of each month, the newsletter goes out, and Laura gets a one-page report showing which posts brought in trial bookings. Laura’s job is now ideas and approvals, not logins and formatting. (Laura is an illustrative example.)


When a marketing VA makes sense

  • You know roughly what marketing works for you, but it keeps slipping

  • You’re spending 5+ hours a week on marketing tasks

  • You’d rather approve than create from scratch

  • Your budget doesn’t stretch to an agency or full-time hire


When it might not

  • You haven’t figured out who your customers are yet

  • You need someone to build the strategy from scratch

  • You only have an hour or two of marketing tasks a month


The honest part

A marketing VA is only as good as the direction they get. And the first month takes more of your time than later months. Expect to invest a few hours up front in a brand voice guide and clear approvals. After that, most owners spend a fraction of the time they used to, with more consistent results.

IncludeWork’s marketing virtual assistants handle social media, email, local SEO, reporting and content support, working in the tools you already use.


FAQ

Is a marketing virtual assistant the same as a social media manager?

There’s overlap. A social media manager focuses on social platforms, sometimes including strategy. A marketing VA usually covers several channels, mostly execution.


Does a marketing VA need marketing experience?

For marketing tasks, yes, at least with the tools and channels you use. Test their writing and judgment with a short paid task.


How many hours does a marketing VA work?

It depends on you. Many small businesses start with 10 to 20 hours a month and grow from there.


Can a marketing VA work in my time zone?

Many can, or work overnight so tasks are done when you start your day. Agree on a few hours of overlap for questions.


What tools do marketing VAs use?

Common ones include Canva, Meta Business Suite, schedulers like Buffer or Later, email tools like Mailchimp, CRMs like HubSpot, and SEO tools like Semrush.


See what one could take off your plate

List every marketing task you did last month, and circle the ones you didn’t need to do yourself. That’s your marketing assistant’s job description.

To try it, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained marketing assistant, with no credit card and no contract. Every IncludeWork assistant signs an NDA before they start. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Reduce Customer Churn in a Small Business

How to Reduce Customer Churn in a Small Business


Winning a new customer takes effort: marketing, quotes, follow-ups, the first job. Then, a few months later, some of them quietly stop coming back. No complaint. No goodbye. Just gone.

That’s churn: customers who leave or stop buying. Every business has some. But small businesses often don’t notice it until revenue dips, because new customers hide the ones walking out the back door.

Here’s how to reduce customer churn: measure it, find out why it happens, and fix the parts you can control.


How to reduce customer churn, step 1: measure it

You can’t fix what you don’t track. A simple way to measure churn:

Churn rate = customers lost during a period ÷ customers at the start of the period

Example: you start the quarter with 200 regular customers and 18 stop buying. 18 ÷ 200 = 9% quarterly churn.

What counts as “lost” depends on your business:

  • Subscriptions or retainers: they cancel

  • Repeat-purchase businesses: they haven’t bought in longer than usual, say 2–3 times their normal gap

  • Service businesses: they don’t rebook or renew


Step 2: Find out why they leave

Ask. A short, friendly message to customers who’ve left:

“Hi Alex, we noticed it’s been a while since your last order. No sales pitch, I’m just curious: was there anything we could have done better?”

Common reasons you’ll hear:

  • Price, or a cheaper alternative

  • A bad experience that was never fixed

  • They stopped needing the product or service

  • They forgot about you

  • A competitor reached out at the right moment

Some of these you can fix. Some you can’t. Knowing which is which is the point.


Step 3: Fix the start

Many customers decide early whether they’ll stay. Make the first experience excellent:

  • Clear expectations: what happens next, when, and how to reach you

  • A welcome message or call after the first purchase or project

  • A quick check-in after the first delivery or job

  • Help using the product, if there’s anything to learn


Step 4: Watch for warning signs

Customers often drift before they leave. Look for:

  • Orders getting smaller or less frequent

  • Slower replies to your emails

  • Complaints, even small ones

  • Missed appointments or renewals left to the last minute

  • A key contact leaving their company (for B2B)

When you spot one, reach out personally. A simple check-in can save the relationship.


Step 5: Stay in touch between purchases

Customers forget businesses they don’t hear from:


Step 6: Fix problems fast

A problem handled well often creates a more loyal customer than no problem at all. Respond quickly, own mistakes and follow up. Our customer service tips cover how.


Step 7: Win back the ones who left

For customers who’ve drifted:

  • Send a “we miss you” message with something useful or a reason to return

  • Share what’s changed since they last bought

  • Make it easy to come back

Not everyone will. But a few usually do, and they cost far less to win back than new customers do to find.


One business, fewer customers lost

Rob runs a small lawn care company in Columbus with about 300 regular customers. Each spring, a noticeable number didn’t renew, and he’d never asked why.

He called 20 of them. The two most common answers: they’d forgotten to rebook, and a few had a bad experience with a missed visit they never complained about. He added an automatic renewal reminder in February, a text the evening before every visit, and a quick feedback request after each job. The next spring, far fewer customers dropped off. (Rob is an illustrative example.)


The honest part

Some churn is normal and healthy. People move, budgets change, needs end. The goal isn’t zero churn. It’s not losing customers for reasons you could have fixed, like being forgotten, a slow reply or a problem nobody followed up on.

Most of those fixes come down to steady follow-through: check-ins, reminders, replies and feedback requests. If that’s what slips, IncludeWork’s VAs can handle it through customer support and client management, working from your templates.


FAQ

What is customer churn?

The share of customers who stop buying from you or cancel over a period of time.


What’s a good churn rate for a small business?

It varies widely by industry and business model. Track your own rate over time and focus on improving it.


How do I calculate churn?

Divide the number of customers lost during a period by the number you had at the start. Multiply by 100 for a percentage.


What’s the fastest way to reduce churn?

Ask recent lost customers why they left, and fix the most common fixable reason. Often it’s follow-up or communication.


Is it cheaper to keep customers than find new ones?

For most businesses, keeping an existing customer takes less effort and cost than winning a new one, which is why reducing churn pays off.

Ask five customers why they left

Find five customers who haven’t bought in a while and send them a short, honest question this week. Their answers will tell you where to start.

If the follow-ups are what slip, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
24/7 Customer Support on a Small Business Budget

24/7 Customer Support on a Small Business Budget

A customer in another time zone emails at 2am. Another sends a chat message at 9pm on a Sunday. A third posts a question on your Facebook page during a holiday.

Big companies handle this with call centers and night shifts. You can’t. But “24/7” doesn’t have to mean someone sitting by a phone all night. For most small businesses, 24/7 customer support means customers can always get an answer or a clear next step, at any hour, even if a person replies later.

Here’s how to build that on a small business budget.


First, decide what 24/7 customer support means for you

But not every business needs instant answers at 3am. Be specific:

  • What must be handled immediately? Emergencies for a plumber or locksmith, failed payments for an online store.

  • What can wait until morning? Most questions, quotes and general inquiries.

  • Which channels matter? Email, chat, phone, social messages, marketplace inboxes.

Design coverage around real needs, not the label.


Layer 1: Help customers help themselves

Many after-hours questions are the same few questions. Answer them before they’re asked:

  • A clear FAQ page covering delivery, returns, pricing, booking and hours

  • Order tracking links in every shipping email

  • Online booking with real availability

  • Help articles or short videos for common how-to questions

And every question your website answers is one nobody has to reply to at midnight.


Layer 2: Set expectations with auto-replies

An instant, honest auto-reply goes a long way:

“Thanks for your message! We reply to all messages within one business day, usually by 10am Eastern. For delivery questions, track your order here: [link]. For emergencies, call 555-0187.”

Use them on email, chat, social messages and voicemail. Customers mostly want to know they’ve been heard and when to expect an answer.


Layer 3: Use chat tools carefully

A website chat tool or chatbot can answer simple questions from your FAQ, collect details, and pass anything complex to a person. Keep it honest: make it clear when customers are talking to an automated assistant, and always offer a way to reach a human.


Layer 4: Cover more hours with people in other time zones

This is where real 24/7 human coverage becomes affordable. A remote support assistant working in a different time zone can answer messages overnight, so customers wake up to replies. Our guide on managing a remote team across time zones covers how to make the hand-offs work.

Give them:

  • Written answers to common questions

  • Clear rules on what they can resolve (refunds under a set amount, order changes, rebookings)

  • An escalation path for anything unusual


Layer 5: An emergency route

If your business has true emergencies, set up one clear route: an on-call phone number or a rotation. Keep it for real emergencies only, and say so.


One store, round-the-clock replies

Kira runs an online store selling baby carriers from Chicago, with customers across the US, Canada and the UK. Messages piled up overnight, and mornings started with 40 unanswered emails, some from customers who had already asked twice.

She expanded her FAQ, added tracking links to every shipping email, set honest auto-replies, and brought in a remote support assistant working overnight US hours. Most messages now get a reply within a few hours, at any time of day, and her own mornings start with a short summary instead of a full inbox. (Kira is an illustrative example.)


The honest part

True round-the-clock support costs something, whether in software, staff or your own sleep. The layered approach keeps costs down by answering what can be answered automatically and saving human time for what matters.

IncludeWork offers 24/7 availability, with customer support VAs across time zones who handle email, chat and messages using your templates and policies.


FAQ

Does a small business need 24/7 customer support?

Not always. Many need fast replies during business hours and clear auto-replies after hours. Businesses with emergencies, international customers or online stores benefit most from extended coverage.


What’s the cheapest way to offer 24/7 support?

Start with a strong FAQ, order tracking and honest auto-replies. Then add a remote support person in another time zone if you need human replies overnight.


Are chatbots good enough for customer service?

For simple questions, they can help. For anything complex or emotional, customers want a person. Always offer a way to reach one.


How fast should after-hours messages get a reply?

Tell customers when to expect one, and meet it. Within one business day is a common standard. Emergencies need a separate, faster route.


Can I outsource after-hours support?

Yes. Remote support assistants in other time zones can cover overnight hours using your templates, policies and escalation rules.

Start with your auto-replies

Write honest auto-replies for every channel today, and list the ten questions customers ask most. Turn those into an FAQ this week. For more, see our customer service tips for small business.

If you need people covering more hours, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Respond to Negative Reviews (With Examples)

How to Respond to Negative Reviews (With Examples)

It’s 10pm. You check your phone and there it is: a one-star review. Unfair, in your opinion. Maybe flat-out wrong. Your first instinct is to fire back a reply explaining exactly why they’re mistaken.

Don’t. Not tonight.

But a bad review isn’t a disaster. Most people reading it are watching to see how you respond, not just what the customer said. Handled well, a negative review can actually build trust. Here’s how to respond to negative reviews, with a simple formula and examples you can adapt.


Before you reply

  • Wait a few hours, or until the next morning. Replies written while angry rarely help.

  • Check the facts. Look up the order, booking or job. What actually happened?

  • Decide whether to contact them privately too, if you can identify them.


How to respond to negative reviews: the 5-step formula

  1. Thank them for the feedback, even if it stings.

  2. Acknowledge the experience without arguing about it.

  3. Apologize for how it felt, and own any real mistake.

  4. Explain briefly what you’re doing about it, if anything.

  5. Take it offline with a direct way to reach you.

Keep it short. Three to five sentences. Write it for the next person reading, not just the reviewer.


Examples

When you made a mistake

Thanks for letting us know, Daniel. You’re right: we missed the delivery window we promised, and we’re sorry for the wasted afternoon. We’ve changed how we schedule Saturday deliveries so this doesn’t happen again. Please call me directly at 555-0142 and I’ll make it right.


When it was a misunderstanding

Thanks for the review, Priya. I’m sorry the final price came as a surprise. Our quote included the labor estimate, but we clearly didn’t explain the materials part well enough, and that’s on us. I’d love to go through it with you. Could you reach me at [email protected]?


When the review is unfair or inaccurate

Thank you for your feedback. We take every review seriously, but we weren’t able to find a booking matching these details. If you visited us, we’d really like to understand what happened. Please contact me at 555-0142 so we can look into it.

Calm and factual. Future customers can judge for themselves.


When it’s about a staff member

Thanks for telling us, Lauren. That’s not the experience we want anyone to have, and I’m sorry. I’ve spoken with the team about it. I’d appreciate the chance to hear more and make it right. Please reach me at 555-0142.

Don’t name or blame the employee publicly.


What never to do

  • Argue or get defensive in public

  • Share private details about the customer or their order

  • Offer something in exchange for removing or changing the review. Google’s policy prohibits offering incentives for the revision or removal of a negative review.

  • Threaten legal action to get a review taken down. The FTC’s rule on reviews bans using unfounded legal threats or intimidation to suppress negative reviews.

  • Post fake positive reviews to bury it

  • Copy-paste the same reply under every negative review


When a review breaks the platform’s rules

If a review is clearly spam, from someone who was never a customer, contains offensive content or breaks the platform’s policies, you can usually flag or report it. Do that through the official process, and reply calmly in the meantime.


Turning it around

Sometimes, after a good reply and a real fix, customers update their review on their own. Don’t ask them to, and don’t offer anything for it. Just solve the problem. And use what you learn: if the same complaint comes up more than once, it’s telling you what to change.


One reply, read by hundreds

Nina runs a small Italian restaurant in Providence. A customer left a one-star review about a 45-minute wait for food on a busy Saturday. Nina’s first draft was defensive. She waited until morning, then wrote a short reply: thanks, an honest apology, and an explanation that they’d since added a second line cook on weekends, with her email.

The customer emailed her, came back a month later, and later updated the review. And new customers began mentioning how she’d handled it. (Nina is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: replying takes time and calm

Reviews arrive at awkward times, and replying well takes a clear head. Many owners either reply too fast and too angrily, or not at all.

A routine helps: check reviews daily, draft replies the same day, send them after a second look. Monitoring reviews and drafting replies for your approval is the kind of online review management IncludeWork’s VAs handle.


FAQ

Should I respond to every negative review?

Yes, in most cases. A calm, helpful reply shows future customers how you treat people when things go wrong.


How quickly should I respond?

Within a day or two is good. Not so fast that you reply while angry.


Can I delete negative reviews?

Usually not. On most platforms you can only report reviews that break their policies. Focus on a good reply and more positive reviews over time.


Should I offer a refund in my public reply?

It’s usually better to invite them to contact you privately, then sort out refunds or fixes directly. Never offer anything in exchange for changing the review.


What if the review is fake?

Report it through the platform’s official process, and post a calm reply saying you can’t find a matching record and inviting them to get in touch.


Draft one reply today

If you have an unanswered negative review, use the five-step formula and draft a reply now. Read it again tomorrow, then post it. For getting more positive reviews, see how to get more Google reviews.

If you’d like help keeping on top of reviews, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.

This is general information, not legal advice.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Get More Google Reviews (Within Google’s Rules)

How to Get More Google Reviews (Within Google’s Rules)

Your customers love you. They tell you in person, thank you by email, and recommend you to friends. And yet your Google Business Profile has 11 reviews, the most recent from eight months ago.

That’s normal. But happy customers rarely think to leave a review unless someone asks. Unhappy ones are more likely to do it on their own. So without a system, your reviews end up smaller and harsher than your real reputation.

Here’s how to get more Google reviews by asking the right way, at the right time, and staying within the rules.


The rules first: what you can’t do

Both Google and the FTC have clear rules here. Breaking them can get reviews removed, your profile restricted, or worse.

Google’s policy on fake engagement says businesses must not offer incentives, “such as payment, discounts, free goods and/or services,” in exchange for reviews. It also prohibits discouraging negative reviews or selectively asking only happy customers (“review gating”), and content from people with a conflict of interest, like employees.

The FTC’s rule on fake reviews, announced in 2024, bans buying or creating fake reviews, offering incentives conditioned on a particular sentiment, undisclosed reviews from insiders, and using threats or intimidation to suppress negative reviews.

In short:

  • Don’t pay or reward people for reviews

  • Don’t write reviews yourself or have staff or family write them

  • Don’t only ask the customers you think are happy

  • Don’t pressure anyone, or tell them what to write

What you can do: ask every customer, honestly, and make it easy.


How to get more Google reviews, step 1: get your direct review link

In your Google Business Profile, find the option to ask for reviews and copy your review link. Shorten it if you like, and save it somewhere you’ll use it every day. It takes customers straight to the review form.


Step 2: Ask at the right moment

Timing makes the biggest difference. Ask when the experience is fresh:

  • Right after a job is finished

  • When the order is delivered

  • At the end of an appointment

  • When a customer thanks you or compliments your work


Step 3: Make the ask simple and personal

A short, direct message works best:

By text:

Hi Sara, thanks for choosing us for your kitchen today! If you have a minute, we’d really appreciate an honest review on Google. It helps other homeowners find us: [link]

By email:

Thanks again for your order, Marcus. If you have a minute, we’d love to hear how it went. You can leave a review on Google here: [link]. It makes a big difference for a small business like ours.

Note: “honest review,” not “five-star review.”


Step 4: Ask everyone, consistently

Make the request part of your process for every customer, not just the ones who seemed happy. That’s both fairer and in line with Google’s policy. Build it into something that already happens, like your job-completion text, invoice email or receipt.


Step 5: Make it physical, too

For in-person businesses:

  • A QR code on the counter, receipts or invoices

  • A small card with the link handed over at the end of an appointment

Don’t hover while they write it, and don’t ask people to post one on the spot. Google’s policy also discourages pressuring people on your premises.


Step 6: Reply to every review

And replying shows future customers you care, and encourages others to leave reviews. Thank people for positive reviews, mentioning something specific. For negative ones, see our guide on how to respond to negative reviews.


One owner’s review routine

Jamal runs a small plumbing company in Dallas. He had 14 Google reviews after six years in business. He started sending one text to every customer the evening after each job, with a short thank-you and his direct review link, and replied to every review within a day.

Within a few months he had more reviews than in the previous six years combined, mostly positive, with a couple of fair criticisms he responded to and learned from. Calls mentioning “your reviews” became common. (Jamal is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: it only works if you ask every time

Review requests don’t fail because customers say no. They fail because the asking stops after the first busy week. Automate it if you can, through your booking or invoicing tool, or make it someone’s job.

Sending requests and drafting replies for your approval is also easy to hand off. IncludeWork’s VAs handle online review management as part of routine admin.


FAQ

How do I ask customers for a Google review?

Send a short, personal message with your direct review link soon after a good experience, and ask for an honest review.


Can I offer a discount for a Google review?

No. Google’s policy prohibits offering incentives in exchange for reviews, and the FTC rule bans incentives tied to a particular sentiment.


Can I ask only my happiest customers?

No. Google’s policy prohibits selectively asking for positive reviews. Ask every customer.


Can my employees or family leave reviews?

They shouldn’t. Google treats reviews from people with a conflict of interest as a policy violation, and the FTC rule restricts undisclosed insider reviews.


How many Google reviews do I need?

There’s no magic number. A steady flow of recent, real reviews matters more than a big total from years ago.

Get your link and send five today

Copy your review link, write a two-line message, and send it to your last five customers today. For the rest of your profile, see how to set up your Google Business Profile.

If the asking keeps slipping, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.

This is general information, not legal advice.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Customer Service Tips for Small Business

Customer Service Tips for Small Business

Big companies have bigger budgets, more staff and better software. What they usually don’t have: the owner who remembers your name, answers your email the same day, and fixes a problem without making you call three departments.

And that’s the small business advantage. Customer service for small business isn’t about scripts or call centers. It’s about being reliably good at a few things customers notice every time.

Here are the habits that keep customers coming back, and how to keep them up as you grow.


1. Customer service for small business starts with fast replies

Speed matters more than polish. Even if you don’t have the answer yet, reply. A same-day “Got it, I’ll have an answer for you by Thursday” beats a perfect reply three days later.

Set a simple standard, like “every customer message gets a reply within one business day,” and stick to it.


2. Make it easy to reach you

  • Show your phone number and email clearly on your website

  • Say your hours and expected response times

  • Reply where customers contact you, whether that’s email, phone, social messages or marketplace inboxes


3. Write down your policies, clearly

Returns, refunds, cancellations, delivery times, warranties. Put them in plain language on your website and in confirmation emails. Clear policies prevent most disputes before they start.


4. Use templates, then make them personal

Write templates for common questions: delivery times, how to book, how returns work. Then personalize the first line every time. Customers can tell when they’re getting a copy-paste reply.


5. Remember people

Small details make customers feel known:

  • Use their name

  • Note preferences in your CRM or customer notes (“prefers morning appointments,” “allergic to lavender”)

  • Follow up after a big job or first order

  • A handwritten thank-you note now and then


6. Handle problems well, not just quickly

How you handle a mistake often matters more than the mistake itself:

  1. Listen to the whole problem without interrupting

  2. Apologize for the experience, without making excuses

  3. Fix it, or explain exactly what you’ll do and when

  4. Follow up to check it’s resolved

  5. Learn from it, and change the process if needed

Give your team clear authority to solve common problems, like a refund or redo up to a certain value, without waiting for you.


7. Set expectations, then beat them

Promise realistic delivery or completion times, then meet or beat them. Under-promising slightly and delivering reliably builds more trust than optimistic promises you sometimes miss.


8. Ask for feedback, and act on it

A short follow-up question (“How did we do? Anything we could do better?”) gives you useful information and shows you care. When you change something based on feedback, tell the customer.


9. Make reviews part of the routine

Happy customers rarely leave reviews unless you ask. Ask after every good experience, and reply to every review, good or bad. Our guides on getting more Google reviews and responding to negative reviews cover both.


10. Keep it consistent as you grow

But the owner’s personal service is hard to scale. Write down how you handle common situations, train your team on them, and check in on a few customer conversations each week.


One shop’s service habits

Lila owns a small bike shop in Madison. Her prices aren’t the lowest in town, but her customers are loyal. Her habits: every repair customer gets a text when the bike is ready, with a short note on what was fixed. Every new bike buyer gets a free check-up reminder after a month. Complaints go straight to her, and she aims to fix them the same day.

When she added a part-time remote assistant to handle the text updates, reminders and online messages, the habits survived a busy summer intact. (Lila is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: good service takes steady time

None of this is complicated. But the challenge is doing it every day, especially when you’re busy, which is exactly when service slips and customers notice.

If replies are slowing down because you’re stretched, consider handing off the routine part. IncludeWork’s VAs provide customer support by email, chat and messages, working from your templates and policies, with anything unusual passed to you.


FAQ

What’s the most important part of customer service for a small business?

Fast, reliable replies. Customers forgive a lot when they feel heard quickly.


How fast should a small business respond to customers?

Within one business day is a good standard for email and messages. Faster for urgent issues and live chat.


How do I handle an angry customer?

Listen fully, apologize for the experience, fix what you can, explain what happens next, and follow up.


Should I offer refunds to unhappy customers?

Follow your written policy, and use judgement for exceptions. Sometimes a quick refund saves a relationship and a bad review.


Can I outsource customer service and keep it personal?

Yes, with good templates, clear policies and rules for when to pass things to you. Personalize every reply and keep customer notes up to date.

Pick one habit this week

Choose one habit, like a one-business-day reply standard or follow-up after every first order, and make it routine this week.

If replies are slipping because of time, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
20 E-commerce Tasks to Outsource to a Virtual Assistant

20 E-commerce Tasks to Outsource to a Virtual Assistant

Running an online store looks simple from the outside. Make products, sell products.

But from the inside, it’s a hundred small jobs: uploading listings, answering “where’s my order?”, updating stock, chasing a supplier, replying to reviews, fixing a broken product page at 11pm. Each one is quick. Together, they eat the time you meant to spend on products and marketing.

An ecommerce virtual assistant takes those jobs off your plate. Here are 20 tasks small store owners commonly hand off, grouped by area, plus the ones to keep.


Ecommerce virtual assistant tasks: product listings

  1. Upload new products to Shopify, Amazon, Etsy or other channels

  2. Write and update product titles and descriptions from your notes. See how to write product descriptions that sell

  3. Resize and upload product photos

  4. Update prices, variants and sale pricing

  5. Keep listings consistent across every channel you sell on


Customer service

  1. Answer customer emails and chats using templates you approve

  2. Handle “where’s my order?” questions and send tracking updates

  3. Process simple returns and exchanges within your policy

  4. Reply to marketplace messages within the platform’s expected response times

  5. Flag unhappy customers or unusual requests to you right away


Orders and inventory

  1. Check and process daily orders

  2. Update stock levels and flag low inventory. See how to manage inventory for a small online store

  3. Follow up with suppliers on orders and delivery dates

  4. Track shipments and deal with delivery problems


Marketing and reviews

  1. Schedule social media posts from your content plan

  2. Format and schedule email campaigns

  3. Request reviews after delivery and reply to them for your approval

  4. Monitor competitor prices on a schedule


Admin and reporting

  1. Enter sales, fees and expenses into your bookkeeping system

  2. Prepare a weekly report: sales, top products, low stock, open customer issues


What to keep for yourself

  • Product decisions: what to make, source or stop selling

  • Pricing strategy and big promotions

  • Brand voice and final approval on new content, at least at first

  • Supplier negotiations and key partnerships

  • Anything involving payment details or admin access to your main accounts


How to hand off without chaos

  1. Start with 2–3 tasks, usually customer emails and listings.

  2. Record short screen videos showing how you do each one.

  3. Write templates for common customer replies.

  4. Give limited access: staff accounts with only the permissions needed, through a password manager.

  5. Check work daily at first, then weekly.

Our guide on how to hire a virtual assistant covers the hiring side in more detail.


One store owner’s handoff

Imogen sells natural skincare from her home in Tucson on Shopify and Amazon. At about 300 orders a month, she was spending four hours a day on customer emails, listing updates and stock.

She started with three tasks for a remote VA: customer emails from templates, new product uploads and a daily stock check. After a month, she added supplier follow-ups and a weekly sales report. She got back roughly 15 hours a week, which went into product development and her first wholesale accounts. (Imogen is an illustrative example.)


The honest part

A VA doesn’t fix a store with weak products or no marketing. And there’s a setup cost: a few hours of recording processes and checking work in the first weeks. But for a store that’s already selling, handing off the daily operations is often the fastest way to grow without working every evening.

IncludeWork’s e-commerce VAs are trained on Shopify, Amazon and Etsy, and work from your templates and rules.


FAQ

What does an ecommerce virtual assistant do?

They handle the day-to-day tasks of running an online store: listings, customer service, orders, inventory, reviews, social scheduling and simple reporting.


How many hours of help does a small online store need?

Many start with 10 to 20 hours a month for listings and customer emails, and add more as orders grow.


Can a VA manage my Shopify or Amazon store?

Yes, with staff or user accounts that give them only the access they need. Keep owner-level access and payment settings for yourself.


Is it safe to give a VA access to my store?

It can be, with individual staff accounts, limited permissions, two-factor authentication and an NDA. Our guide on protecting your data when outsourcing covers the setup.


What should I outsource first?

Customer emails and product listings. They’re repetitive, time-consuming and easy to explain with templates.

Pick your first three tasks

Choose three tasks from this list that ate your time last week. Record how you do them, and hand them off.

IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained e-commerce VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Competitor Price Monitoring Without Spending All Day

Competitor Price Monitoring Without Spending All Day

You check a competitor’s website “just to see.” Then another. Then Amazon. Forty minutes later, you’ve looked at dozens of prices, remember almost none of them, and still aren’t sure whether to change yours.

Competitor price monitoring is useful. But done casually, it’s a time sink that leads to nervous discounting. Done with a simple system, it takes an hour or two a week and leads to better decisions.

Here’s how to set it up.


Competitor price monitoring, step 1: pick 3–5 competitors

Not everyone. Choose:

  • Direct competitors: selling the same or very similar products to the same customers

  • The marketplace leader in your category on Amazon or Etsy, if relevant

  • One premium and one budget competitor, so you know the range


Step 2: Choose 10–20 products to compare

Focus on:

  • Your best sellers

  • Products where customers compare prices easily

  • Products where you’ve noticed sales slipping

Match each to the closest equivalent from each competitor. Note differences in size, quality or bundle so you’re comparing fairly.


Step 3: Record more than the price

A simple spreadsheet, one row per product per competitor:

Date

Product

Competitor

Price

Shipping

Promo / discount

In stock?

Notes

And shipping and promotions matter as much as the headline price. “$5 cheaper” isn’t cheaper if shipping is $8 more.


Step 4: Check on a schedule

For most small businesses:

  • Weekly for fast-moving categories or during busy seasons

  • Every two to four weeks for stable categories

Same day, same products, same competitors. Consistency is what makes patterns visible.


Step 5: Use tools if it grows

If you’re tracking many products, price-tracking tools and marketplace extensions can collect prices automatically and alert you to changes. Start manual so you understand what matters, then automate.


Step 6: Decide how you’ll respond

Price changes don’t automatically need a response. Before matching a competitor, ask:

  • Is it a temporary promotion or a permanent change?

  • Are they really comparable on quality, service and delivery?

  • What’s my margin at their price? See our guide on how to set prices.

  • Can I compete on something else: faster shipping, better reviews, bundles, guarantees?

But racing to the bottom on price is rarely a winning strategy for small businesses. Knowing the market lets you choose where to compete.


One store’s monthly routine

Ade sells specialty tea online from Philadelphia, through Shopify and Amazon. He used to check competitor prices whenever sales felt slow, and usually ended up discounting.

He switched to a monthly routine: 15 of his top teas against four competitors, with price, shipping, promotions and stock recorded in one spreadsheet. After three months, he noticed one competitor ran deep discounts every few weeks and then went back up. He stopped reacting to those sales, and instead added a free-shipping threshold just above his average order. His margins improved, and sales held. (Ade is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: it’s tedious, so it gets dropped

Collecting prices is repetitive, which is exactly why it either never happens or happens in panicked bursts. A consistent routine, even monthly, is far more useful than occasional deep dives.

It’s also an easy task to hand off. IncludeWork’s VAs run competitor pricing monitoring on a schedule, recording prices, shipping, promotions and stock into a simple report, so you only spend time on the decisions.


FAQ

How often should I check competitor prices?

Weekly for fast-moving products or busy seasons. Every two to four weeks for stable categories.


Should I always match a lower competitor price?

No. Check whether it’s temporary, whether the products are really comparable, and whether you can compete on service, delivery or quality instead.


Is it legal to monitor competitor prices?

Looking at publicly listed prices is a normal business practice. Agreeing prices with competitors is not, and is illegal in many places.


What tools can track competitor prices?

Price-tracking tools and marketplace browser extensions can automate collection. A spreadsheet works well for a small number of products.


What else should I track besides price?

Shipping costs, promotions, stock availability, delivery times and review counts. They all affect which store a customer picks.

Set up the spreadsheet today

Pick your competitors and products, create the spreadsheet, and do the first check this week. For more on running the store side, see how to start an online store.

If you’d rather someone else collect the prices, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Inventory Management for a Small Online Store

Inventory Management for a Small Online Store

Two problems keep small online store owners up at night. Selling something you don’t have, and having a garage full of something nobody’s buying.

And both come from the same place: not knowing exactly what’s in stock, how fast it’s selling, and when to reorder. Inventory management for small business doesn’t need expensive software. It needs a few clear numbers and a weekly habit.

Here’s a simple system for a small online store.


Inventory management for small business, step 1: give every product a code

Every product, and every variant (size, color), needs its own SKU (stock keeping unit). Keep it simple and readable:

  • CANDLE-CEDAR-8OZ

  • TEE-BLK-M

  • MUG-WHT-12OZ

Consistent SKUs make it possible to track stock accurately, especially if you sell on more than one platform.


Step 2: Track stock in one place

Pick one source of truth:

  • Your store platform’s inventory feature, if you only sell in one place

  • A spreadsheet, for very small catalogs

  • An inventory app that syncs stock across channels, if you sell on several platforms

Selling on Shopify and Etsy with separate stock counts is how overselling happens.


Step 3: Know your sales speed

For each product, work out roughly how many you sell per week. Your platform’s sales reports usually show this. Fast sellers need closer watching and bigger reorders. Slow sellers need smaller orders, or a decision about whether to keep them.


Step 4: Set reorder points

A reorder point tells you when to order more, before you run out.

Reorder point = (weekly sales × weeks your supplier takes to deliver) + safety stock

Example: you sell 20 mugs a week, your supplier takes 3 weeks, and you want 20 extra as a buffer.

(20 × 3) + 20 = 80. When you get down to 80 mugs, reorder.

Set a low-stock alert at that number in your platform or app, if it supports it.


Step 5: Count regularly

But stock counts drift: breakages, miscounts, returns not logged. Do:

  • A quick weekly check of your top 10 sellers

  • A full count monthly or quarterly

  • Fix the records whenever a count doesn’t match


Step 6: Deal with slow-moving stock

And stock that doesn’t sell ties up cash and space. Every few months:

  • Identify products that haven’t sold in 60 to 90 days

  • Bundle them, discount them, or use them as gifts with purchase

  • Stop reordering them


Step 7: Plan for busy seasons

Look at last year’s sales for your busy periods (holidays, back-to-school, summer) and order earlier. Supplier lead times often get longer in peak season.


Avoid overselling across channels

If you sell on more than one platform:

  • Use an app or integration that syncs stock automatically

  • Keep a small buffer on each channel for fast sellers

  • Check sync errors regularly. A broken connection can oversell for days before you notice.


One store’s fix

Tomás sells coffee gear online from Austin, through his own Shopify store and on Amazon. During his first holiday season, he oversold his most popular grinder by 40 units because the two stock counts weren’t connected, and spent January sending apologies and refunds.

He gave every product a clean SKU, set up a stock-sync app, calculated reorder points for his top 20 products and started a 15-minute Monday stock check. The next holiday season he ordered early based on last year’s sales and didn’t oversell once. (Tomás is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: inventory is routine work that can’t slip

The system itself is simple. Keeping it accurate every week (counts, updates, reorders, fixing sync errors) is where small stores struggle, especially during busy periods.

It’s also very delegable. IncludeWork’s e-commerce VAs handle stock updates, low-stock alerts, reorder reminders and listing changes across platforms.


FAQ

What’s the simplest way to track inventory for a small store?

Use your store platform’s built-in inventory tracking if you sell on one channel. Use a sync app if you sell on several.


How often should I count inventory?

A quick check of top sellers weekly and a full count monthly or quarterly works for most small stores.


What’s a reorder point?

The stock level at which you should order more, so new stock arrives before you run out.


How much safety stock should I keep?

Enough to cover delays or sales spikes. Many small stores start with about one week of sales, then adjust.


What should I do with stock that won’t sell?

Bundle it, discount it, or offer it as a free gift with purchase. Then stop reordering it.

Set three reorder points today

Calculate reorder points for your three best-selling products and set alerts. Then put a 15-minute weekly stock check in your calendar. For the bigger picture, see how to start an online store.

If keeping stock accurate is what slips, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Write Product Descriptions That Sell

How to Write Product Descriptions That Sell

“High-quality stainless steel water bottle. Durable and stylish. Perfect for everyday use.”

That’s the product description on thousands of online stores. It says almost nothing a shopper can’t see in the photo, and nothing that helps them decide.

A good product description does the job of a helpful shop assistant: it answers the questions people would ask if they were holding the product. Here’s how to write product descriptions that sell, with a simple structure and examples.


Start with who it’s for

Before writing, answer three questions:

  1. Who’s buying this? A commuter, a parent, a gift-giver, a professional?

  2. What problem does it solve or what does it make better?

  3. What would they worry about? Size, fit, durability, cleaning, delivery time?

Write the description to that person, not to everyone.


How to write product descriptions: a simple structure

1. A clear opening line with the main benefit

Not “This bottle is made of stainless steel.” Instead: “Keeps your coffee hot through your whole commute, and your water cold through a full day at the beach.”


2. Short, specific details

Turn features into what they mean for the buyer:

  • Double-wall insulation: drinks stay hot or cold for hours

  • Leak-proof lid: safe to toss in a bag

  • Fits most car cup holders

  • Dishwasher-safe lid, hand-wash bottle


3. Answers to common questions

Size, materials, care, what’s included, compatibility, delivery. If customers keep asking it, answer it on the page.


4. Something only you can say

How it’s made, where it’s from, why you designed it, a guarantee. This is what separates you from the same product on ten other stores.


Before and after

Before:

Handmade candle. 8 oz. Soy wax. Nice scent.

After:

A slow-burning soy candle for quiet evenings. Hand-poured in small batches in our Asheville studio, with notes of cedar, smoke and a little orange peel.

  • 8 oz, about 45 hours of burn time

  • 100% soy wax and a cotton wick

  • Reusable glass jar, great for pens or plants once it’s done

Trim the wick to ¼ inch before each burn for a clean, even flame.

Same product. One version helps the buyer picture it and trust it.


Write for scanning

Most shoppers skim. Help them:

  • Short paragraphs

  • Bullet points for specs and features

  • Bold the most important details

  • Put size, price-related details and delivery info where they’re easy to find


Write for search, too

Use the words your customers type: “insulated water bottle,” “personalized dog collar,” “soy candle gift set.” Put the main phrase in the product title and early in the description. But write for people first. Repeating a keyword over and over helps nobody.


Be accurate

Only claim what’s true. “Lasts for hours” is safer than “keeps drinks cold for 48 hours” unless you’ve tested it. Overstated claims bring returns and bad reviews, and in some cases, legal trouble. The FTC expects advertising claims to be truthful and backed up.


One store’s rewrite

Jonah sells leather wallets online from Minneapolis. His 30 product pages each had one sentence and a list of dimensions. He rewrote the ten best sellers using the structure above: a benefit-first opening line, a short bullet list, care instructions and a line about how each wallet was cut and stitched by hand.

He also answered the three questions customers asked most often (card capacity, whether it fit a front pocket, and how leather ages) right on the page. Customer emails asking those questions mostly stopped, and returns for “not what I expected” dropped. (Jonah is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: writing dozens of these takes time

Writing one great description takes 20 to 30 minutes. Writing 200 takes weeks. And descriptions need updating when products, prices or materials change.

That’s where help is useful. IncludeWork’s VAs handle e-commerce product listing and optimization on Shopify, Amazon and Etsy, working from your notes and style so the descriptions still sound like your brand.


FAQ

How long should a product description be?

Long enough to answer buyers’ questions. Simple products may need 50 to 100 words. Complex or expensive products may need more, broken into sections.


Should I use the manufacturer’s description?

It’s better to write your own. Copying the same text as other stores gives shoppers no reason to choose you, and doesn’t help you stand out in search.


Can I use AI to write product descriptions?

Yes, as a first draft. Then add real details, check every claim, and edit it into your brand voice. See how to use AI for marketing content.


What’s the most important part of a product description?

The first line, and the answers to the questions buyers worry about most.


Do product descriptions affect SEO?

Yes. Unique, helpful descriptions using the words customers search for can help your pages show up in search results.

Rewrite your top five

Pick your five best-selling products and rewrite their descriptions this week using the structure above. Then watch customer questions and returns. For the bigger picture, see how to start an online store.

If you have hundreds to update, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Shopify vs Etsy vs Amazon: Where Should You Sell?

Shopify vs Etsy vs Amazon: Where Should You Sell?

You’ve got a product. Now you need somewhere to sell it. And the three names that come up every time are Shopify, Etsy and Amazon.

But they’re not really the same kind of thing. Etsy and Amazon are marketplaces: they bring shoppers to you, but you’re one seller among many, on their terms. Shopify is a store builder: your brand, your rules, your customers, but no built-in traffic.

So the Shopify vs Etsy vs Amazon question is really about what you sell and what you need most right now. Here’s how they compare.

Fees below were checked on each platform’s official pricing page in October 2026. They change, so check before you commit.


Shopify vs Etsy vs Amazon: the quick comparison


Shopify

Etsy

Amazon

What it is

Your own online store

Marketplace for handmade, vintage and craft supplies

Marketplace for almost everything

Built-in shoppers

No, you bring traffic

Yes

Yes, the most

Main fees

Monthly plan + payment processing

Listing fee + transaction fee + payment processing

Selling plan fee + referral fee per sale (+ fulfillment fees if you use FBA)

Your brand

Full control

Limited (shop page)

Very limited

Customer relationship

You own it

Shared with Etsy

Mostly Amazon’s

Best for

Brands building a long-term business

Handmade, personalized, vintage, creative goods

Everyday products with search demand


Shopify: build your own store

According to Shopify’s pricing page, plans start at $39 a month for Basic ($29 a month billed yearly), with Grow at $105 ($79 yearly) and Advanced at $399 ($299 yearly). Online card rates on Basic are 2.9% + 30¢ per transaction, and there’s an extra fee if you use a third-party payment provider instead of Shopify Payments.

Good for:

  • Building a brand with its own look and voice

  • Collecting customer emails and selling to them again

  • Selling across channels from one place

The catch: nobody finds your store unless you bring them, through social media, email, search or ads.


Etsy: built-in shoppers for creative products

Etsy’s fee policy lists a $0.20 listing fee per item and a 6.5% transaction fee on the item price plus shipping and gift wrapping, plus payment processing fees that vary by country. Etsy may also advertise your items on other sites through Offsite Ads. If a sale comes from one, there’s an extra fee: 15% for shops under $10,000 a year in sales, and 12% for shops at or above that level.

Good for:

  • Handmade, personalized, vintage and craft products

  • Getting your first sales without building an audience first

  • Testing products cheaply

The catch: competition is heavy, and fees add up. Your shop lives on Etsy’s terms.


Amazon: the biggest audience

Amazon’s selling plans are Individual, at $0.99 per item sold, and Professional, at $39.99 a month. On top of that, there’s a referral fee on each sale that varies by product category, plus fulfillment fees if you use Fulfillment by Amazon (FBA).

Good for:

  • Products people already search for on Amazon

  • Sellers who can compete on price, reviews and availability

  • Using FBA to handle storage, shipping and returns

The catch: very competitive, fees vary a lot by category, and Amazon controls the customer relationship.


How to choose

  • Selling handmade, personalized or vintage? Start with Etsy. Add Shopify later for repeat customers.

  • Selling everyday products with search demand? Amazon can bring volume fast, if your margins survive the fees.

  • Building a brand with an audience already? Shopify gives you the most control and keeps the customer relationship.

  • Not sure? Start where your customers already shop, test with a small range, and add a second channel once one works.


Many brands use more than one

Marketplaces are good for discovery. But your own store is better for repeat customers and margin. A common path: start on a marketplace, include a card in every order inviting buyers to your own site or email list, and build your own store over time.


One brand, two channels

Rosie makes personalized wooden name puzzles for kids in Boise. She started on Etsy because buyers were already searching for “personalized name puzzle.” Her first year brought hundreds of orders, but she was paying Etsy fees on every one and had no way to email past customers.

She launched a Shopify store, added an insert card with a discount code for repeat orders, and started an email list. Etsy still brings most of her new customers. Shopify now brings most of her repeat ones. (Rosie is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: more channels mean more work

Every platform you add means another set of listings to keep updated, another inbox of customer messages and another stock count to keep in sync. Small brands often expand too fast and spend their evenings copying product details between platforms.

That’s work an assistant can handle. IncludeWork’s VAs manage Shopify, Etsy and Amazon listings, plus customer messages and order updates across channels.


FAQ

Is Etsy or Shopify better for beginners?

Etsy is usually easier for getting first sales because shoppers are already there. Shopify is better once you can bring your own traffic and want more control.


Is selling on Amazon worth it for small businesses?

It can be, for products with real search demand and enough margin to cover fees. Work out all fees for your category before you list.


Can I sell on all three at once?

Yes, but keeping listings, stock and customer service in sync takes time. Start with one or two channels.


Which platform has the lowest fees?

It depends on your prices, volume and category. Compare your full cost per sale on each platform using their current fee pages.


Do I own my customers on marketplaces?

Not fully. Marketplaces limit how you can contact buyers. Your own store lets you build an email list and sell to customers directly.


Map your fees before you choose

Take one product and work out your profit per sale on each platform using the current fee pages. That number usually makes the decision for you. For the full setup, see how to start an online store.

If managing listings across channels is the bottleneck, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Start an Online Store in 2027: A Practical Guide

How to Start an Online Store in 2027: A Practical Guide

US shoppers spent an estimated $340.2 billion online in the second quarter of 2026 alone, according to the Census Bureau. That was 17.1% of all retail sales.

So the demand is there. But the hard part isn’t building a store. Platforms make that easy. It’s choosing the right product, getting the details right, and finding customers in a crowded market.

Here’s how to start an online store, step by step, with the decisions that matter most before you spend money.


How to start an online store

step 1: choose what to sell, and who for

The most common mistake is starting with the store instead of the customer. Before anything else, decide:

  • Who you’re selling to: a specific group with a specific need

  • What you’re selling: your own products, products you resell, handmade goods, or digital products

  • Why someone would buy from you instead of a big marketplace

And narrow beats broad. “Gear for left-handed golfers” is easier to market than “sports equipment.”


Step 2: Check the numbers before you buy stock

For each product, work out:

  • Cost per unit, including packaging

  • Shipping costs, both to you and to customers

  • Platform and payment fees

  • Marketing cost to win a customer

  • Returns, especially for clothing and shoes

If there isn’t a healthy margin after all of that, find a different product or a better supplier. Our guide on how to set prices covers the math.


Step 3: Validate before you scale

Before ordering hundreds of units:

  • Order samples and test quality yourself

  • Pre-sell to friends, followers or a small email list

  • Start with a small batch or print-on-demand

  • See what similar products sell for, and what buyers complain about in reviews


Step 4: Pick your platform

Your main choices:

  • Your own store on a platform like Shopify: more control, your own brand and customer list, but you bring all the traffic

  • Marketplaces like Etsy or Amazon: built-in shoppers, but more competition and fees

  • Both: many small brands start on a marketplace and add their own store later

We compared the options in Shopify vs Etsy vs Amazon.


Step 5: Set up the essentials

  • Business registration and taxes: register your business and check sales tax rules for where you sell. Rules vary by state, so check with your accountant.

  • Payments: most platforms include card payments

  • Shipping: choose carriers, set rates, and decide on free-shipping thresholds

  • Policies: shipping, returns, refunds and privacy, written clearly

  • Product pages: clear photos, honest descriptions, sizes, materials and delivery times. See how to write product descriptions that sell.


Step 6: Get your first customers

A new store gets no traffic on its own. Early sales usually come from:

  • People you know and your social media followers

  • An email list, started from day one

  • One social platform where your customers spend time

  • Marketplace listings, if you use them

  • Small, carefully measured ads once you know what sells


Step 7: Run it like a business

Once orders arrive, the work shifts to operations: listings, inventory, customer emails, order issues, returns and reviews. Plan for these from the start. Our guide on inventory for small online stores covers the stock side.


One store, from idea to first 100 orders

Mia sells handmade ceramic planters from her studio in Portland. Her first step wasn’t a website. It was selling ten planters to friends and at a local market, then asking what buyers liked.

She launched on Etsy with 15 products, kept costs low by shipping from home, and started an email list with every order. After her first 100 orders, she added her own Shopify store for repeat customers, and kept Etsy for new ones. (Mia is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: the store is the easy part

Building a store takes a weekend. Running it takes every week: product uploads, customer messages, order problems, stock updates. That’s where most new store owners get buried, especially when sales start growing.

That day-to-day work is very delegable. IncludeWork’s e-commerce VAs handle listings on Shopify, Amazon and Etsy, customer emails, order updates and inventory, so you can focus on products and marketing.


FAQ

How much does it cost to start an online store?

It depends on your products and platform. Costs include stock or materials, platform and payment fees, shipping supplies and marketing. Digital products and print-on-demand cost the least to start.


Do I need a business license to sell online?

Often, yes. Requirements vary by state and city, and you may need to collect sales tax. Check local rules and talk to an accountant. This is general information, not legal advice.


Should I start on a marketplace or my own website?

Marketplaces bring built-in shoppers. Your own website gives you more control and your own customer list. Many small brands start on a marketplace and add their own store later.


How long until an online store makes money?

It varies a lot. Many stores take months to become profitable. Test products small and keep costs low while you learn.


What sells best online?

Products with a clear audience, good margins, reasonable shipping costs and a reason to buy from you over a big retailer.

Start with ten sales

Before building anything elaborate, find ten people to buy your product. What you learn from them will shape everything else.

And when the daily store admin starts piling up, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Set Business Goals for 2027 and Track Them Weekly

How to Set Business Goals for 2027 and Track Them Weekly


Every January, a lot of small business owners write ambitious goals for the year. By March, most of them have quietly disappeared.

But it’s rarely because the goals were wrong. It’s because nobody looked at them again. A goal written once in January and checked in December isn’t a plan. It’s a wish.

This is a simpler way to set business goals for 2027: fewer goals, broken into numbers you can track every week, with a 15-minute review that keeps them alive.


Step 1: Look back before you look forward

Before setting new goals, spend an hour on the last year:

  • What were revenue, profit and number of customers?

  • Which products, services or customers were most profitable?

  • What took the most time for the least return?

  • What do you want more of, and less of?

Your accounting software and sales records have most of the answers. If your books are behind, catch them up first. See bookkeeping basics.


Business goals for 2027: pick three, not ten

Too many goals means none get proper attention. Choose up to three for the year. Good goals for a small business are:

  • Specific and measurable: “Reach $600,000 in revenue,” not “grow the business”

  • Within your control as far as possible

  • Connected to what you want, not just what sounds impressive

A balanced set often covers money, customers and you. For example:

  1. Grow revenue from $450,000 to $550,000

  2. Win 30 new recurring clients

  3. Get the owner’s working week down to 45 hours


Step 3: Break each goal into quarterly targets

A year is too long to manage. Split each goal into four quarterly targets, adjusted for your seasons. If most sales happen in spring and summer, the targets for those quarters should be higher.


Step 4: Find the weekly numbers that drive each goal

This is the step most people skip. And it’s the one that makes goals work. For each goal, ask: what can we do every week that leads to this?

Goal

Weekly number to track

30 new recurring clients

Qualified conversations held, proposals sent

Revenue to $550,000

Revenue booked this week, average job value

Owner’s week under 45 hours

Owner’s hours worked, tasks handed off

Weekly activity numbers are things you can actually influence. You can’t make a client sign. You can make sure eight proposals go out.


Step 5: Build a one-page scorecard

Put the weekly numbers in a simple spreadsheet: one row per number, one column per week, with a target next to each. Green if on target, red if not. This becomes the one page you look at every week.


Step 6: Review weekly, quarterly and mid-year

  • Weekly (15 minutes): update the scorecard. What’s red? What’s one action to fix it?

  • Quarterly (1–2 hours): did you hit the quarter’s targets? Adjust the next quarter.

  • Mid-year (half a day): are the goals still right? Change them if the business has changed.

Goals aren’t contracts. Changing them on purpose, based on what you’ve learned, is good management.


A year with three goals

Bianca runs a small physiotherapy clinic in Denver with three therapists. For 2027, she set three goals: add 25% to revenue, hire a fourth therapist by September, and stop working Saturdays.

Her weekly scorecard tracked new patient bookings, therapist utilization, and her own weekend hours. In April, new bookings were consistently red. She moved spending from a print ad to Google Business Profile posts and a referral program with two local gyms, and bookings turned green by June. The fourth therapist started in August. (Bianca is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: the tracking is what slips

Setting goals is the fun part. Updating a scorecard every Friday is the boring part, and it’s what makes the difference. When business gets busy, it’s the first thing to go.

So make it as easy as possible. Pull the numbers from your existing tools, keep the scorecard to one page, and put the review in your calendar. Or have someone else update the numbers so you just review them. Pulling weekly figures into a simple report is the kind of research and reporting work an IncludeWork VA can handle.


FAQ

How many business goals should I set for the year?

Up to three. More than that and none of them get enough attention.


What’s a good business goal for a small business?

One that’s specific, measurable and tied to what you actually want, like a revenue target, a number of new clients or fewer working hours.


How do I stay on track with business goals?

Break them into weekly numbers you can influence, track them on a one-page scorecard, and review it for 15 minutes every week.


Should I change my goals during the year?

If the business or market changes, yes. Review them mid-year and adjust on purpose.


What if I miss my goals?

Look at why. Was the goal unrealistic, or did the weekly activity not happen? Both are useful lessons for next year.

Start your scorecard this week

Pick your three goals, choose one or two weekly numbers for each, and set up a one-page scorecard. Then book a 15-minute review every Friday. For the habits that support it, see our 30 small business tips.

If keeping the numbers updated is what you’ll skip, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.




Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Organize Business Documents So Nothing Gets Lost

How to Organize Business Documents So Nothing Gets Lost


“Can you send me that contract?”

Simple request. But it might be in your email, your downloads folder, a shared drive, a USB stick, or the laptop you replaced last year. Ten minutes of searching later, you find a version. Probably the right one.

Messy files cost small businesses time every week, and occasionally something worse: a lost contract, a missing tax record, a customer list that only existed on one person’s laptop. Here’s how to organize business documents and data so anyone on your team can find what they need.


How to organize business documents,

step 1: pick one home for files

Choose one cloud storage system for the business, like Google Drive, OneDrive or Dropbox, and make it the official home for business files. Not personal laptops, not email attachments, not desktops.

Use a business account, not a personal one, so files belong to the business and not to whoever created them.


Step 2: Use a simple top-level folder structure

Keep it shallow and obvious. A structure that works for most small businesses:

01 Admin
02 Finance
03 Clients
04 Sales and Marketing
05 Operations
06 Team
07 Templates
99 Archive

The numbers keep folders in a fixed order. Inside “Clients,” create one folder per client. Inside “Finance,” one folder per year.


Step 3: Name files consistently

A good naming rule makes files findable by search. A simple pattern:

YYYY-MM-DD – Client or topic – Document type – Version

For example:

  • 2027-03-14 – Rivera Dental – Proposal – v2

  • 2027-01-31 – Bank statement – January

  • 2027-02-05 – Office lease – Signed

Dates first means files sort in order automatically. Agree on the rule, write it down, and use it everywhere.


Step 4: Decide where each kind of data lives

Not everything belongs in folders. Decide once:

Type of information

Where it lives

Contracts, proposals, policies

Shared drive

Customer contacts and history

CRM

Invoices, receipts, payments

Accounting software

Passwords

Password manager

Tasks and projects

One task or project tool

How-to guides and SOPs

One shared folder or wiki

When everyone knows where things go, they stop ending up everywhere.


Step 5: Back up what you can’t lose

Cloud storage isn’t the same as a backup. Files can be deleted, overwritten or locked by ransomware, and those changes can sync everywhere.

  • Use your storage provider’s version history and recovery features

  • Keep a separate backup of critical data: financial records, contracts, customer lists

  • Test restoring a file once in a while, so you know it works


Step 6: Control who sees what

  • Give each person access only to the folders they need

  • Avoid “anyone with the link” sharing for sensitive files

  • Remove access the same day someone leaves

  • Use two-factor authentication on your storage accounts


Step 7: Keep records as long as you need to

Some records must be kept for set periods. The IRS says to generally keep tax records for 3 years, and employment tax records for at least 4 years, with longer periods in some situations. Keep a “Finance” folder per year so old records are easy to find and easy to archive.


Cleaning up the mess you already have

  1. Create the new folder structure.

  2. Move current, active files first. Clients you’re working with now, this year’s finances.

  3. Put everything else into “99 Archive” for now.

  4. Delete obvious duplicates as you go.

  5. Over the next few weeks, move archived files into the new structure when you need them.

And don’t try to sort ten years of files in one weekend. Organize what you use, archive the rest.


One office, sorted

Megan runs a small insurance agency in Columbus with four staff. Client files were split across three people’s laptops, email and a shared drive nobody trusted. When one employee left, the agency lost access to months of notes.

She moved everything to one business cloud account with an eight-folder structure and a naming rule, put client notes in the CRM, and set up a password manager. A remote assistant spent a few weeks moving and renaming active files. Finding a document went from “let me look” to a 10-second search. (Megan is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: it’s a one-time slog, then a habit

Setting up the structure takes an afternoon. Moving years of messy files takes much longer, which is why most businesses never start. And keeping it tidy needs everyone to follow the rules.

The cleanup is a good task to hand off. Sorting, renaming and organizing files to your rules is the kind of data entry and data cleaning work IncludeWork’s VAs do routinely.


FAQ

What’s the best way to organize business files?

One cloud storage home, a simple numbered folder structure, a consistent file naming rule, and clear decisions about where each type of information lives.


Should I use Google Drive, OneDrive or Dropbox?

Use whichever fits the tools you already use. If you use Google Workspace, Drive is natural. If you use Microsoft 365, OneDrive. The structure matters more than the tool.


How long should a small business keep records?

It depends on the record. For tax records, the IRS generally says 3 years, with longer periods for some records and situations. Check with your accountant.


Is cloud storage safe for business files?

It can be, with business accounts, two-factor authentication, careful sharing settings and a separate backup of critical data.


How do I get my team to follow the system?

Keep it simple, write the rules on one page, and put it somewhere everyone sees. Fix misplaced files when you spot them, and remind people early on.

Set up the folders today

Create the eight top-level folders in your business cloud account and write down your naming rule. Start using both today. For other habits that save time, see our 30 small business tips.

If you’d rather hand off the cleanup, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Weekly Team Meeting: Run One in 20 Minutes

Weekly Team Meeting: Run One in 20 Minutes

A one-hour weekly meeting with five people costs five hours of paid time. Every week. Over a year, that’s more than six full working weeks.

If those meetings produce clear decisions and fewer problems, that’s money well spent. But if they’re mostly people giving updates nobody needed, it isn’t.

For a small team, a good weekly team meeting can be done in about 20 minutes. Here’s the agenda, the rules, and what to stop doing in meetings altogether.


The 20-minute weekly team meeting agenda

Same structure, every week:

Time

Item

2 min

Numbers: three to five key figures for the week (sales, jobs completed, open quotes, overdue invoices)

5 min

Wins and problems: each person shares one win and one blocker, in a sentence or two

8 min

Decisions: discuss and decide the one or two issues that need the group

3 min

Priorities: each person names their top priority for the coming week

2 min

Action items: read back who’s doing what, by when

Twenty minutes. Same time, same day, every week.


Rules that keep it short

  • Start on time, even if someone’s late

  • Same agenda every week, shared in a document everyone can see

  • Updates in writing beforehand where possible, so the meeting is for discussion

  • Park side topics. If two people need to dig into something, they do it after

  • Every decision gets an owner and a date

  • End on time, even if something isn’t finished


Write it down

Keep a running meeting document with the date, the numbers, decisions and action items. At the start of each meeting, glance at last week’s action items: done or not done?

And this one habit makes meetings far more useful. People know their commitments will be checked.


What to take out of meetings

Much of what fills meetings works better elsewhere:

  • Status updates: share them in writing before the meeting

  • Information sharing: send a short message or recording

  • One-to-one issues: handle them with the person directly

  • Brainstorming: often better in a separate, focused session

The weekly meeting is for the things that really need the whole team at once: shared numbers, group decisions and alignment on priorities.


Remote and hybrid teams

The same agenda works on video. Add two things:

  • Share the meeting document on screen so everyone sees the same thing

  • Pick a time that respects everyone’s time zone, and rotate it if one person always gets the bad slot. Our guide on managing a remote team across time zones covers more.


A meeting that got shorter

Lucas runs a small solar installation company in Albuquerque with nine staff. His Monday meeting ran 75 minutes and mostly consisted of each person describing their week in detail.

He switched to the 20-minute agenda, asked everyone to post updates in a shared doc by Monday 9am, and kept a running list of decisions and action items. Meetings dropped to about 25 minutes. The bigger change: problems that used to surface weeks later started showing up in the “blockers” round on Monday. (Lucas is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: the agenda is easy, the discipline isn’t

Meetings drift because nobody holds the line. Someone needs to keep time, cut off side topics and record action items. And in small teams, that’s usually the owner, which is one more thing on your plate.

You can hand off the prep: collecting updates, pulling the weekly numbers, keeping the meeting notes and chasing action items. That’s routine project management support for an IncludeWork VA.


FAQ

How long should a weekly team meeting be?

For a small team, 15 to 30 minutes is usually enough with a fixed agenda and written updates beforehand.


What should a weekly team meeting cover?

Key numbers, wins and blockers, decisions that need the group, priorities for the week and clear action items.


Do small teams need weekly meetings at all?

Most benefit from one short, regular meeting. It catches problems early and keeps everyone aligned. Just keep it short.


How do I stop meetings running over?

Use a fixed agenda, start and end on time, park side discussions and give each decision an owner.


Should I take notes in every meeting?

Yes. Record decisions and action items with owners and dates. Review them at the start of the next meeting.

Try the agenda next week

Copy the 20-minute agenda into a shared document, send it to your team today, and use it at your next meeting. For other ways to win back time, see time management for business owners.

If you’d like help with the prep and follow-up, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Scale a Small Business Without a Big Team

How to Scale a Small Business Without a Big Team


There’s a common assumption that growth means a bigger team. More customers, more staff, more managers, more office space.

Sometimes it does. But many small businesses grow revenue a lot faster than headcount, by changing how the work gets done rather than adding people to do it. They stay lean, keep overheads low, and the owner doesn’t turn into a full-time manager.

Here’s how to scale a small business without a big team, and when hiring really is the right answer.


How to scale a small business: growing vs scaling

Growing means revenue goes up, and costs go up roughly with it. Twice the customers, twice the staff.

Scaling means revenue grows faster than costs. You serve more customers without needing proportionally more people, time or money.

The ideas below are about scaling.


1. Standardize what you sell

Custom work is hard to scale. Every job is different, every quote takes time, and only you know how to price it.

Turn your most common work into clear packages:

  • Fixed scope, fixed price

  • Clear deliverables and timelines

  • Optional add-ons

Packages are faster to sell, easier to deliver consistently, and easier to hand to someone else.


2. Write down how everything is done

If the knowledge lives in your head, the business can’t grow past you. Written processes let new people, contractors or assistants do the work the same way. Start with the most repeated tasks. Our guide on how to write SOPs shows a simple format.


3. Automate the repetitive steps

Booking, reminders, invoicing, follow-ups and data entry between tools can often run on their own. See business automation for beginners for what to automate first.


4. Outsource instead of hiring for every role

Not every function needs a full-time employee:

  • Bookkeeping and admin: a part-time assistant or bookkeeper

  • Marketing execution: a freelancer or VA for posting and email

  • Specialist work: contractors for web design, legal, IT

  • Customer support overflow: remote support during busy periods

You pay for what you use, and can scale up or down month to month. We compared the options in employee vs contractor vs virtual assistant.


5. Raise your prices

Often the quickest way to scale is to earn more from the same work. If you’re fully booked, underpriced work is the ceiling. See how to set prices.


6. Focus on your best customers

Some customers bring most of your profit with little hassle. Others take a lot of time for little return. Do more of what you do for the best ones, and gently move away from the rest.


7. Add products or recurring revenue

Ideas that grow without adding hours:

  • Maintenance plans or memberships

  • Digital products, templates or courses

  • Retainers instead of one-off projects

Recurring revenue also makes planning and hiring decisions easier.


When hiring is the right move

Scaling lean doesn’t mean never hiring. Hire when:

  • Core work needs someone on site or full-time

  • A role needs deep, ongoing knowledge of your business

  • Outsourced help costs more than an employee would

  • You’re consistently turning down work you want

The difference is hiring on purpose, for the right roles, rather than by default.


One business, lean growth

Sophie runs a small marketing consultancy in Minneapolis. In three years she roughly tripled revenue with one employee and a handful of outside helpers.

She turned custom projects into three fixed packages, wrote SOPs for each, and automated proposals and onboarding. She used a part-time remote assistant for scheduling, reporting and client admin, and freelancers for design. She also raised prices twice. Her one full-time hire was a senior strategist, the role that most needed deep knowledge of her clients. (Sophie is an illustrative example.)


The honest part

Lean scaling takes upfront work: writing processes, setting up automations, designing packages. And outsourcing still needs managing. But it gives you more choice: grow without a big payroll, and hire only when it’s clearly the right move.

If admin and operations are the first things you’d hand off, that’s where IncludeWork’s startup and operations support fits, with flexible hours you can scale up or down.


FAQ

What does it mean to scale a business?

Growing revenue faster than costs, so you can serve more customers without needing proportionally more people or money.


Can a solo business scale?

Yes. Packaging services, automating admin, outsourcing and adding products or recurring revenue all help a solo business grow.


What should I outsource first?

Repetitive admin and operations, like scheduling, inbox, bookkeeping and data entry. They free the most time for the least risk.


Is it better to hire or outsource?

It depends on the role. Core, ongoing, on-site work often suits an employee. Part-time, specialist or repetitive work often suits outsourcing.


What’s the biggest barrier to scaling?

Usually the owner being involved in everything. Written processes and handing off routine work remove that barrier.

Pick one lever this quarter

Choose one idea from this list for the next 90 days: package a service, write five SOPs, automate a process, or hand off a role.

If handing off admin is your lever, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Avoid Burnout as a Small Business Owner

How to Avoid Burnout as a Small Business Owner

You used to love this. The early days were exhausting, but in a good way. You were building something.

Now it’s different. You dread Monday. Small problems feel huge. You’re working more hours than ever, getting less done, and you can’t remember the last day you didn’t check email.

That’s often what small business owner burnout looks like from the inside. It’s common, and it’s not a personal failing. It’s usually a sign that the business is built in a way that depends too much on you. The good news is that the business can be changed.


What small business owner burnout is

The World Health Organization describes burn-out as a syndrome resulting from chronic workplace stress that has not been successfully managed. It lists three dimensions:

  • Feelings of energy depletion or exhaustion

  • Increased mental distance from one’s job, or feelings of negativity or cynicism about it

  • Reduced professional effectiveness

The WHO classifies it as an occupational phenomenon rather than a medical condition. But it can affect your health, your relationships and your business. If you’re struggling, talking to a doctor or mental health professional is a good step. This article is general information, not medical advice.


Early warning signs to watch for

  • You feel tired even after a weekend off

  • You’ve stopped enjoying parts of the work you used to like

  • You’re snapping at staff, customers or family more than usual

  • Decisions you used to make quickly now feel overwhelming

  • You’re putting off tasks you know matter

  • You haven’t taken a real break in months

Noticing these early makes them much easier to address.


Why owners are especially at risk

  • No off switch. The business is always on your mind, and often on your phone.

  • Too many roles. Sales, delivery, finance, HR, IT and customer service, all in one person.

  • Financial pressure. Payroll, cash flow and personal finances are tied together.

  • Isolation. Few people really understand what you’re carrying.

  • The “only I can do it” trap. Not handing off work because nobody else does it quite right.


Fix the workload, not just the symptoms

Rest helps. But if you come back from holiday to the same workload, the same pressure returns. The lasting fixes are structural.

1. Find out where your hours go

Track one week. Most owners find hours of work someone else could do. Our guide on time management for business owners shows how.


2. Hand off the draining tasks

Admin, inbox, scheduling and bookkeeping drain energy without moving the business forward. They’re usually the easiest things to give to someone else. See how to delegate tasks.


3. Set working hours, and tell people

Decide when you’re working and when you’re not. Tell your team and key customers how to reach you for real emergencies, and turn off notifications outside those hours.


4. Remove yourself as the bottleneck

Write down how key tasks are done and set clear decision rules so the business doesn’t need you for everything. Our guide to stop being the bottleneck covers how.


5. Look hard at difficult customers

One or two demanding, low-paying clients can take a lot of energy. Raising prices or ending those relationships can lift a weight.


6. Protect the basics

Sleep, exercise, meals away from your desk, time with people you care about. They’re the first things owners sacrifice, and the ones that make everything else harder when they go.


7. Talk to someone

Other business owners, a mentor, a peer group, or a professional. You don’t have to carry it alone.


One owner’s reset

Curtis runs a small commercial landscaping company in Atlanta. After five years, he was working 70-hour weeks, sleeping badly and short-tempered with his crew.

He started small. He handed quoting admin, invoicing and scheduling to a part-time remote assistant, set his phone to “do not disturb” after 7pm, and promoted his most experienced crew lead to handle on-site decisions. He also ended his relationship with one client who consistently paid late and demanded the most. It took a few months, but he got his weekends back. (Curtis is an illustrative example.)


The honest part

Burnout doesn’t fix itself with a long weekend. And some things, like cash-flow pressure or a hard season, can’t simply be delegated away. But most owners have more control over their workload than it feels like when they’re exhausted.

Start with one change. Then another. And if your symptoms are severe or not improving, please reach out to a medical professional.

If admin is a big part of what’s wearing you down, IncludeWork’s administrative VAs can take routine work off your plate, so your energy goes where it matters.


FAQ

How common is burnout among small business owners?

It’s widely reported among owners, especially in the first years and during busy or difficult periods. Long hours, many roles and financial pressure all add to the risk.


What’s the difference between stress and burnout?

Stress is often short-term and tied to specific pressures. Burnout, as the WHO describes it, results from chronic workplace stress that hasn’t been managed, and includes exhaustion, cynicism and reduced effectiveness.


Can I recover from burnout without closing my business?

Many owners do, by changing how the business runs: handing off work, setting boundaries and getting support. If symptoms are severe, talk to a professional.


How do I take time off when the business depends on me?

Start small, with one day, then a long weekend. Write down what goes wrong while you’re away, and fix those things one by one.


What’s the first thing I should change?

Take one draining, repetitive task off your plate this week. Small wins make the next change easier.

Start with one change this week

Pick one item from this list and do it this week. Then pick another next week.

If handing off admin is the change you need, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Small Business Automation: What to Automate First

Small Business Automation: What to Automate First

Every week, someone in your business copies a customer’s details from a web form into a spreadsheet. Then into the CRM. Then into the invoice. Then into a welcome email.

Same information, typed four times. And each time is a chance for a typo, and a few minutes nobody gets back.

That’s where small business automation starts. Not robots or complex software. Just letting your tools pass information to each other, and send the routine messages, without someone doing it by hand. Here’s what to automate first, with examples you can set up in an afternoon.


What small business automation actually means

For a small business, automation usually means one of three things:

  1. Built-in features in tools you already use: recurring invoices, payment reminders, email autoresponders, calendar booking links.

  2. Connections between tools, using services like Zapier or Make: “When a form is submitted, add the person to the CRM and send a welcome email.”

  3. Templates and rules: email filters, saved replies, checklists that trigger the next step.

Start with the first. But don’t overlook it: it’s often already paid for and just switched off.


How to pick what to automate

A task is a good candidate when it:

  • Happens often (daily or weekly)

  • Follows the same steps every time

  • Involves copying information from one place to another

  • Doesn’t need judgement

If a task changes every time or needs a human decision, automate the parts around it, not the decision itself.


8 good first automations

1. Payment reminders

Most accounting tools can email reminders before and after the due date. Turn them on. See our guide on getting clients to pay on time.


2. Recurring invoices

For monthly clients, set invoices to send automatically.


3. Online booking

A booking link that shows your real availability ends the back-and-forth of scheduling emails. Most also send reminders automatically.


4. Web form to CRM

When someone fills in your contact form, add them to your CRM or spreadsheet automatically, and notify whoever handles new leads.


5. Welcome emails

New subscriber or new customer? Send a welcome email automatically. Our guide to email automation workflows has more.


6. Review requests

A set number of days after a job is marked complete, send a review request automatically.


7. Receipts into your accounting software

Many accounting tools let you forward receipts to a special email address or snap a photo, and they’re matched to transactions.


8. Social media scheduling

Write posts in batches and schedule them, instead of posting live every day.


What should stay manual

  • Anything that needs judgement: pricing exceptions, refunds outside your policy, complaints

  • Important relationships: your biggest clients deserve a real person

  • Anything you can’t check: an automation that fails silently can do damage for weeks

  • Messages where a mistake would be embarrassing or costly


Set it up carefully

  1. Write the steps down first. If you can’t describe the process clearly, you can’t automate it.

  2. Start with one automation. Get it working before adding more.

  3. Test with your own details before switching it on for customers.

  4. Keep a list of every automation, what it does and what tools it touches.

  5. Check them monthly. Tools update, connections break, and offers go out of date.


One afternoon, four automations

Terrence runs a small mobile car detailing business in Charlotte. His week included a lot of copying and pasting: booking requests from his website into his calendar, customer details into his invoicing app, and manual review requests he usually forgot to send.

In one afternoon, he set up an online booking page with automatic reminders, connected his booking tool to his invoicing app, switched on payment reminders, and added an automatic review request two days after each job. Bookings stopped slipping through, and his review count started climbing. (Terrence is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: automation needs an owner

Automations save time. But they need someone to set them up properly and check they’re still working. A broken one can quietly send wrong emails or stop recording leads, and you might not notice for weeks.

If you don’t have time to build and maintain them, it’s the kind of work IncludeWork’s VAs handle through AI and automation support: mapping your process, setting up the connections, testing them and checking them over time.


FAQ

What’s the easiest thing to automate in a small business?

Payment reminders and booking reminders. Most tools include them, so it’s often just a setting.


Do I need Zapier or similar tools?

Not to start. Use the built-in features in your current tools first. Connection tools help when you need two tools to share information.


Is automation expensive?

Many automations are free inside tools you already pay for. Connection tools usually have free or low-cost plans for small volumes.


Can automation replace a staff member?

It usually removes repetitive steps rather than whole jobs. People are still needed for judgement, relationships and checking that things work.


How do I know if an automation is working?

Test it with your own details first, then check the results regularly: are emails sending, are leads appearing, are invoices going out?

Pick one this week

Choose one automation from the list, ideally one already built into a tool you use, and switch it on this week. For AI-based help, see how to use AI in your small business.

If you’d rather someone else set it up, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Use AI in Your Small Business: 15 Practical Uses

How to Use AI in Your Small Business: 15 Practical Uses

Most small businesses still aren’t using AI. According to the US Census Bureau, overall business AI use hovered between 17% and 20% from December 2025 to May 2026, and use grew among larger firms but stayed about the same among firms with fewer than 20 employees.

But that gap isn’t because AI is only useful for big companies. It’s usually because owners aren’t sure where to start, or tried it once and got a generic answer.

Here’s how to use AI in a small business in practical, everyday ways, where it helps most, and where you still need a person.


How to use AI in a small business: writing and communication

1. Draft routine emails

Give it the situation and the key points, and get a first draft in seconds: quote follow-ups, appointment reminders, polite payment chasers. Edit before sending.


2. Summarize long emails and documents

Paste in a long contract, report or email thread and ask for the key points and any deadlines. Always check the original for anything important.


3. Rewrite for tone

“Make this firmer but polite.” “Make this shorter.” Useful for difficult messages.


Marketing

4. Brainstorm content ideas

Ask for 20 blog or social post ideas for your type of customer, then pick the good ones.


5. Draft social posts and newsletters

Turn your notes into drafts. Our guide on writing marketing content with AI without sounding like a robot covers how to keep your voice.


6. Repurpose content

Turn one blog post into an email, several social posts and a checklist.


7. Write product descriptions

Give it the features, materials and who it’s for, then edit for accuracy and your brand voice.


Customer service

8. Build an FAQ library

Feed it the questions customers ask most, and get draft answers to review and save as templates.


9. Draft replies to reviews

Especially tricky negative ones. Always personalize before posting.


10. Power a basic website chat assistant

Many website tools now include AI chat trained on your FAQs. Keep a clear route to a human.


Finance and admin

11. Explain financial reports

Ask it to explain a line on your P&L or a term your accountant used. Not a replacement for your accountant, but helpful for understanding.


12. Clean and organize data

Reformat messy spreadsheets, sort lists, split names and addresses into columns. Check the output.


13. Draft simple documents

Job descriptions, SOP drafts, meeting agendas, policy outlines. Use them as a starting point.


Planning and research

14. Research competitors and markets

Summarize what similar businesses offer and charge, from information you provide or it finds. Verify anything you’ll act on.


15. Think through decisions

Use it as a sounding board: “What are the pros and cons of raising my prices 10%?” It won’t know your business, but it can surface questions you hadn’t asked.


The limits and risks

AI tools are useful. But they come with real limits:

  • They can be confidently wrong. Check facts, figures and anything legal or financial.

  • They don’t know your business unless you tell them.

  • Privacy matters. Don’t paste customer personal data, passwords or confidential financials into tools unless you understand how that data is stored and used.

  • They can sound generic. Always edit for your voice.

  • They don’t replace professional advice on tax, legal or medical questions.


How one owner started

Carmen runs a small travel agency in Miami. She started with three uses: drafting quote follow-up emails from her notes, summarizing supplier contracts before reading them in full, and turning trip itineraries into social posts. She kept a document of prompts that worked.

After two months she estimated she was saving several hours a week, mostly on writing. She still checked every contract detail herself and edited every post. (Carmen is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: AI is a helper, not a staff member

AI drafts, summarizes and sorts. It doesn’t follow up with clients, notice when something’s off, or take responsibility for getting it right. Most small businesses get the best results by combining AI tools with a person who checks and finishes the work.

That’s the approach behind IncludeWork’s AI-skilled assistants: VAs trained to use AI tools to work faster, with a person reviewing the output before it reaches you.


FAQ

What’s the easiest way for a small business to start using AI?

Pick one repetitive writing task, like follow-up emails or social posts, and try an AI assistant for it for two weeks.


Is AI expensive for small businesses?

Many AI tools have free or low-cost plans. The bigger cost is time learning to use them well.


Is it safe to put business information into AI tools?

Be careful. Avoid sharing customer personal data, passwords or sensitive financials unless you understand the tool’s data policies.


Will AI replace my staff?

For most small businesses, AI changes how tasks are done more than who does them. It speeds up drafting and sorting, but people are still needed to check, decide and handle customers.


Can AI do my bookkeeping or taxes?

Some accounting tools use AI to categorize transactions, which helps. But you still need someone to review the books and a professional for tax filings.

Try three uses this month

Pick three uses from this list and try them for a month. Keep the prompts that work in a shared document. For automating whole workflows, see business automation for beginners.

If you’d like AI-skilled help without learning every tool yourself, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Inbox Management for Business Owners: Get Control Back

Inbox Management for Business Owners: Get Control Back

4,312 unread emails. Somewhere in there: a quote request, a supplier invoice, a customer complaint, and a contract you need to sign by Friday.

For many business owners, the inbox is the to-do list, filing cabinet and alarm system all at once. And it doesn’t work as any of them. Important messages get buried. You spend the first hour of every day just catching up.

Good inbox management isn’t about reaching zero every day. It’s about knowing that nothing important is slipping through. Here’s a simple system.


Inbox management step 1: declare email bankruptcy (carefully)

If you have thousands of old emails, don’t try to process them all.

  1. Search for anything from key clients, suppliers and your accountant in the last 30 days. Deal with those.

  2. Move everything older than 30 days into an “Archive” folder.

  3. Start fresh from today.

Anything important in the archive will usually resurface with a follow-up. And it’s all still searchable.


Step 2: Use four folders, not forty

Complicated folder systems don’t last. Use four:

  • Action: needs a reply or task from you

  • Waiting: you’ve replied and are waiting on someone else

  • Reference: you might need it later (receipts, confirmations)

  • Archive: everything else

When you open an email, decide immediately: reply now (if under two minutes), move to Action, or archive.


Step 3: Let rules and filters do the sorting

Set up automatic rules so routine mail never hits your main inbox:

  • Newsletters and promotions into a “Read later” folder (or unsubscribe)

  • Receipts and invoices into “Reference” or straight to your bookkeeping inbox

  • Notifications from apps into their own folder

  • Messages from top clients flagged or starred

Gmail and Outlook both make this easy. Spend 30 minutes setting it up once.


Step 4: Check email at set times

Constant checking kills focus. Pick two or three times a day, like 9am, 1pm and 4pm, and close your inbox in between. Turn off notifications.

If people expect instant replies, tell them how to reach you for real emergencies, like a phone call.


Step 5: Use templates for repeat replies

You probably write the same 10 emails over and over: quotes, availability, directions, pricing, “thanks, received.” Save them as templates (both Gmail and Outlook support this) and personalize the first line.


Step 6: Send less email

Every email you send creates replies. Cut the volume:

  • Make the next step clear so there’s no back-and-forth

  • Use a booking link instead of trading times

  • Move internal team chatter to a chat tool

  • Unsubscribe ruthlessly


Step 7: Hand off the inbox

For many owners, this is the step that actually solves it. A trained assistant can:

  • Sort and label new email daily

  • Answer routine questions from your templates

  • Flag only what needs you, with a short summary

  • Handle scheduling, confirmations and follow-ups

You check one short list of flagged messages, instead of the whole inbox. Use delegated access, rather than sharing your password, and agree clear rules on what they can reply to.


From 4,000 to one short list

Rachel runs a small event planning company in Nashville. Her inbox had 4,000 unread emails and she was missing client messages.

She archived everything older than a month, set up four folders and filters for vendor newsletters and receipts, and saved templates for her ten most common replies. Then she gave a remote assistant delegated access to triage her inbox each morning and send a short summary of anything that needed her. Her email time dropped from about two hours a day to around 30 minutes. (Rachel is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: the system only works if someone maintains it

Folders and filters help, but the inbox fills up again every day. The owners who stay on top of it either protect time for it daily, or have someone else handle the first pass.

Inbox and admin support is one of the most common tasks business owners hand to an IncludeWork VA, with clear rules on what gets answered and what gets flagged.


FAQ

Is inbox zero realistic for business owners?

Not every day, and it doesn’t need to be. The goal is that nothing important is missed and everything has a clear next step.


How often should I check email?

Two or three set times a day works for most owners. Check more often only if your business really needs it.


Is it safe to let an assistant manage my email?

It can be, with delegated access, two-factor authentication, an NDA and clear rules on what they can reply to. Avoid sharing your password directly.


What’s the fastest way to clear thousands of emails?

Archive everything older than 30 days after checking for key senders, then start fresh with a simple system.


Should I use a separate email for different parts of the business?

Often yes. Separate addresses for billing, support or bookings make filtering and handing off much easier.


Spend one hour on it this week

Archive the backlog, set up four folders and three filters, and pick your email times. For the bigger picture, see time management for business owners.

If you’d rather hand off the daily triage, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Write SOPs for Your Small Business (With Examples)

How to Write SOPs for Your Small Business (With Examples)

“Just ask me, I’ll show you.”

It’s how most small businesses train people. And it works, until you’re on a call, on holiday, or showing the same thing for the fifth time this year. Then everything waits for you.

A standard operating procedure (SOP) is a written, step-by-step guide to how a task gets done in your business. It sounds corporate. It doesn’t have to be. A good small business SOP fits on one page and takes 20 minutes to write. Here’s how to write SOPs that people actually use.


Which processes to document first

Don’t try to document everything. But do start with processes that are:

  • Repeated often: weekly or daily

  • Asked about a lot: “How do I…?” questions you keep answering

  • Costly when done wrong: invoicing, refunds, customer onboarding

  • Done by more than one person, or about to be handed off

Typical first SOPs: sending invoices, onboarding a new customer, handling a refund, scheduling a job, posting on social media, opening or closing the shop.


The one-page SOP format

Keep every SOP in the same simple format:

  1. Title: what the process is

  2. Purpose: one sentence on why it matters

  3. Owner: who’s responsible

  4. When: what triggers it, and how often

  5. Tools needed: software, logins, templates

  6. Steps: numbered, one action per step

  7. What “done” looks like

  8. Exceptions: what to do when something unusual happens

  9. Last updated: date and by whom


A complete example

SOP: Sending client invoices

Purpose: Get paid on time by invoicing every finished job the same day.

Owner: Office coordinator

When: Every weekday at 4pm, for all jobs marked “Complete” that day

Tools: QuickBooks Online, job tracker spreadsheet, invoice email template

Steps: 1. Open the job tracker and filter for jobs marked “Complete” today. 2. For each job, open QuickBooks and create an invoice from the customer’s saved profile. 3. Add line items from the job sheet. Check hours and materials match. 4. Add the PO number in the memo field if the customer has one. 5. Set the due date to 14 days from today. 6. Send using the “Standard invoice” email template. 7. Mark the job “Invoiced” in the tracker.

Done when: Every completed job is invoiced and marked “Invoiced” by 5pm.

Exceptions: If hours on the job sheet look wrong, message the crew lead before invoicing. If the customer is marked “On hold,” don’t invoice. Message the owner.

Last updated: March 2027, by Maria

Short, specific and usable on someone’s first day.


How to write SOPs quickly

The fastest method:

  1. Record yourself doing the task while talking through each step. Your phone or a screen recorder is fine.

  2. Turn the recording into steps. Write them up yourself, or have someone else do it from the video.

  3. Add the exceptions you know about from experience.

  4. Test it. Ask someone who’s never done the task to follow the SOP while you watch, without helping. Every time they get stuck, fix that step.

  5. Keep the recording with the SOP. Some people learn better from the video.


Where to keep them

One place everyone can find: a shared drive folder, a wiki, or a page in your project management tool. Name them consistently, like “SOP – Invoicing,” “SOP – Refunds,” so they’re easy to search.


Keep them alive

An outdated SOP is worse than none, because people trust it. Simple rules:

  • The person who does the task updates the SOP when something changes

  • Review all SOPs every six months

  • Add a “Last updated” date to every one


How SOPs changed one business

Joaquin runs a small property management company in Phoenix with 120 rental units. Every tenant move-in involved a dozen steps that lived in his head. When his assistant left, the new one took two months to learn it all.

He wrote eight SOPs over a month, about 30 minutes each, recorded on his phone and typed up by his remote assistant. The next new hire was handling move-ins on their own in two weeks. And Joaquin stopped getting calls about how to do things on his days off. (Joaquin is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: writing them is the hard bit

Nobody enjoys writing documentation, which is why most small businesses don’t have any. The trick is making it as light as possible: record, transcribe, test, done.

The transcribing and formatting can be handed off. A VA can turn your screen recordings into clean, consistent SOPs and keep them organized, which is the kind of project management support IncludeWork’s VAs provide.


FAQ

What is an SOP in a small business?

A written, step-by-step guide to how a recurring task is done in your business, so anyone trained can do it the same way.


How long should an SOP be?

Usually one page. If it’s much longer, split it into smaller processes.


Do small businesses really need SOPs?

If you want to hand off work, train people faster or take time off, yes. Even five SOPs for your most common tasks make a big difference.


What’s the easiest way to create SOPs?

Record yourself doing the task while explaining it, then turn the recording into numbered steps.


Who should write SOPs?

The person who knows the task best, with help. Often the owner records it and someone else writes it up.

Write one this week

Pick the task people ask you about most, record yourself doing it, and turn it into a one-page SOP using the format above. For what to do with it next, see how to stop being the bottleneck in your own business.

If you’d rather someone else write them up from your recordings, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.




Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Stop Being the Bottleneck in Your Business

How to Stop Being the Bottleneck in Your Business

Your team is waiting on you. A quote needs your approval. A customer question needs your answer. A file only you can find. A decision only you can make.

You built the business by being involved in everything. Now that same habit is slowing it down. When you’re on a call, out sick or on vacation, work stops.

And that’s the business owner bottleneck, and it’s one of the most common limits on small business growth. Here’s how to spot it and fix it, without losing control of what matters.


Signs of a business owner bottleneck

  • Your team regularly waits for your approval

  • Projects stall when you’re busy or away

  • You’re the only one who knows how certain things work

  • People ask you questions they could answer themselves

  • Your inbox is full of “quick questions”

  • You can’t take a week off without checking in daily

If three or more sound familiar, the business depends on you more than it should.


Why it happens

Usually for good reasons. You know the business best. You care about quality. In the early days, you had to do everything. But habits that help a three-person business hurt a ten-person one.

The usual causes:

  • Nothing is written down, so everything lives in your head

  • No clear decision rules, so everything gets escalated

  • You never handed off the routine work, so you have no time for the important work

  • You fix mistakes yourself instead of fixing the process


Fix 1: Set decision rules

Decide what people can do without asking you. Be specific:

  • “Approve refunds up to $100. Over that, check with me.”

  • “Book jobs into any open slot. Only check with me for weekends.”

  • “Order supplies under $250 from our usual vendors.”

Write the rules down and share them. Most everyday decisions can then happen without you. You’ll be surprised how many “quick questions” disappear.


Fix 2: Get the knowledge out of your head

Every process only you know is a bottleneck. Start writing them down:

  • Record your screen while you do a task and talk through it

  • Add a short checklist underneath

  • Store it somewhere everyone can find

Start with the tasks people ask you about most. Our guide on how to write SOPs shows a simple format.


Fix 3: Hand off the routine work

If you’re still doing your own scheduling, invoicing and inbox sorting, you’ll never have time for the decisions only you can make. Hand off the repetitive work first. See our guide on how to delegate tasks.


Fix 4: Batch your approvals

For the decisions that still need you, set fixed times to handle them, like 11am and 4pm daily, instead of answering instantly. Your team knows when they’ll get an answer, and you get uninterrupted time in between.


Fix 5: Answer questions with a question

When someone asks you something they could figure out, try: “What do you think we should do?” Often they already know. Over time, they’ll bring you answers instead of questions.


Fix 6: Test it by stepping away

Take a day off, then a long weekend, then a week. Note everything that went wrong or waited for you. Each one is the next thing to write down or hand off.


How one owner stepped back

Gloria runs a small printing company in Tampa with seven staff. Every quote, reprint and customer complaint went through her. She was working 60-hour weeks, and jobs regularly waited a day for her sign-off.

She set three decision rules (staff could approve reprints under $150, quote standard jobs from a price sheet, and offer a set apology discount), recorded videos of her five most-asked processes, and handed her inbox and scheduling to a remote assistant. Approvals went from dozens a day to a handful. Six months later she took her first full week off in four years. (Gloria is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: letting go is uncomfortable

Some things will be done differently from how you’d do them. And a few will go wrong at first. That’s the price of a business that doesn’t depend on you for everything, and it’s usually worth paying.

The fixes above don’t take away your control over what matters. They free you to spend more time on it.

If routine admin is what’s keeping you stuck in the middle of everything, IncludeWork’s administrative VAs can take it off your plate.


FAQ

What does it mean to be a bottleneck in your business?

It means work regularly waits for you, so the business can only move as fast as you can personally keep up.


How do I know what to hand off first?

Start with the tasks people ask you about most and the routine work that fills your day. Those free the most time fastest.


Won’t quality drop if I’m less involved?

It might at first. Clear instructions, decision rules and regular check-ins keep quality high while you step back.


How long does it take to stop being the bottleneck?

A few months for most small businesses. Start with decision rules and your most-asked processes, and improve week by week.


Can a very small business fix this?

Yes. Even a one- or two-person business benefits from decision rules, written processes and handing off routine work.

Write your first three rules today

List three decisions your team brings to you every week, and write a rule for each. Share them tomorrow.

If you need help clearing the routine work, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Time Management for Business Owners: Get 10 Hours Back

Time Management for Business Owners: Get 10 Hours Back

You started a business to have more control over your time. Now you have less of it than ever.

The day starts with email and ends with email. In between: calls, quotes, invoices, a supplier problem, a staff question, three interruptions and one hour of the work you’re actually good at. If you’re lucky.

Most time management advice is written for employees with one job. Business owners have ten. So here’s time management for business owners specifically: where the hours go, how to get them back, and what to do with them.


Time management for business owners starts with a time audit

You can’t fix what you haven’t measured. For one normal week, track your time in 30-minute blocks. A notebook or spreadsheet is fine.

At the end of the week, sort every block into four groups:

Group

Examples

Only you can do it

Sales calls with key clients, strategy, pricing, core skilled work

You should do it, but faster

Approvals, reviews, team questions

Someone else could do it

Scheduling, data entry, invoicing, routine email

Nobody needs to do it

Unnecessary meetings, reports nobody reads

And most owners find 10 or more hours a week in the last two groups. That’s your target.


Step 2: Stop the “nobody needs to do it” work

Look at that last group first. It’s the easiest to cut:

  • Cancel or shorten meetings without a clear purpose

  • Stop producing reports nobody reads

  • Unsubscribe from newsletters and notifications you never use

  • Say no to “quick calls” that could be an email


Step 3: Hand off the “someone else could do it” work

This group is usually the biggest. Common examples:

  • Inbox triage and routine replies

  • Calendar and scheduling

  • Invoicing and payment reminders

  • Data entry and CRM updates

  • Social media scheduling

  • Research and quotes

You can hand these to a team member, a part-time hire or a virtual assistant. Our guide on how to delegate tasks covers how to hand them off so they stick.


Step 4: Batch and block what’s left

For the work you keep:

  • Batch similar tasks. Calls in one block. Admin in another. Email at set times.

  • Protect two focus blocks a week, two to three hours each, for your most important work. No email, no phone.

  • Theme your days if it helps: Mondays for planning and team, Fridays for admin and finances.

  • Leave buffer time. Something always comes up.


Step 5: Tame the interruptions

  • Turn off notifications for email and chat during focus blocks

  • Set “office hours” for team questions instead of answering instantly

  • Use templates for emails you send again and again

  • Keep a capture list so ideas don’t derail what you’re doing


Step 6: Plan the week on Friday

Fifteen minutes before you finish on Friday: review the week, pick your three priorities for next week, and block time for them. Monday morning becomes a start, not a scramble.


Where 10 hours came from

David runs a small architecture practice in Pittsburgh with four staff. His time audit showed 52 hours of work a week, but only 14 on design and client work.

He cut two weekly meetings to one (2 hours back), handed off scheduling, invoicing and routine client emails to a part-time remote assistant (about 7 hours back), and moved email to three set times a day (roughly an hour back, plus far fewer interruptions). He used the time for two protected design blocks a week and leaving the office by 6pm on most days. (David is an illustrative example.)


The honest part

You won’t get every hour back. And some weeks will still blow up. That’s normal. The goal isn’t a perfect schedule. It’s making the default week better, so more of your time goes to the work that grows the business.

And the biggest single win is almost always the same: stop doing work someone else could do. If that’s where your hours are going, IncludeWork’s executive and admin assistants handle inbox, calendar, scheduling and routine admin for business owners.


FAQ

What’s the best time management technique for business owners?

Start with a time audit. Knowing where your hours actually go makes every other technique more useful.


How many hours a week should a business owner work?

There’s no right number, but if long hours have become permanent, look at what you can hand off or stop doing.


How do I stop getting interrupted all day?

Set specific times for email and team questions, turn off notifications during focus time, and tell people when you’re available.


Is time blocking worth it?

For most owners, yes. Protected blocks for important work are often where real progress happens.


What should I delegate first?

The task that takes the most time each week and could be explained in a short video. Often that’s inbox, scheduling or invoicing.

Start your time audit Monday

Track one week in 30-minute blocks, then sort it into the four groups. You’ll know exactly where your 10 hours are hiding.

If most of them are in “someone else could do it,” IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Small Business Tips: 30 Habits That Save Time and Money

Small Business Tips: 30 Habits That Save Time and Money

Most small business advice is about big moves: raise prices, launch a new product, hire a team.

But the businesses that run smoothly usually aren’t the ones making the biggest moves. They’re the ones with good habits. Invoices go out on time. The books are up to date. Customers get answers fast. The owner takes a day off without everything falling apart.

Here are 30 small business tips, each one a habit you can start this week. But pick a few, not all of them.


Small business tips for your time

1. Track one normal week. Write down where your hours go. Most owners are surprised. Our guide to time management for business owners shows how.

2. Block your best hours for your most important work. Guard them like client meetings.

3. Batch similar tasks. Emails at set times, calls back to back, admin in one block.

4. Check email two or three times a day, not constantly.

5. Keep a “not now” list for ideas, so they stop interrupting today’s work.

6. Plan tomorrow before you finish today. Five minutes, three priorities.


For your money

7. Keep business and personal money separate. One account, one card.

8. Invoice the same day you finish the work.

9. Do your bookkeeping weekly, not once a year. See our bookkeeping basics.

10. Check your cash every week, not just your profit.

11. Review subscriptions every quarter and cancel what nobody uses.

12. Set aside tax money from every payment you receive.

13. Review your prices once a year. Costs go up. So should prices, usually.


For your customers

14. Reply within one business day, even if it’s just “Got it, I’ll come back to you Thursday.”

15. Ask every happy customer for a review.

16. Follow up on every quote. Polite, short, useful.

17. Write down your most common questions and turn the answers into templates, FAQs and content.

18. Thank customers for referrals quickly and personally.

19. Ask “how did you find us?” every time, and record the answer.


For your team

20. Write down how recurring tasks are done. Even a two-minute screen recording counts. See how to write SOPs.

21. Hold one short weekly meeting with a fixed agenda.

22. Give feedback the same week, good and bad.

23. Decide what people can approve without you. Set limits, then trust them.

24. Hand off repetitive work before it buries you or your best people. Our list of 40 tasks a virtual assistant can do is a good starting point.


For your systems

25. Use one task list for the business, not sticky notes and five apps.

26. Organize files the same way every time with clear folder and file names.

27. Back up anything you can’t afford to lose, and test the backup once in a while.

28. Turn on two-factor authentication for every business account.


For yourself

29. Take real time off. If the business can’t survive a week without you, that’s the next problem to fix.

30. Review the month on the last Friday. What worked, what didn’t, what’s next. Fifteen minutes.


Five habits, one owner

Wanda runs a small cleaning company in Louisville with six staff. She picked five tips from a list like this: invoicing the same day (8), weekly bookkeeping (9), a 20-minute Monday team meeting (21), writing down how each type of clean is done (20), and handing off scheduling and customer emails to a remote assistant (24).

Three months later, her overdue invoices had mostly disappeared, new staff learned faster, and she’d stopped answering customer emails at 10pm. None of it was a big move. (Wanda is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: habits slip when you’re busy

Every habit on this list is easy to start and easy to drop the first busy week. So start with three, not thirty. Put them in your calendar. Once they’re automatic, add three more.

And notice which habits keep slipping. They’re usually the routine, admin-heavy ones, which are exactly the ones easiest to hand to someone else.


FAQ

What’s the most important habit for a small business owner?

Knowing your numbers weekly: cash, sales and what’s owed to you. Most other problems are easier to fix when you can see them early.

How do small business owners save time?

By batching tasks, protecting focus time, using templates and handing off repetitive work.

What should a new business owner focus on first?

Getting customers, keeping money separate and tracked, and building a few simple routines before the business gets busy.

How many of these habits should I start at once?

Three. Make them stick for a month, then add more.

What’s the most common small business mistake?

Doing everything yourself for too long. It limits growth and wears you out.

Pick three today

Choose three tips, put them in your calendar this week, and check in on them in a month.

If the ones that keep slipping are admin, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Should You Outsource Lead Generation? Costs and Risks

Should You Outsource Lead Generation? Costs and Risks

You know you need more leads. You also know you don’t have 15 hours a week to research companies, find decision-makers, verify emails, send outreach and log every reply.

So you start looking at people who’ll do it for you. And the offers are confusing. Some promise “30 qualified meetings a month, guaranteed.” Others offer lists of thousands of contacts for a few hundred dollars. It’s hard to tell what’s real.

Here’s an honest look at when to outsource lead generation, how it’s usually priced, what can go wrong, and how to split the work so you keep control.


What “lead generation” actually involves

It helps to break it into parts, because you don’t have to outsource all of them:

  1. Defining your ideal customer

  2. Researching companies that fit

  3. Finding decision-makers and verifying contact details

  4. Writing outreach messages

  5. Sending and following up

  6. Handling replies and booking calls

  7. Running the sales conversation

Steps 2, 3 and 5 are the most time-consuming and the most delegable. Steps 1 and 7 should usually stay with you.


How outsourced lead generation is priced

The common models:

Model

How it works

Watch out for

Hourly

You pay for time spent researching and doing outreach

Need clear targets so hours turn into results

Per lead

A set price per contact or “qualified” lead

How “qualified” is defined; quality can slip to hit numbers

Per appointment

Pay for each meeting booked

Meetings with poor-fit prospects; high per-meeting prices

Monthly retainer

Fixed monthly fee for a defined service

Long contracts before you see results

Bought lists

One-off purchase of contact data

Often outdated and untargeted; can harm email reputation

There’s no single right model. For many small businesses, paying hourly or a modest retainer for research and list-building, while keeping the conversations, is the lowest-risk start.


When to outsource lead generation

  • You know who your ideal customer is, but don’t have time to find them

  • You’ve tested outreach yourself and know what message works

  • Research and data work is eating your selling time

  • You want a steady weekly flow instead of bursts when sales slow


When it doesn’t (yet)

  • You haven’t defined your ideal customer clearly

  • You’ve never done any outreach, so you don’t know what works

  • Your offer isn’t clear enough to explain in two sentences

  • You can’t handle more conversations if leads arrive

Outsourcing scales what works. But it doesn’t fix an unclear offer.


Red flags

  • Guaranteed meeting numbers with no questions about your business

  • Huge contact lists for very little money

  • No clear answer on where data comes from or how it’s verified

  • Sending from your domain without discussing deliverability and compliance

  • Long contracts with no trial period

  • No reporting on what was sent and what happened

In the US, cold B2B email still has to follow CAN-SPAM. The FTC notes the law makes no exception for business-to-business email. Anyone sending on your behalf should know the rules. Responsibility can still fall on your business.


Questions to ask any provider

  1. Where does your data come from, and how do you verify emails?

  2. How will you define a qualified lead for my business?

  3. Can I see a sample of the list before you start outreach?

  4. Who writes the messages, and do I approve them?

  5. What will you report each week?

  6. Is there a trial, and what’s the minimum commitment?

A good provider will ask you as many questions as you ask them.


A hybrid that worked

Elif runs a small IT consulting firm in Denver. She’d tried a pay-per-appointment agency. She got meetings, but mostly with companies too small to afford her services.

Second time around, she kept the strategy and conversations in-house and outsourced the research. A remote assistant built a list of 100 professional-services firms with 20 to 100 staff in Colorado, verified the contacts, and sent her approved outreach sequence each week, logging replies in her CRM. Fewer meetings than the agency promised, but most were good fits, and two became long-term clients within three months. (Elif is an illustrative example.)


The honest part

Outsourcing lead generation can free up hours each week. But no provider understands your customers as well as you do, at least not at first. Expect to spend time on the setup: defining your ideal customer, approving messages and reviewing early results.

This is also the kind of work IncludeWork does every day: lead generation and prospect list building, from company research and verified contacts to outreach support and CRM updates, starting at $8 an hour with no long-term contract. You stay in charge of the strategy and the conversations.


FAQ

How much does it cost to outsource lead generation?

It depends on the model: hourly support, per lead, per appointment or a monthly retainer. Hourly research support is usually the cheapest way to start; done-for-you appointment setting costs more.


Is outsourced lead generation worth it?

It can be, when you know your ideal customer and your message already works. It’s less useful when you’re still figuring those out.


What’s the difference between a lead and a qualified lead?

A lead is anyone who might buy. A qualified lead fits your ideal customer and has a real need or signal. Always agree the definition in writing.


Should I buy a lead list?

Usually not. Bought lists are often outdated, poorly targeted and can damage your email reputation. A smaller, researched list works better.


What should I keep in-house?

Your ideal customer definition, final approval of messages, and the sales conversations. Research, data and outreach admin are the easiest parts to hand off.

Start with a small, clear test

Define your ideal customer, then outsource the research for 50 to 100 prospects and review the list yourself before any outreach goes out. For the full picture, see our lead generation guide.

IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Use them to build a first sample list. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Set Up a Referral Program for a Small Business

How to Set Up a Referral Program for a Small Business

Ask most small business owners where their best customers come from and you’ll hear the same answer: “Word of mouth.”

And ask how they make word of mouth happen, and you usually get a shrug. It just… happens. Sometimes. When it does, it’s great. When it doesn’t, there’s no plan B.

A referral program for a small business turns that luck into a system. It doesn’t need software or a big budget. It needs a clear ask, an easy way to refer, a reason to bother, and a thank-you. Here’s how to set one up.


Setting up a referral program for a small business, 

step 1: who to ask

Not every customer. But focus on:

  • Customers who’ve told you they’re happy

  • Repeat customers

  • Customers who’ve left a good review

  • Referral partners: businesses that serve the same customers as you

Happy customers are already likely to recommend you. A referral program just reminds them and makes it easy.


Step 2: Choose the right moment

Timing matters more than wording. Good moments to ask:

  • Right after you deliver a great result

  • When a customer thanks you or compliments your work

  • After they leave a positive review

  • At a natural check-in, like a project wrap-up or annual review

Asking in the moment someone feels good about you is far more effective than a generic email months later.


Step 3: Make referring easy

The fewer steps, the better:

  • A short message they can forward: “Here’s a quick note you can pass along.”

  • A simple referral link or form on your website

  • Referral cards for local and in-person businesses

  • A direct introduction: “Would you be happy to introduce us by email?”


Step 4: Pick a reward, or don’t

Rewards can help. But they aren’t required. Many people refer because they want to help a friend and a business they like. Options:

  • Two-sided rewards: both the referrer and the new customer get something, like a discount or credit. Often feels fairer to both sides.

  • Account credit or a discount on their next purchase

  • A thank-you gift: a gift card, a donation in their name, something local

  • No reward, just a sincere thank-you and a handwritten note

Match the reward to your margins and your customers. A small, reliable thank-you often works better than a large prize that feels like a sales tactic. Check any rules that apply to your industry. Some professions restrict referral payments.


Step 5: Track every referral

A simple spreadsheet works:

Date

Referred by

New lead

Status

Reward sent

Ask every new customer how they found you, and record it. That’s how you know the program is working, and who your best advocates are.


Step 6: Always say thank you

Whether the referral turns into a sale or not, thank the person who sent it, quickly and personally. People who feel appreciated refer again.


Wording that doesn’t feel awkward

After a successful job:

“I’m really glad this worked out. Most of our work comes from recommendations, so if you know anyone who could use help with [service], I’d be grateful for an introduction.”

In an email:

“Thanks again for choosing us. If a friend or colleague is ever looking for [service], here’s a short note you can forward. As a thank-you, we’ll give you both $50 off your next visit.”

Keep it short, sincere and specific about who you help.


A referral system that stuck

Malik runs a small HVAC company in Kansas City. He got referrals occasionally, but never asked for them directly.

He added three steps: a referral request on every job-completion text, a $50 credit for both the referrer and the new customer, and a handwritten thank-you card for every referral. He tracked it in a simple spreadsheet. Within a year, referrals had become one of his top sources of new customers, and his best referrers were people he’d never have guessed. (Malik is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: it only works if you keep asking

Referral programs rarely fail because of the reward. They fail because the asking stops after the first busy month. Build the ask into something that already happens, like your invoice, job-completion message or project wrap-up email, so it doesn’t depend on remembering.

If the follow-through is what slips (tracking, thank-you notes, rewards), it’s simple work to hand off. IncludeWork’s VAs handle this kind of client management task routinely.


FAQ

Do referral programs work for small businesses?

Yes. Small businesses often rely heavily on word of mouth, and a simple program makes it more consistent.


What’s a good referral reward?

Something that fits your margins and feels like a real thank-you: account credit, a discount for both sides, or a small gift. Some businesses offer no reward and still get plenty of referrals.


How do I ask for referrals without sounding pushy?

Ask at a moment when the customer is clearly happy, keep it short, and make it about helping people like them.


Should I pay other businesses for referrals?

Some do, through partner arrangements. Agree the terms in writing, and check whether your industry has rules about referral fees.


How do I track referrals?

Ask every new customer how they heard about you, and record the answer, plus who referred them, in a spreadsheet or your CRM.


Add the ask to one message this week

Pick one message you already send, like your invoice or job-completion email, and add a referral request to it today. For more ways to find customers, see our lead generation guide.

If the tracking and thank-yous are what you’ll skip, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.




Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Get Your First 10 Customers (Small Business Guide)

How to Get Your First 10 Customers (Small Business Guide)


The first customer is the hardest one you’ll ever get.

You have no reviews, no case studies, no word of mouth. Just a business, a website you’re not sure about, and a lot of hope. So you post on social media, wait, and hear nothing.

Here’s the thing: your first 10 customers almost never come from marketing. They come from people, conversations and doing things that don’t scale. This is how to get your first customers when nobody knows you yet.


How to get your first customers: 1–3 come from people who trust you

Make a list of everyone you know who might buy, or might know someone who would:

  • Former colleagues and bosses

  • Past clients from a previous job, where your agreements allow it

  • Friends and family with relevant needs or contacts

  • People in groups you belong to: sports, school, community, faith, alumni

Then contact them personally. Not a mass announcement. A short, specific message:

“Hi Maria, I’ve started my own bookkeeping business, focused on restaurants. You know half the restaurant owners in town. Is there anyone you think I should talk to?”

Asking for introductions is often easier, and more effective, than asking people to buy.


Customers 4–6: make the first step easy

New customers take a risk on you. Make it smaller:

  • A small first project instead of a big commitment

  • A fixed-price starter package with a clear outcome

  • A trial or pilot with a defined end

  • A guarantee you can actually stand behind

Discounting heavily isn’t required, and it can set the wrong expectations. A smaller, clearly defined first step usually works better than a cheap one.


Customers 7–10: go where your customers already are

Now widen the net, focusing on places your exact customers gather:

  • Local business groups, chambers and industry associations

  • Online communities where your customers ask questions. Answer helpfully. Don’t pitch.

  • Partner businesses that serve the same customers without competing

  • Direct outreach to a small, well-researched list. Our guide on writing cold emails that get replies covers how.

  • Your Google Business Profile, if you serve a local area. Set it up on day one. See our setup guide.


After every sale: three things

Your first customers are worth more than their invoices. With each one:

  1. Over-deliver. Not by working for free, but by being responsive, reliable and easy to work with.

  2. Ask for feedback. What made them say yes? What almost stopped them? Their answers shape your marketing.

  3. Ask for a review and a referral. “If you know anyone else who might need this, I’d really appreciate an introduction.”

By customer 10, you’ll have reviews, a story or two, and a clear idea of who your best customers are. That’s what makes customers 11 to 100 easier.


How one owner got her first ten

Imani left an agency job to start a freelance copywriting business for law firms in Atlanta. Week one, she messaged 40 former colleagues and contacts about what she was doing. Three introduced her to lawyers they knew, and two became clients.

She then offered a fixed-price “website practice-area page” package as an easy first project. Four more firms came through a local bar association networking event and a referral partner (a legal web designer). The last three came from referrals by her first clients. Ten customers in about five months, with no ads at all. (Imani is an illustrative example.)


Mistakes to avoid

  • Waiting for a perfect website before talking to anyone

  • Marketing to everyone instead of a specific type of customer

  • Only posting on social media and hoping

  • Not asking. Most people are happy to help if you ask directly.

  • Saying yes to every customer, even ones who aren’t a fit


The honest part: it’s mostly conversations

Getting your first customers is uncomfortable. It’s a lot of messages, some awkward conversations and plenty of silence. There’s no shortcut that replaces talking to people.

But there are things you can hand off while you do the talking: researching prospect lists, setting up your Google profile, writing and sending follow-ups, and keeping track of everyone you’ve contacted. For new businesses, IncludeWork’s VAs offer startup and operations support, so your time goes into the conversations.


FAQ

How long does it take to get your first customer?

It varies, but direct outreach to people who already know you can bring a first customer within weeks. Waiting for marketing to work usually takes much longer.

Should I offer free work to get my first customers?

Usually not entirely free. A small, paid first project or a defined pilot sets better expectations and still lowers the risk for the customer.

What if I don’t have a network?

Build one quickly: join a local business group, find online communities where your customers are, and reach out directly to a small researched list.

When should I start advertising?

Once you know who your best customers are and what message works. That usually comes after your first 10 to 20 sales.

How do I get reviews with only a few customers?

Ask every customer, right after you deliver, with a direct link. A handful of real reviews early on matters a lot.

Message ten people this week

Write a list of 30 people who know you, and message ten of them this week. For the next stage, see our lead generation guide for small business.

And if admin is eating the time you need for those conversations, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.




Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Email List Cleaning: How to Do It and Why Bounces Hurt

Email List Cleaning: How to Do It and Why Bounces Hurt

You send a newsletter to 3,000 people. A few hundred bounce. Several hundred more haven’t opened anything in two years. And your open rate keeps dropping, even though your content hasn’t changed.

That’s what an unclean list does. Bad addresses and long-silent contacts don’t just sit there harmlessly. They tell email providers that your messages aren’t wanted, and that pushes more of your emails into spam, including the ones going to people who’d happily read them.

Email list cleaning fixes that. Here’s why it matters and how to do it.


Why email list cleaning matters: what a dirty list does

Email providers like Gmail and Outlook watch how people respond to your emails. Some signals that can hurt your sender reputation:

  • Hard bounces: sending to addresses that don’t exist

  • Spam complaints: people marking your email as spam

  • Low engagement: lots of people who never open

  • Spam traps: old or fake addresses providers use to catch careless senders

A poor reputation means more of your emails land in spam folders. And you won’t always know it’s happening.


Hard bounces vs soft bounces

  • Hard bounce: a permanent failure. The address doesn’t exist, the domain is gone, or the server rejects you. Remove these right away.

  • Soft bounce: a temporary problem, like a full inbox or a server issue. Most email tools retry. If an address soft-bounces repeatedly, remove it too.

Most email tools remove hard bounces automatically. Check that yours does.


How to clean your email list, step by step

Step 1: Export your list

Download your full contact list with engagement data: last open, last click, date added and bounce status.


Step 2: Remove hard bounces and repeated soft bounces

If your tool hasn’t already, take them out.


Step 3: Fix obvious typos

“gmial.com,” “yaho.com,” “hotmail.con.” A quick scan of domains catches common mistakes, especially in addresses collected by hand or at the till.


Step 4: Remove duplicates and role addresses where they don’t belong

Duplicates skew your numbers. Addresses like “info@” or “noreply@” sometimes belong on your list (some small businesses only have an info@ address), but review them.


Step 5: Run unverified addresses through a verification tool

Email verification services check whether addresses are valid before you send. Use one for older lists, imported lists, and any list you didn’t build through sign-ups.


Step 6: Deal with inactive subscribers

Pick a cut-off, often 6 to 12 months with no opens or clicks, depending on how often you send. Then:

  1. Send them a short re-engagement email: “Still want to hear from us?” with a clear button.

  2. Keep anyone who clicks.

  3. Remove or suppress the rest.

It feels wrong to shrink your list. But a smaller list of people who read your emails beats a big one that drags your deliverability down.


Step 7: Keep it clean going forward

  • Use double opt-in for website sign-ups where it makes sense

  • Never buy or rent lists

  • Remove bounces and unsubscribes immediately

  • Clean inactive contacts every few months

  • Verify before importing any new list


What cleaning did for one list

Lena runs a small yarn and craft shop in Asheville. Her list had grown to about 4,500 over eight years, collected at the till, at events and online. Opens had been sliding for a year.

She exported the list, removed around 300 bounced or misspelled addresses, sent a “still want to hear from us?” email to about 1,800 people who hadn’t opened in a year, and kept the 200 who clicked. Her list dropped to about 2,600. Her open rate jumped, and her next sale email outsold the previous one, to a smaller list. (Lena is an illustrative example.)


For cold outreach, cleaning is even more important

If you send B2B cold emails, verify every address before you send. Bounces from unverified prospect lists can damage a domain’s reputation quickly, affecting all your business email, not just outreach. Our guide to building a prospect list covers verification as part of the process.

And remember the rules: US commercial emails, including B2B, must follow the FTC’s CAN-SPAM requirements, including honoring opt-outs within 10 business days.


The honest part: it’s tedious, which is why it gets skipped

Exporting, sorting, fixing typos, verifying and re-engaging takes a few hours each time. It’s easy to put off, until deliverability problems make you deal with it.

It’s also easy to hand off. Email verification and list cleaning is a routine service for IncludeWork’s VAs, done in your email tool with your rules for what to keep.


FAQ

How often should I clean my email list?

A full clean every three to six months, and remove bounces and unsubscribes continuously.


What’s a bad bounce rate?

Lower is always better. If bounces are a noticeable share of every send, your list needs cleaning, and you should look at how addresses are being collected.


Will cleaning my list lower my results?

Your list gets smaller, but your open and click rates usually improve, and more of your emails reach inboxes.


What’s the difference between unsubscribing and suppressing a contact?

Unsubscribed contacts asked to stop. Suppressed contacts are ones you’ve chosen not to email, like inactive subscribers. Both should stay out of your sends.


Do I need a paid verification tool?

For small, sign-up-only lists, your email platform’s built-in bounce handling may be enough. For older, imported or prospect lists, a verification tool is worth it.

Export your list this week

Download your list, remove the obvious problems, and plan a re-engagement email for inactive subscribers. For more on the basics, see our email marketing getting-started guide.

If you’d rather someone else do the sorting, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Follow Up With Leads Without Being Annoying

How to Follow Up With Leads Without Being Annoying

You sent the quote. They said, “Looks great, let me run it by my partner.” That was two weeks ago.

Now you’re stuck. Follow up, and you worry about seeming pushy. Don’t, and the job might go to someone who did. Most small business owners pick silence, and quietly lose deals they could have won.

Here’s how to follow up with leads in a way that feels helpful, not desperate, with a timing schedule and messages you can adapt.

Why follow-up matters more than you think

People rarely say no outright. They get busy. They forget. Your quote sits under 40 other emails. Their partner never actually looked at it.

But a polite follow-up isn’t pressure. For most buyers, it’s a useful reminder. The business that follows up well often wins simply because it was the one still in the conversation.

How to follow up with leads: a simple schedule

After a quote, proposal or first conversation:

When

What to do

Same day

Thank them and confirm next steps in writing

2–3 days later

Short check-in: any questions?

About a week later

Add value: an answer, example or useful detail

About two weeks later

Direct question: still interested, timing changed?

About a month later

Polite close: “I’ll leave it here for now”

Adjust the gaps to the size of the decision. A $300 repair can move faster than a $30,000 project.

Add something every time

The difference between “following up” and “chasing” is whether your message gives them anything. Ideas:

  • Answer a question they raised: “You asked about warranty terms. Here’s how ours works.”

  • Share a relevant example: “Here’s a similar kitchen we finished last month.”

  • Remove a hurdle: “We can start in two phases if budget timing is tricky.”

  • Give a useful tip, even if they don’t buy: “Whoever you choose, ask about permit handling.”

  • Share timing information: “Our April schedule is filling up. Wanted to let you know before it does.”

Only mention deadlines and limited availability when they’re true.

Templates you can adapt

The check-in (2–3 days):

Hi Jordan, thanks again for the call on Tuesday. Just checking whether any questions came up about the quote. Happy to walk through anything.

The value add (about a week):

Hi Jordan, you mentioned you were weighing tile vs vinyl for the basement. Here’s a quick comparison we put together, with rough costs for each. Hope it helps either way.

The direct question (about two weeks):

Hi Jordan, wanted to check where things stand on the basement project. Still planning for spring, or has the timing changed? Either answer is completely fine.

The polite close (about a month):

Hi Jordan, I haven’t heard back, so I’ll assume the timing isn’t right. I’ll close this out on my end. If anything changes, just reply to this email and I’ll pick it up.

And that last one often gets a reply. People respond when a door is about to close.

Use more than one channel

If emails go unanswered, try a different channel once: a quick phone call, a text if you’ve texted before, or a LinkedIn message for B2B leads. Some people never read email but answer a call right away.

Know when to stop

Stop when:

  • They say no, or ask you to stop. Respect it immediately.

  • You’ve sent four or five touches with no response.

  • They’ve clearly chosen someone else.

Then mark the lead as lost in your pipeline with the reason, and set a reminder to check in months later if it makes sense. A simple sales pipeline makes this easy to track.

Follow-up that won the job

Ruth runs a small landscape design business in Raleigh. She used to send a quote and wait. Most never replied.

She started a simple routine: thank-you the same day, check-in after three days, a short email with photos of a similar project after a week, and a direct question at two weeks. Within a season, her close rate on quotes went up noticeably, and several clients told her they’d hired her partly because “you actually followed up.” (Ruth is an illustrative example.)

The honest part: follow-up fails on time, not technique

Most owners know they should follow up. But they run out of time, or forget which leads are waiting. That’s a system problem, not a confidence problem.

Put follow-up dates on every open lead, check them daily, and if it’s still slipping, hand off the routine part. A VA can send scheduled check-ins from your templates, log responses and flag the leads that need you personally. That’s part of the client management work IncludeWork’s VAs handle.

FAQ

How many times should I follow up with a lead?

Usually four or five touches over about a month, then a polite close. Stop immediately if they say no.

How soon should I follow up after sending a quote?

Confirm it was received the same day, then check in after two or three days.

What should I say in a follow-up email?

Something useful: an answer, an example, a way to make the decision easier. Then one simple question.

Is it pushy to follow up more than once?

Not if each message is short, polite and adds something. Pushy is repeating “just checking in” with nothing new, or ignoring a no.

Should I follow up by phone or email?

Both can work. Use the channel they used with you first, and try a different one once if you get no reply.

Set up your follow-up dates today

Go through every open quote, add a next follow-up date to each, and send the first batch of check-ins today. For more on keeping deals moving, see our lead generation guide.

If the follow-ups keep slipping, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Set Up a Simple Sales Pipeline in Your CRM

How to Set Up a Simple Sales Pipeline in Your CRM

Where’s that quote you sent three weeks ago? Did anyone follow up with the woman who called about the bathroom remodel? What’s the status of the big deal with the dental group?

If the honest answer is “somewhere in my inbox,” you don’t have a pipeline. You have a memory test. And memory tests lose deals.

A sales pipeline for small business is just a visible list of every potential deal, sorted by how close it is to closing. Set up properly, it takes 10 minutes a day and stops good leads from going cold. Here’s how.


What a sales pipeline for small business looks like

Picture columns on a board, left to right. Each column is a stage. Each card is a deal. Cards move right as the deal progresses, until it’s won or lost.

And that’s it. Most CRMs, including free ones, show your pipeline exactly like this. A spreadsheet works too if you’re just starting.


Step 1: Choose 5–7 simple stages

Keep stages few and clear. A typical small business pipeline:

  1. New lead: someone showed interest or fits your ideal customer

  2. Contacted: you’ve reached out

  3. Conversation: they replied, or you had a call

  4. Proposal sent: quote or proposal is with them

  5. Negotiation: discussing price, scope or timing

  6. Won

  7. Lost

Name stages after what has happened, not what you hope. “Proposal sent” is a fact. “Hot” isn’t.


Step 2: Record the same things for every deal

For each deal, capture:

  • Contact and company

  • Source: where the lead came from (referral, Google, cold email, LinkedIn)

  • Estimated value

  • Stage

  • Next step and its date: the most important field

  • Notes from each conversation

  • Lost reason, if lost

Every open deal should have a next step with a date. A deal with no next step is a deal that’s drifting.


Step 3: Pick a CRM, or start with a spreadsheet

Many CRMs have free or low-cost plans suitable for small businesses. What matters more than which tool:

  • It shows a visual pipeline

  • It reminds you of next steps

  • It connects to your email, or makes logging emails easy

  • You’ll actually open it every day

If you already use a tool with a pipeline feature, use that. Switching tools later is fine.


Step 4: Run a weekly pipeline review

Fifteen to 30 minutes, same time each week:

  • Any deal with no next step? Add one or close it as lost.

  • Any deal stuck in one stage for too long? Follow up or move it.

  • What’s likely to close this month?

  • Where did this week’s leads come from?

But this review is where the pipeline earns its keep. It’s the moment you spot the quote nobody chased.


Step 5: Look at the numbers monthly

After a few months, you’ll have useful data:

  • Conversion between stages: how many conversations turn into proposals, and proposals into wins?

  • Average deal value

  • Time to close

  • Best lead sources: which bring deals that actually close?

These tell you where to focus. If proposals rarely close, look at pricing or the proposal itself. If leads rarely turn into conversations, look at your follow-up.


A pipeline that paid for itself

Hector runs a small remodeling company in San Antonio. He tracked jobs in his head and his text messages. He set up a free CRM with six stages and spent one evening entering every open quote.

The first weekly review turned up 11 quotes sent in the past two months with no follow-up. He called all of them. Three were still deciding, and two signed within the month. Those two jobs were worth more than he’d normally win in a slow quarter. (Hector is an illustrative example.)


Mistakes to avoid

  • Too many stages. If you have to think about where a deal goes, there are too many.

  • Deals with no next step.

  • Not marking deals lost. A pipeline full of dead deals hides the live ones.

  • Updating it once a month. Daily or near-daily updates keep it accurate.

  • Only the owner using it. Anyone who talks to customers should log it.


The honest part: a pipeline is only as good as its updates

The setup takes an afternoon. Keeping it current (logging calls, updating stages, setting next steps) is where most small businesses slip. A CRM that’s two weeks out of date is worse than useless, because you trust it.

If that’s the risk, hand off the upkeep. CRM data entry and pipeline management is routine work for IncludeWork’s VAs: logging activity, updating stages and flagging deals that need your attention.


FAQ

What is a sales pipeline?

A visual list of all your potential deals, organized by stage, from first contact to won or lost.


How many stages should a sales pipeline have?

Five to seven is enough for most small businesses. Fewer, clearer stages are easier to keep accurate.


Do I need a CRM, or can I use a spreadsheet?

A spreadsheet works to start. A CRM becomes worth it when you have more deals than you can track by hand, or more than one person selling.


How often should I review my pipeline?

Briefly every day, and properly once a week.


What’s the most important field in a pipeline?

The next step and its date. It keeps every deal moving.

Set it up this week

Pick your stages, enter every open deal you can find, and give each one a next step. Then put a weekly review in your calendar. For filling the pipeline, see our guide to lead generation for small business.

If the upkeep is what you’ll skip, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Cold Email vs LinkedIn Outreach: Which Gets More Clients?

Cold Email vs LinkedIn Outreach: Which Gets More Clients?


You’ve decided to go out and find clients instead of waiting for them. Good. Now the question every B2B owner hits next: email them, or message them on LinkedIn?

The short answer to cold email vs LinkedIn is that most small businesses do best with both, used for different jobs. But if you only have time for one, the right choice depends on who you’re selling to and how much time you have. Here’s how they compare.

Cold email vs LinkedIn: the quick comparison


Cold email

LinkedIn outreach

Reach

Anyone with a findable email

Anyone active on LinkedIn

Volume

Higher; can send to more people per day

Lower; platform limits on connections and messages

Personal feel

Depends on research

Naturally more personal; they see your profile

Setup

Domain, authentication, verified list

A strong profile and some activity

Speed to results

Often faster

Often slower, but warmer

Main risk

Spam folders and bounces

Being ignored or seen as pushy

Rules

CAN-SPAM in the US; stricter elsewhere

LinkedIn’s own user agreement and limits

Best for

Clear offers to well-defined lists

Relationship-led sales, senior buyers, warm-ups

When cold email works better

  • Your buyers aren’t active on LinkedIn. Many owners of trades businesses, clinics and restaurants rarely log in.

  • You have a clear, simple offer. “Evening office cleaning for medical clinics” can be explained in two lines.

  • You need volume. Email lets you reach more of a well-researched list each week.

  • You can do the setup properly. A verified list, an authenticated domain and honest, CAN-SPAM-compliant emails. The FTC notes the law makes no exception for business-to-business email.

Our guide on writing cold emails that get replies covers the structure.

When LinkedIn works better

  • Your buyers live there. Marketing leaders, founders, consultants, recruiters, HR and finance professionals.

  • The sale is about trust. Higher-priced services, advisory work, anything where they’ll want to check who you are.

  • You’re selling to senior people. A personal note from a real profile, after engaging with their posts, often lands better than an email.

  • You’re building a long-term presence. Your posts keep working while you’re doing outreach.

See LinkedIn for small business owners for the profile and posting side.

Using both together

The strongest approach for many B2B businesses combines them:

  1. View their profile and engage with a recent post on LinkedIn.

  2. Send a connection request with a short personal note. No pitch.

  3. Send a cold email a few days later, referencing something specific.

  4. Follow up on whichever channel they respond to.

Each touch makes the next one feel less cold. And people who ignore email sometimes answer on LinkedIn, and the reverse.

One business, two channels

Nadia runs a three-person web design studio in Seattle selling to dental and physical therapy practices. Practice owners rarely answered LinkedIn messages, but office managers read email. Meanwhile, the larger multi-location groups she wanted had marketing directors who were very active on LinkedIn.

She split her outreach: cold email to single-location practices, LinkedIn for multi-location groups. Email produced more meetings. LinkedIn produced fewer, but bigger contracts. Both were worth keeping. (Nadia is an illustrative example.)

The honest part: both take steady effort

Neither channel works in a week, and both fall apart if you only do them when sales are slow. The research (finding the right people, checking signals, verifying emails) is the same work either way, and it’s where most of the time goes.

If you want to keep the conversations and hand off the groundwork, IncludeWork’s VAs handle LinkedIn outreach support and cold email list building, from research to tracking replies.

FAQ

Is cold email or LinkedIn better for B2B?

Neither is better everywhere. Cold email usually reaches more people faster. LinkedIn is often warmer and better for senior buyers. Many businesses use both.

Does LinkedIn limit outreach?

Yes. LinkedIn limits connection requests and messages, and its user agreement restricts automated activity. Mass automation can get accounts restricted.

Can I message people on LinkedIn without connecting?

Sometimes, depending on their settings and your account type. Connecting first with a personal note is usually more effective.

Which gets better replies?

LinkedIn replies are often warmer. Email often produces more replies in total because you can reach more people. Track both and compare meetings booked, not just replies.

Do I need sales software for this?

Not to start. A spreadsheet or simple CRM to track every contact, channel and next step is enough.

Test both for 30 days

Pick 30 well-researched prospects. Contact half by email and half on LinkedIn, then compare meetings booked. Your own results will tell you more than any comparison article.

If research time is the limit, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Write a Cold Email That Gets Replies

How to Write a Cold Email That Gets Replies

Here’s a cold email most people have received:

Subject: Partnership opportunity Hi there, I hope this email finds you well. My name is Mark and I’m the CEO of GrowthCo, a leading provider of innovative solutions for businesses like yours. We help companies increase revenue and efficiency. Would you have 30 minutes this week for a call?

And it gets deleted in two seconds. It’s about the sender, it’s vague, and it asks for a big commitment from a stranger.

Learning how to write a cold email that gets replies mostly means doing the opposite: short, specific, about them, with a small ask. Here’s the structure.


How to write a cold email in 4 parts

1. A reason you’re writing to them

Open with something specific to this person or company. Not flattery. A real observation:

  • “Saw you’re hiring a second Revit drafter.”

  • “Noticed you just opened your Scottsdale location.”

  • “Your post on month-end close times stuck with me.”

This one line proves the email isn’t a mass blast.


2. The problem you can help with

Connect that observation to a likely problem, in their language:

  • “Usually that means project deadlines are stacking up faster than you can hire.”


3. One line on how you help, with proof

  • “We provide drafting support to architecture firms, typically turning around CD sets in 48 hours. A 12-person firm in Dallas used us through a hiring gap last spring.”

Keep it to one or two sentences. Specific beats impressive.


4. A small, easy ask

Ask for something low-effort:

  • “Worth a quick reply if that’s useful?”

  • “Want me to send over a two-page sample?”

  • “Open to a 15-minute call next week?”

A reply is a smaller ask than a meeting. Start there.


A complete example

Subject: Revit drafter hiring

Hi Elena,

Saw Rivera Architects is hiring a second Revit drafter. Usually that means deadlines are stacking up faster than you can hire.

We provide drafting support to architecture firms, typically turning around CD sets within 48 hours. A 12-person firm in Dallas used us to cover a three-month hiring gap last spring.

Want me to send a short sample set so you can judge the quality?

Thanks, Sam

Under 100 words. About her. One clear ask.


Subject lines

  • Short, lowercase-friendly, specific: “revit drafter hiring,” “question about your Scottsdale opening”

  • No hype, no ALL CAPS, no fake “Re:” or “Fwd:”

  • Honest. The FTC’s CAN-SPAM rules prohibit deceptive subject lines.


Follow-ups: where most replies come from

But many replies come from follow-ups, not the first email. A simple sequence:

  1. Day 1: first email

  2. Day 3–4: short follow-up: “Bumping this in case it got buried. Happy to send that sample.”

  3. Day 8–10: add value: a useful tip, a relevant case study, or a different angle

  4. Day 15–20: a polite close: “I’ll stop here. If drafting help becomes useful later, just reply.”

Stop after three or four touches. Respect a “no” right away.


Keep it legal and out of spam

  • CAN-SPAM applies to B2B email. The FTC says the law makes no exception for business-to-business email. Use accurate sender details and honest subject lines, include your physical postal address, give a clear way to opt out, and honor opt-outs within 10 business days.

  • Verify your list. High bounce rates damage your sender reputation. See how to clean your email list.

  • Set up email authentication (SPF, DKIM and DMARC) on your domain. Major email providers like Gmail and Yahoo expect it from senders.

  • Send in small volumes from a properly set-up domain, not hundreds a day from a brand-new address.

  • Different countries have different rules. Some require prior consent. Check before emailing outside the US. This is general information, not legal advice.


One owner’s rewrite

Marcus runs a small commercial cleaning company in Columbus. His first cold emails were a paragraph about his company, sent to “info@” addresses. Zero replies from 200 sends.

He rebuilt the approach: a researched list of 60 office managers at medical practices, an opening line about each practice’s new location or long opening hours, one sentence about evening cleaning for clinics, and the ask “Want a free quote walkthrough next week?” plus two follow-ups. He booked nine walkthroughs and won four contracts. (Marcus is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: cold email is mostly research

The writing takes minutes. The research takes hours: finding the right people, the right signals and verified emails. Skip the research and even great writing fails.

That’s the part to hand off if you’re short on time. IncludeWork’s VAs handle cold email marketing support, from list research and verification to sending and tracking replies, while you handle the conversations.


FAQ

How long should a cold email be?

Short. Under 100 to 125 words is a good target. Busy people read short emails.


What’s a good reply rate for cold email?

It varies widely by industry, list quality and offer. Track your own numbers and improve them, rather than chasing a benchmark.


How many follow-ups should I send?

Two or three after the first email, spread over two to three weeks. Then stop.


Should I use templates?

Use a structure, not a copy-paste template. The opening line should be written for each person.


Is cold emailing legal?

In the US, B2B cold email is legal if you follow CAN-SPAM rules. Other countries, especially in the EU, have stricter consent rules. Check the rules where your recipients are.

Write five this week

Pick five companies from your list, find one real reason to write to each, and send five short emails using the structure above. For building that list, see how to build a B2B prospect list.

And if research is what’s holding you back, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Build a B2B Prospect List From Scratch

How to Build a B2B Prospect List From Scratch

Cold outreach lives or dies on the list.

A great email sent to the wrong person goes nowhere. An average email sent to exactly the right person, at the right company, at the right time, often gets a reply. That’s why the people who get results from outbound sales spend more time on the list than on the message.

Here’s how to build a prospect list from scratch: who to put on it, where to find them, what to record, and how to keep it accurate.


How to build a prospect list

step 1: define your ideal customer

Before you look for anyone, write down who you’re looking for. Be specific:

  • Industry: independent restaurants, dental practices, architecture firms, SaaS companies

  • Size: number of employees or locations

  • Location: city, state, region or country

  • Signals: hiring for a role you can help with, opening a new location, recent funding, using a particular tool, a weak website

  • Decision-maker: owner, office manager, head of marketing, operations director

A tight definition makes every later step faster. “Architecture firms with 5–30 staff in Texas, hiring a drafter” is a list you can actually build.


Step 2: Find the companies

Good sources, depending on your market:

  • Google Maps and local directories for local businesses

  • Industry associations and member directories

  • LinkedIn company search, filtered by industry, size and location

  • Trade show exhibitor and attendee lists

  • Job boards, to spot companies hiring for a role related to what you sell

  • Review sites and marketplaces relevant to your industry

  • Government and public registries, for licensed trades and professions

And start with 50 to 100 companies. A smaller, accurate list beats a huge, messy one.


Step 3: Find the right person

For each company, find the person who’d actually buy:

  • Check the company’s website: “About,” “Team” and “Contact” pages

  • Search LinkedIn for the role at that company

  • Look at press releases, podcasts or local news mentioning the company

In small companies, it’s often the owner. In larger ones, it’s usually the head of the relevant department.


Step 4: Find and verify contact details

Email addresses can come from company websites, LinkedIn, and email-finding tools that guess common formats. Whatever the source, verify before you send. Unverified emails bounce, and bounces hurt your sender reputation. Our guide on cleaning your email list explains why.


Step 5: Organize it properly

Use a spreadsheet or CRM with one row per person and consistent columns:

Column

Example

Company

Rivera Architects

Website

example.com

Industry

Architecture

Size

12 staff

Location

Austin, TX

Contact name

Elena Rivera

Title

Principal

Email (verified)

[email protected]

LinkedIn URL

linkedin.com/in/…

Signal / reason

Hiring a Revit drafter

Source

LinkedIn job post

Status

Not contacted

The “Signal” column is the one that makes outreach personal. It’s the reason you’re writing to them, now.


Step 6: Keep it fresh

People change jobs. And companies close, move or get bought. Re-check older contacts before each campaign, remove bounces right away, and record replies and opt-outs so nobody gets contacted twice by mistake.


One list, built right

Ana runs a small HR consulting firm in Charlotte. Her first outreach attempt used a bought list of 2,000 “HR contacts.” Most emails bounced, and the two replies were unsubscribes.

Her second list was 80 companies: manufacturers in North and South Carolina with 50 to 200 employees, posting job ads for HR roles (a sign they were stretched). For each, she found the owner or operations director and verified the email. Her first campaign to that list booked six calls. (Ana is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: it’s slow, careful work

Building a good prospect list takes time. Ten to fifteen minutes per contact is normal when you’re researching signals and verifying emails. That’s why most owners either skip it or buy lists that don’t work.

It’s also very delegable. Prospect research follows clear rules once your ideal customer is defined. IncludeWork’s VAs build prospect lists to client specifications every day, from company research to verified contacts.


FAQ

How many prospects should be on my first list?

50 to 100 is plenty to start. It’s enough to test your message and small enough to research properly.


Should I buy a prospect list?

Usually not. Bought lists are often outdated and poorly targeted, and high bounce rates can damage your email reputation. A researched list performs much better.


What information do I need for each prospect?

At minimum: company, name, title, verified email, and a reason you’re contacting them. Website, LinkedIn and location help with personalization.


Is it legal to email prospects I find online?

In the US, B2B cold email is allowed under CAN-SPAM if you follow its rules, including honest headers and subject lines, your physical address and a clear opt-out. The FTC notes the law makes no exception for business-to-business email. Other countries have stricter rules. This is general information, not legal advice.


How often should I update my list?

Before every campaign, and remove bounces and opt-outs immediately.

Build your first 50 this week

Write your ideal customer definition, pick two sources, and research 50 companies. Then write to them. Our guide to writing cold emails that get replies covers the next step.

If research hours are the problem, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Give them your ideal customer definition and see what list comes back. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Lead Generation for Small Business: 12 Methods That Work

Lead Generation for Small Business: 12 Methods That Work

Most small businesses get their first customers the same way: friends, former colleagues, word of mouth. It works, until it doesn’t. One quiet month, and you realize you have no idea where the next client is coming from.

That’s the point where lead generation for small business stops being optional. A “lead” is just someone who might buy from you and has shown some sign of interest, or fits your ideal customer closely enough to be worth contacting. The goal is a steady, predictable flow of them.

Here are 12 methods that work for small businesses, how to choose between them, and how to keep the flow going.


Lead generation for small business, part 1: inbound (people come to you)

1. Google Business Profile

For local businesses, a complete, active profile with steady reviews is often the biggest free source of leads. Our Google Business Profile guide covers the setup.


2. Service pages that answer real searches

One clear page per service, with your location, pricing guidance and FAQs. See SEO for small business for the order to do things in.


3. Helpful content

Blog posts, guides and checklists that answer what customers ask. Each one is a door into your business.


4. A lead magnet

A useful checklist or guide offered in exchange for an email. It turns website visitors into contacts you can follow up with.


5. Social media

One platform, posted on consistently, with real work and real faces. Works best when you reply to every comment and message.


Relationships: people send leads to you

6. Referrals from customers

Your happiest customers are your best salespeople. Ask them directly, make it easy, and thank them when they do. Our guide on setting up a referral program shows how.


7. Referral partners

Businesses that serve the same customers without competing: an accountant and a bookkeeper, a realtor and a home inspector, a web designer and a copywriter. Agree to send each other work.


8. Local networking and associations

Chambers of commerce, industry associations, business groups. Show up regularly and help first.


Outbound: you go to them

9. Cold email

Short, relevant emails to businesses that match your ideal customer. Works well for B2B services when the list is accurate and the message is personal. See how to write cold emails that get replies.


10. LinkedIn outreach

Connecting and starting real conversations with decision-makers. Slower than email, but often warmer. We compared the two in cold email vs LinkedIn outreach.


11. Paid ads

Google Ads for people searching for what you sell. Social ads for reaching specific audiences. Best once you know your offer and your numbers.


12. Events and workshops

Host or speak at events your customers attend. A 30-minute talk can bring in more qualified leads than months of posts.


How to choose your three

Don’t try all 12. But do pick three, based on:

  • Who you sell to. Local consumers lean on Google, reviews and referrals. B2B services lean on cold email, LinkedIn and partnerships.

  • How fast you need leads. Outbound and ads are faster. SEO and content take months but keep working.

  • What you have more of: time or money. Most methods trade one for the other.

  • What you’ll actually keep doing. A method you’ll do every week beats a better one you’ll drop in a month.

A common mix for a new B2B service business: referral partners, cold email and LinkedIn. For a local service: Google Business Profile, reviews and referrals.


Keep track, or you’re guessing

Every lead should be recorded somewhere, even a spreadsheet, with:

  • Where it came from

  • Date of first contact

  • Status (new, contacted, meeting, proposal, won, lost)

  • Next step and date

And review it weekly. After three months, you’ll know which methods bring customers, not just leads. A simple sales pipeline in a CRM makes this easier.


One business, three methods

Kenji runs a two-person bookkeeping firm in Phoenix that works with restaurants. Word of mouth had dried up after a year.

He chose three methods. Referral partners: two local restaurant accountants and a POS reseller. Cold email: 40 personalized emails a week to independent restaurants, from a researched list. And his Google Business Profile, with a review request after every onboarding. Within four months, he had a steady 8 to 10 new conversations a month, and he knew which method each one came from. (Kenji is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: lead gen is a weekly job

Every method here needs regular work: building lists, writing emails, following up, posting, updating the tracker. Most small businesses stop when they get busy, then wonder why things go quiet three months later.

If you know that’s your pattern, protect a weekly block. Or hand off the research and admin side. Building prospect lists, finding verified emails and keeping the CRM up to date is work IncludeWork’s sales and lead generation VAs handle every day.


FAQ

What is lead generation?

Finding people or businesses who might buy from you and starting a conversation with them. Inbound methods attract them to you. Outbound methods reach out to them directly.


What’s the best lead generation method for a small business?

It depends on who you sell to. Referrals work for almost everyone. Local businesses often do best with Google Business Profile and reviews. B2B services often do well with cold email and LinkedIn.


How many leads does a small business need?

Work backwards. If you need four new clients a month and close one in five conversations, you need about 20 qualified conversations a month.


Is buying leads a good idea?

Usually not for small businesses. Bought lists are often outdated and untargeted. A smaller, researched list of the right businesses works much better.


How long does lead generation take to work?

Outbound methods can produce conversations within weeks. Inbound methods like SEO and content often take several months.

Pick your three this week

Choose three methods, set a weekly target for each, and start tracking every lead in one place.

If list-building and follow-ups are the bottleneck, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Use AI to Write Marketing Content That Sounds Human

How to Use AI to Write Marketing Content That Sounds Human

“In today’s fast-paced digital landscape, businesses must leverage innovative solutions to unlock their full potential.”

You’ve read that sentence a thousand times. So have your customers. It’s what AI writing sounds like when nobody edits it, and people scroll past it without a second thought.

But AI can still save you hours on marketing content. The trick is using it for the parts it’s good at, and doing the parts only you can do. Here’s how to approach AI content writing for small business so the result still sounds like you.


AI content writing for small business: what AI does well, and what it doesn’t

Good at:

  • Getting past the blank page

  • Turning rough notes into a first draft

  • Suggesting headlines, subject lines and outlines

  • Rewriting something shorter, simpler or for a different platform

  • Summarizing long documents

Not good at:

  • Knowing your customers, your prices or your stories

  • Being accurate about facts, numbers and current events without checking

  • Having an opinion worth reading

  • Sounding like a specific person

So let AI draft. You supply the substance and do the final edit.


Step 1: Feed it real material

Generic prompts get generic writing. Instead of “Write a blog post about roof maintenance,” give it what only you know:

  • The question a customer asked this week

  • Your opinion, in your own words

  • A real example (anonymized if needed)

  • Your prices, process or service area

  • Who the post is for

For example: “Write a 600-word post for homeowners in Denver about why they should check their gutters in October. Use this story: last November a client’s gutters overflowed and damaged their fascia boards, a $1,400 repair that a $150 cleaning would have prevented. Plain language. No jargon. End by inviting them to book a gutter check.”


Step 2: Give it a style guide

Tell the AI how you write, and what to avoid:

  • “Short sentences. Plain words. Write like a friendly expert talking to a customer.”

  • “Don’t use: leverage, unlock, seamless, game-changer, in today’s world.”

  • Paste in a piece of your own writing and ask it to match the tone.

Save this as a reusable prompt so every draft starts in your voice.


Step 3: Edit like a human

This is the part that turns AI output into content people read. On every draft:

  • Cut the first paragraph. AI intros are usually throat-clearing. Start with the second.

  • Delete filler words: “truly,” “very,” “incredibly,” “it’s important to note.”

  • Break up the rhythm. AI loves sentences of the same length. Mix short and long.

  • Add one detail only you know. A name, a number, a place, a mistake you’ve seen.

  • Read it out loud. If you wouldn’t say it to a customer, rewrite it.


Step 4: Check every fact

AI tools can state wrong things confidently: outdated prices, made-up statistics, laws that don’t exist. Before publishing:

  • Verify every number and claim against an official or original source

  • Remove any statistic you can’t find a source for

  • Check dates, names and product details

This matters for trust, and for search. Google’s own guidance says content people find compelling and useful is what most influences search results. The SEO Starter Guide makes no exception for how it was written. Unchecked, generic content is the opposite of that.


Where AI saves the most time

  • Repurposing: turn a blog post into social posts, an email and a checklist. See how to repurpose one post into 10 pieces.

  • Subject lines and headlines: ask for ten, pick one, tweak it.

  • First drafts of routine content: FAQs, product descriptions, service page outlines.

  • Rewriting for different lengths: a long post into a 100-word newsletter blurb.


One owner’s workflow

Hana runs a small accounting practice in Portland. She used to spend a whole Sunday on each monthly blog post. Now she records a five-minute voice memo on her drive home, answering a client question in her own words. She pastes the transcript into an AI tool with her saved style prompt and asks for a 700-word draft.

Then she spends 30 minutes editing: cutting the intro, adding a real (anonymized) example, checking every figure against IRS pages. The post still sounds like her, because the ideas and stories are hers. It takes about an hour instead of a day. (Hana is an illustrative example.)


The honest part

AI makes content faster. It doesn’t make it good on its own. The businesses getting results are the ones treating AI as a first-draft assistant, not a replacement for knowing their customers.

If you’d like help with the process (drafting from your notes, editing, fact-checking and formatting), IncludeWork offers AI article writing and content support, with a person editing every piece before it reaches you.


FAQ

Can I use AI to write my business blog?

Yes, as a drafting tool. Give it real material, edit the result properly and check every fact before publishing.


Will Google penalize AI-written content?

Google’s focus is on whether content is helpful and trustworthy. Thin, generic or inaccurate content tends to perform poorly however it’s made. Edit and fact-check AI drafts.


How do I make AI writing sound like me?

Give it examples of your writing, a list of words to avoid, and real stories and opinions from your business. Then edit it out loud.


Should I tell customers I use AI?

That’s your call, but never let AI invent reviews, testimonials, quotes or claims about results. Everything you publish should be true.


What’s the biggest mistake with AI content?

Publishing the first draft. Unedited AI content is easy to spot and easy to ignore.


Try it on one post this week

Record a voice memo answering a customer question, turn it into a draft with AI, and spend 30 minutes editing it into your voice.

And if you’d rather someone else handle the drafting and editing, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
7 Email Automation Workflows for Small Business

7 Email Automation Workflows for Small Business

Most small business email is manual. You write a newsletter, send it, and start again next month.

But email marketing automation is different. You write an email once, set a trigger (someone signs up, buys, or goes quiet), and it sends itself to every person who meets that trigger, for years. Set up a few good ones, and your email works while you’re busy doing everything else.

Here are seven workflows worth setting up, in roughly the order to build them.


1. Welcome series

Trigger: someone joins your list.

What to send: two or three emails over the first week or two.

  1. Thank them, confirm what they’ll get, and deliver anything you promised.

  2. Introduce your business: who you are, what you’re known for, a customer story.

  3. Make a gentle offer or invite them to take the next step.

New subscribers are paying the most attention, so this is usually the most valuable automation to start with.


2. Post-purchase or post-service follow-up

Trigger: someone buys or completes a service.

What to send:

  • A thank-you and what happens next

  • Tips for using what they bought, or caring for the work you did

  • A few days later, a request for a review

And this builds loyalty and brings in reviews without you remembering to ask each time.


3. Review request

Trigger: a set number of days after a purchase or job.

What to send: a short, friendly ask with a direct link to your review page. One reminder a few days later if they haven’t clicked. Our guide on getting more Google reviews covers the wording.


4. Abandoned cart (for online shops)

Trigger: someone adds items to their cart but doesn’t buy.

What to send: a reminder within a few hours, showing what they left. Optionally a second email a day later. Many shop platforms and email tools support this out of the box.


5. Appointment or renewal reminders

Trigger: an upcoming appointment, or the time a service usually needs repeating.

What to send: “It’s been six months since your last dental cleaning.” “Your annual HVAC service is due.” “Your subscription renews in 7 days.”

For service businesses with repeat work, this one can quietly fill your calendar.


6. Lead nurture

Trigger: someone requests a quote or downloads a guide but doesn’t buy.

What to send: a short series over a few weeks with useful content, answers to common objections, a customer story, and a clear invitation to book or reply.


7. Win-back

Trigger: a customer hasn’t bought or opened in a long time.

What to send: “We miss you” with something useful or an offer. If they still don’t engage, consider removing them from your list. It keeps your list healthy.


How to set up email marketing automation

  1. Check your tool. Most email platforms include automations, though some limit them on free plans. We compared tools in the best email marketing software for small business.

  2. Start with one. The welcome series is usually the best first build.

  3. Write in plain language. Automated doesn’t mean robotic. Write like you’d write to one customer.

  4. Test it. Sign up with your own email and check every step.

  5. Review every few months. Update offers, dates and links.


Three automations, one small business

Rosa runs a small skincare brand selling online from Tucson. Her email list was growing, but she only emailed when she launched something new.

She set up three automations: a three-email welcome series with her skincare routine guide, an abandoned-cart reminder, and a “running low?” email 45 days after each purchase, timed to when a bottle usually runs out. It took two afternoons. Those three workflows now send every day without her touching them, and the reorder email became one of her steadiest sources of sales. (Rosa is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: automation still needs a person

Automations save time every week, but setting them up properly takes a few focused hours, and they need occasional checking. Broken links, old offers and outdated dates make automated emails look careless.

If the setup is what’s stopping you, hand it off. Email campaign setup and management is a task IncludeWork’s VAs handle, from building workflows in your tool to testing and reporting. And whatever you automate, US marketing emails must follow the FTC’s CAN-SPAM rules, including a clear way to unsubscribe.


FAQ

What is email marketing automation?

Emails that send automatically when someone does something, like signing up, buying or going quiet, instead of you sending each one by hand.


Which email automation should I set up first?

A welcome series. New subscribers are most engaged, and it’s the easiest to build.


Do I need expensive software for automation?

No. Many affordable email tools include automation, although some reserve it for paid plans. Check before choosing.


Can automated emails feel personal?

Yes. Use the person’s name, write in a natural voice, and make each email useful. Short, plain emails often feel more personal than designed ones.


How many emails should be in a welcome series?

Two to four is common. Enough to introduce yourself and offer value, not so many that people unsubscribe.


Build your first one this week

Set up a simple two-email welcome series this week. When it’s running, add the next one. For the basics, see our email marketing getting-started guide.

If you’d rather someone else build it, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
LinkedIn for Small Business: Get Clients Without Being Pushy

LinkedIn for Small Business: Get Clients Without Being Pushy

You accept a connection request. Four minutes later: “Hi! I noticed we’re connected. I help businesses like yours 10x their revenue. Do you have 15 minutes this week?”

Everyone hates that message. And yet it’s what a lot of people think LinkedIn marketing is.

It isn’t. For B2B services, consultants and professional firms, LinkedIn can be one of the best places to find clients. But it works like a room full of professionals, not a mailing list. Here’s how to use LinkedIn for small business in a way that brings in work without making anyone cringe.


Who LinkedIn for small business works best for

LinkedIn is strongest when your buyers are businesses or professionals:

  • Accountants, bookkeepers, lawyers and consultants

  • Agencies, designers, developers and IT services

  • B2B suppliers and manufacturers

  • Coaches and trainers selling to companies

  • Recruiters and HR services

If you sell mostly to consumers, like a bakery or salon, other channels will usually serve you better.


Step 1: Fix your profile first

Your profile is where every conversation leads. Make sure it answers “what do you do, and for whom?” in five seconds.

  • Photo: a clear, friendly headshot.

  • Headline: not just your title. “Bookkeeper for construction companies | Month-end reports by the 10th” beats “Owner at Smith Bookkeeping.”

  • About section: who you help, the problem you solve, how you work, and how to contact you. Write it in plain language.

  • Featured section: a case study, a useful guide, or a link to book a call.

  • Company page: create one for your business and link it, but know that most engagement happens on personal profiles.


Step 2: Connect with the right people

Build your network around the people who buy from you or refer to you:

  • Current and past clients

  • Referral partners (accountants, lawyers, agencies)

  • People in the industries and roles you serve

Send a short, personal note with requests when you can: “We met at the chamber breakfast. Enjoyed your point about hiring.” No pitch.


Step 3: Post what your buyers care about

Two or three posts a week is plenty. Useful post types:

  • Lessons from real work: “What we changed that cut a client’s month-end close from 15 days to 5.”

  • Common mistakes in your field, and how to avoid them

  • Answers to questions clients ask you

  • Opinions on news in your industry, with your reasoning

  • Behind the scenes: how you work, who’s on the team

Write like you talk. Short paragraphs, plain words, one idea per post.


Step 4: Comment before you post more

Thoughtful comments on other people’s posts often do more than your own posts at first. Pick 10 to 20 people your buyers follow, and add useful comments to their posts several times a week. It puts your name in front of their audience and starts relationships naturally.


Step 5: Turn conversations into clients, gently

The pushy DM fails because it skips the relationship. A better path:

  1. Engage first. Comment on their posts, reply to their comments on yours.

  2. Start a real conversation. Reference something specific they said.

  3. Offer something useful, like a guide, an introduction or an answer, with no strings.

  4. Ask when it’s natural. “Sounds like month-end is painful at the moment. Want to have a quick chat about how other firms handle it?”

It takes longer than a cold pitch. It also works.


One owner’s LinkedIn routine

Daniel runs a small IT managed-services company in Minneapolis, supporting offices of 10 to 50 people. He’d ignored LinkedIn for years.

He rewrote his headline (“IT support for small law and accounting firms”), posted twice a week about real problems he’d fixed, and spent 15 minutes a day commenting on posts by office managers and firm owners. After four months, three new clients had found him through LinkedIn, and a local accounting firm started referring clients after reading his posts on data backups. (Daniel is an illustrative example.)


What not to do

  • Pitch in the first message after connecting

  • Automate mass messages that sound like a template

  • Post only about yourself and your offers

  • Disappear for months, then post five times in a week


The honest part: it’s a slow build

LinkedIn rarely works in a week. It’s a few months of steady posting, commenting and conversations before the enquiries come. The owners who get results are the ones who keep a small daily habit going.

If you want to keep the voice and conversations but hand off the rest (formatting posts, scheduling, tracking who’s engaged, researching prospects), that’s the kind of support a LinkedIn VA provides.


FAQ

Is LinkedIn good for small businesses?

For B2B and professional services, often yes. For consumer businesses, other platforms usually work better.


Should I post from my personal profile or company page?

Mostly your personal profile. People engage with people. Use the company page as a home for your business details and share posts from it too.


How often should I post on LinkedIn?

Two or three times a week is a good start. Consistency matters more than volume.


Is it OK to message people I don’t know?

Yes, if the message is personal and relevant, and doesn’t open with a pitch. Engaging with their posts first makes it much more natural.


How long until LinkedIn brings clients?

Usually a few months of consistent activity. Referrals and word of mouth often start before direct enquiries do.


Start with your headline

Rewrite your headline today so it says who you help and how. Then set a 15-minute daily reminder to comment on three posts.

And if you’d like help with the routine parts, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours. For the outreach side, see cold email vs LinkedIn outreach.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Facebook Ads for Small Business: Budget and Results

Facebook Ads for Small Business: Budget and Results

“I tried Facebook ads once. Spent $200, got nothing.”

It’s one of the most common things small business owners say about paid social. Usually, the problem wasn’t the platform. It was the setup: a vague audience, no clear offer, and no way to tell what counted as a result.

Facebook ads for small business can work well, especially for local businesses and e-commerce. But they reward planning and punish guessing. Here’s how to decide what to spend, set up a fair test, and know what to expect.


Facebook ads for small business: what to do before you spend anything

Three things need to be in place first. Without them, most ad budgets disappear.

  1. A clear offer. Not “check out our business.” Something specific: “Free brake check this month,” “20% off your first order,” “Book a free design consult.”

  2. A place to send people that makes acting easy: a booking page, a product page, a simple lead form.

  3. A way to measure results. Install the Meta Pixel on your website, or use lead forms inside Facebook, so you can see which ads produce bookings, leads or sales.


How much should a small business spend?

There’s no correct number. What matters is spending enough, for long enough, to learn something.

A practical way to set a test budget:

  1. Decide what a customer is worth to you. Say a new client is worth $300 in profit over a year.

  2. Decide what you’d pay to get one. Maybe $75.

  3. Plan to get enough results to judge. If you’d want at least 5 to 10 results to decide whether ads work, that’s $375 to $750 at your target cost.

Spread that over two to four weeks. That’s your test budget. Treat it as the price of learning, not a guaranteed return.

If that’s more than you can risk right now, it may be better to wait and focus on free channels first. Spending $5 a day for a week rarely tells you much.


Setting up a simple first test

  • Objective: choose the one that matches your goal: leads, sales, messages or traffic to a booking page.

  • Audience: start local and specific. A realistic radius around your business, and ages or interests that fit your real customers.

  • Creative: two or three versions. Real photos of your work or products usually beat stock images. Short videos work well too.

  • Copy: lead with the offer and the benefit. Keep it short. One clear call to action.

  • Placements: let Meta’s automatic placements run at first unless you have a reason not to.

Then leave it alone for several days. Changing everything daily makes it impossible to learn what’s working.


What to expect

  • The first few days are noisy. Results often settle after the ad has run for a while.

  • Some ads will fail. That’s normal. Turn off the weak ones and put the budget behind the winner.

  • Likes aren’t results. Judge ads on bookings, leads, messages or sales, and what each one cost.

  • Local services and e-commerce often see clearer results than businesses with long, complex sales.


When to stop, fix or scale

After your test period, look at cost per result against the target you set:

  • Well under target: increase the budget gradually and keep watching.

  • Near target: test a new offer, image or audience to improve it.

  • Well over target, with enough results to judge: stop, and rethink the offer or landing page before trying again.


A test that worked

Maya runs a small window-cleaning company in Denver. Her first attempt at ads was a boosted post saying “We clean windows!” It got likes and no bookings.

Her second try: an ad for “Spring window cleaning, $25 off before April 30,” with before-and-after photos, targeted to homeowners within 10 miles, sent to a simple booking page. She set a $600 budget over three weeks, aiming for no more than $60 per booking. She got 14 bookings at an average of about $43 each, and several became regular customers. (Maya is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: ads need attention

Facebook ads aren’t “set and forget.” Someone has to check results, turn off weak ads, refresh images and answer the messages and comments ads bring in. Leads that wait a day for a reply often go cold.

If you’ll run ads but can’t watch them daily, plan for that. A VA can handle Facebook ads support, from replying to leads and messages to pulling weekly results into a simple report, while you make the budget calls.


FAQ

Are Facebook ads worth it for small businesses?

They can be, with a clear offer, a local or specific audience and proper tracking. Without those, most small budgets are wasted.


What’s the minimum I can spend on Facebook ads?

Meta lets you start with small daily budgets. But very small budgets often don’t produce enough results to learn from. Budget for enough results to make a decision.


Should I boost posts or use Ads Manager?

Boosting is simpler and fine for promoting posts that already do well. Ads Manager gives you more control over objectives, audiences and testing.


Do Facebook ads also show on Instagram?

They can. Meta’s ad system can place your ads across Facebook, Instagram and other placements.


How long should I run a test?

Usually two to four weeks, without constant changes, so you have enough results to judge.


Plan the test before you spend

Write down your offer, your target cost per customer and your test budget before you open Ads Manager. For the wider plan, see our guide to social media marketing on a small budget.

If you’ll need help with replies and reporting, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
SEO for Small Business: What to Do First

SEO for Small Business: What to Do First

SEO advice is overwhelming. Backlinks, schema, Core Web Vitals, keyword density, E-E-A-T. Most of it is written for large sites with marketing teams.

But a small business doesn’t need all of it. It needs the right few things, done in the right order. Google’s own SEO Starter Guide makes the point plainly: creating content people find compelling and useful will likely influence your presence in search results more than any of its other suggestions.

So here’s SEO for small business, in the order that usually matters most.

SEO for small business

step 1: make sure Google can find your site

Before anything else:

  • Search for your business name. Does your site show up?

  • Set up Google Search Console. It’s free, shows which searches bring people to your site, and flags problems.

  • Check your site works on a phone. Most local searches happen on mobile.

If your site isn’t showing up at all, fix that first. Nothing else matters until it does.

Step 2: One clear page per service

A single “Services” page listing everything you do makes it hard for Google to match you to specific searches.

Instead, give each main service its own page: “Water heater repair,” “Drain cleaning,” “Bathroom remodeling.” Each page should explain:

  • What the service is and who it’s for

  • Where you offer it

  • Rough pricing or what affects the price

  • Common questions

  • How to contact you

And this alone often helps small business sites more than anything else on this list.

Step 3: Write titles and descriptions that match searches

Every page has a title that shows in search results. Google’s guide says a good title is unique to the page, clear and concise, and accurately describes the page.

  • Good: “Water Heater Repair in Tulsa | Same-Day Service | Smith Plumbing”

  • Weak: “Home | Smith Plumbing”

Write a short description for each page too, telling people what they’ll find and why to click.

Step 4: Do local SEO properly

For local businesses, this is often where the quickest wins are:

  • Complete your Google Business Profile and keep it active. Our Google Business Profile guide covers every step.

  • Keep your name, address and phone number identical on your website, profile and directories.

  • Mention your service area naturally on your service pages.

  • Collect reviews steadily.

Step 5: Answer the questions your customers ask

Every question customers ask you is a search someone is typing into Google. Write helpful pages or blog posts answering them: “How much does a new roof cost?” “How long does a bathroom remodel take?”

Write for people first. Clear, specific answers from someone who does the work every day are exactly what search engines are trying to find.

Step 6: Link your pages together

Link from blog posts to the relevant service pages, and between related posts. Google’s guide notes that links help connect users and search engines to other parts of your site. It also helps visitors find what to do next.

Step 7: Earn a few good links

Links from other relevant websites help. Good sources for small businesses:

  • Local chambers of commerce and business groups

  • Suppliers and partners who list their customers or dealers

  • Local news coverage

  • Industry associations

Skip anyone selling links in bulk. They can do more harm than good.

How long does SEO take?

Longer than most people hope. Google’s guide says some changes can take effect in hours and others several months, and suggests waiting a few weeks before judging whether a change worked. For a new or neglected site, expect several months of steady work before you see a clear difference.

That’s why SEO works best alongside faster channels, like your Google Business Profile, email and referrals, not instead of them.

One site, fixed in the right order

Sandra runs a family dental practice in Boise. Her website had a homepage, an “About” page and one “Services” page. It barely showed up for anything except her practice name.

She started with Search Console, then created separate pages for cleanings, crowns, implants and children’s dentistry, each with local mentions and a FAQ. She completed her Google Business Profile and started asking patients for reviews. Then she added one blog post a month answering patient questions. It took about five months, but “dentist near me” searches in her area started turning into booked appointments. (Sandra is an illustrative example.)

If your traffic is dropping

If you had traffic and it’s falling, the causes and fixes are different. We covered those in ways to improve declining website traffic rankings.

The honest part: SEO is mostly patient, steady work

There’s no trick. It’s writing useful pages, keeping your listings accurate and adding content month after month. That steadiness is where most small businesses fall off.

If you’d rather keep writing and hand off the routine parts (directory updates, page formatting, internal links, checking Search Console, keeping your profile active), that’s a good fit for a marketing VA.

FAQ

Can I do SEO myself?

Yes. Most of the steps above need time and knowledge of your business, not technical skill. Bring in a specialist for technical problems or competitive markets.

How much does small business SEO cost?

Doing it yourself costs time. Freelancers and agencies charge anywhere from small monthly retainers to much larger ones, depending on scope. Start with the basics yourself before paying for more.

What’s the most important SEO step for a local business?

A complete, active Google Business Profile, plus a clear page for each service you offer. Those two usually do more than anything else early on.

Do I need a blog for SEO?

Not necessarily, but it helps. Answering customer questions in blog posts gives Google more reasons to show your site for relevant searches.

Are keywords still important?

Yes, in the sense of using the words your customers use. Write naturally about what you do and where. Don’t stuff the same phrase over and over.

Start with step one this week

Set up Search Console, check your site on your phone, and list the service pages you’re missing. That’s your SEO plan for the next month.

If the ongoing upkeep is what you’ll skip, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
Google Business Profile Setup: A Small Business Guide

Google Business Profile Setup: A Small Business Guide

When someone searches “plumber near me” or “bakery open now,” the first thing they usually see isn’t a website. It’s a map with three businesses underneath.

And those listings come from Google Business Profile. For many local businesses, it’s the most valuable free marketing tool there is, and one of the most neglected. Half-filled profiles, wrong hours, no photos, reviews with no replies.

Here’s how to set up your Google Business Profile properly, and keep it working.


How Google decides who shows up

Google says local results are based mainly on three things: relevance (how well your profile matches the search), distance (how close you are to the searcher or the location in their search), and prominence (how well known your business is, including reviews). Its tips to improve local ranking come down to complete, accurate information and an active profile.

You can’t change distance. But you can improve the other two.


Google Business Profile 

step 1: claim and verify it

Search for your business on Google Maps. If a listing exists, claim it. If not, create one at Google Business Profile. Then verify it. Google offers verification methods such as a phone call, text, email, video or a postcard, depending on your business. You can’t fully manage the profile until it’s verified.


Step 2: Get the basics exactly right

  • Business name: your real name, as on your signage. Don’t add keywords or locations. Stuffing the name can get a profile suspended.

  • Category: your main category matters most. Pick the most specific one that fits, then add a few secondary ones. Google suggests using the fewest categories that describe your core business.

  • Address or service area: a storefront shows its address. A business that travels to customers, like a plumber or cleaner, can set a service area instead.

  • Phone and website: a local number that’s answered, and a link to your site.

  • Hours: your regular hours, plus special hours for holidays. Wrong hours are one of the quickest ways to lose trust.


Step 3: Fill in everything else

  • Description: a plain explanation of what you do, who for, and where. No links or promotional fluff.

  • Services or products: list them with short descriptions and prices if you can.

  • Attributes: things like wheelchair access, online booking or women-owned, if they apply.

  • Opening date, booking links and messaging, if you use them.


Step 4: Add real photos

Add photos of your storefront, interior, team, products and work. Real photos from your phone are fine. Keep adding new ones every month, especially of recent work.


Step 5: Post updates weekly

Google Business Profile lets you publish short posts: offers, events, updates and news. One a week is a good habit. It keeps the profile fresh and gives searchers more reasons to choose you.


Step 6: Get and answer reviews

Reviews are one of the most visible parts of your profile.

  • Ask every happy customer. Send your direct review link by text or email right after a good job.

  • Reply to every review. Thank people for good ones. Respond calmly and helpfully to bad ones.

  • Don’t buy or fake reviews, and don’t offer incentives in exchange for them. It breaks Google’s policies.

Our guides on getting more Google reviews and responding to negative reviews go deeper.


Step 7: Answer questions and messages

If customers ask questions on your profile or send messages, reply quickly. Slow replies can cost you the customer.


Mistakes that hold profiles back

  • Keywords stuffed into the business name

  • Wrong or outdated hours

  • No photos, or only stock images

  • Reviews with no replies

  • Different name, address or phone number on your website and directories

  • Setting it up once and never touching it again


A profile that started working

Leo runs a locksmith business in Sacramento. His Google Business Profile existed, but it had one category, no photos, no posts and six reviews, most unanswered.

He fixed the hours, added “Emergency locksmith” as a secondary category, uploaded 20 photos of his van and recent jobs, replied to every review, and started texting a review link to every customer. He posted one update a week. Over the next few months, calls that started with “I found you on Google Maps” became his biggest source of new work. (Leo is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: it only works if you keep it up

Setting up a profile takes an afternoon. Keeping it active (weekly posts, new photos, review requests, replies) takes a little time every week, and that’s where most businesses drift.

If that’s your risk, put 30 minutes a week in your calendar. Or hand the weekly routine to someone else. Posting updates, sending review requests and drafting replies for your approval are simple tasks for an administrative or marketing VA.


FAQ

Is Google Business Profile free?

Yes. Creating and managing a Google Business Profile is free.


Can I have a Google Business Profile without a storefront?

Yes. Service-area businesses can hide their address and show the areas they serve instead.


How long does it take to show up on Google Maps?

It depends on verification and how competitive your area is. Verification can take from minutes to a couple of weeks depending on the method. Ranking improves over time as your profile stays complete and active.


How often should I update my profile?

Post weekly and add photos monthly. Update hours whenever they change, especially for holidays.


Can I pay Google to rank higher in Maps?

Not in the regular results. You can run paid local ads, which appear separately and are labeled as ads.


Spend one afternoon on it this week

Log in, work through the seven steps, and set a weekly reminder to post. For more ways to get found for free, see our 30 free marketing ideas.

If the weekly upkeep is what you’ll skip, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
30 Free Marketing Ideas for Small Businesses

30 Free Marketing Ideas for Small Businesses

No marketing budget this quarter? That doesn’t mean no marketing.

Some of the best ways to find customers cost nothing but time: people talking about you, being easy to find, and showing up where your customers already are. Here are 30 free marketing ideas, grouped so you can pick the ones that fit your business.

A note on “free”: every idea here costs time. But none of them cost money. Pick five, do them well, and add more later.


Free marketing ideas that make you easy to find

1. Complete your Google Business Profile. Hours, services, photos, description. For local businesses, this is often the most valuable free listing you have. Our Google Business Profile guide covers the setup.

2. Post weekly on your Google Business Profile. Offers, updates, recent work.

3. List your business in free directories that matter for your industry and area. Keep your name, address and phone number the same everywhere.

4. Claim your listing on map apps your customers use.

5. Fix your website basics. Clear services, location, contact details and a phone number that works on mobile.


Let customers do the talking

6. Ask every happy customer for a review. Send a direct link. Timing matters: ask right after a job goes well.

7. Reply to every review, good and bad. Future customers read the replies.

8. Start a simple referral habit. Ask satisfied customers, “Do you know anyone else who’d find this useful?”

9. Share customer stories on your website and social media, with permission.

10. Send a thank-you note after big jobs. People remember it, and mention it.


Use what you already have

11. Email your past customers. A monthly newsletter keeps you remembered. See our email marketing getting-started guide.

12. Add a line to your email signature about a service, offer or review link.

13. Put a QR code on receipts and invoices linking to reviews or your newsletter sign-up.

14. Brand your vehicle with a simple decal or magnet, if you already have one.

15. Reuse content. Turn one blog post into social posts, an email and a checklist.


Show up online

16. Pick one social platform and post consistently.

17. Answer questions in local online groups and forums. Help first, sell rarely.

18. Post before-and-after photos of your work.

19. Go live or post a short video answering a common customer question.

20. Write one helpful blog post a month answering what customers ask.


Partner with others

21. Swap referrals with complementary businesses. A realtor and a home inspector. A gym and a nutrition coach.

22. Co-host a workshop or event with a partner business.

23. Offer to write a guest post or newsletter piece for a partner’s audience.

24. Join your local chamber or business group. Many have free events or low-cost memberships.

25. Sponsor with your time, not money: volunteer your skills for a local cause or school event.


Get out in the community

26. Speak at a local meetup or library talk on your area of expertise.

27. Offer a free mini-consultation or check-up. It gets people through the door.

28. Pitch a story to local media. A new service, a milestone, a community project.

29. Show up at farmers markets or local events where your customers gather.

30. Teach something. A free class or demo positions you as the expert.


Five ideas, one month

Jada runs a mobile massage business in Atlanta with no marketing budget. She chose five ideas: complete her Google Business Profile (1), ask every client for a review (6), set up a referral swap with two local yoga studios (21), post weekly short tips on Instagram (19), and teach a free “desk stretches” workshop at a co-working space (30).

In the first month, the workshop brought in four new regular clients, and her review count doubled. None of it cost money. It cost about four hours a week. (Jada is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: free marketing needs steady time

Free marketing trades money for hours. And that’s a good trade when you have hours. It becomes hard when business picks up, which is exactly when marketing tends to stop.

So protect a weekly block for it. And if the routine tasks (posting, review requests, directory updates, newsletters) keep slipping, those are easy to hand off to a marketing assistant while you keep the parts that need you, like workshops and partnerships.


FAQ

What is the best free marketing for a small business?

For local businesses, a complete Google Business Profile and a steady flow of reviews are usually the highest-value free tactics. For others, email to past customers and referrals often work best.


How can I market my business with no money?

Focus on being easy to find, asking for reviews and referrals, staying in touch with past customers, and showing up consistently on one platform.


Does free marketing actually work?

Yes, when it’s done consistently. Most of these ideas build over months. The businesses that see results are the ones that keep going.


How much time does free marketing take?

Plan on two to four hours a week to start. Pick fewer ideas and do them well rather than trying all 30.


When should I start paying for marketing?

Once you know what works for free. Paid ads work better when you already know your best message and customer.

Pick five this week

Choose five ideas, put them in your calendar, and give them a month. Then keep what worked. For the bigger picture, see how to build a small business marketing plan.

If the hours are the problem, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.



Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo
How to Repurpose Content: 1 Blog Post, 10 Pieces

How to Repurpose Content: 1 Blog Post, 10 Pieces

You spent four hours on a blog post. It went live, got shared once, and disappeared.

That’s the common story, and it’s a waste. A good blog post already holds a dozen smaller pieces of content: tips, quotes, steps, stories, questions. You’ve done the hard thinking. To repurpose content, you just take those pieces out and put them where people will see them.

Here’s how to turn one blog post into ten pieces, with an example.


Start with the right post

But not every post is worth repurposing. The best ones have:

  • Clear steps or a list that can be split up

  • A practical tip someone could use today

  • A story or example

  • Answers to common questions

How-to guides, checklists and “mistakes to avoid” posts usually work best.


The 10 pieces

Say your post is “How to Get Clients to Pay Invoices on Time.” Here’s what it can become.


1. An email newsletter

Summarize the post in 150 words, share one tip in full, and link to the rest. Your subscribers get value, and the post gets traffic.


2. A LinkedIn post

Pick the strongest point, like “invoice the same day the work is done,” and write a short post around it with your own experience.


3. A carousel

Turn the steps into five to eight slides for Instagram or LinkedIn. One step per slide, a clear title slide, a final slide with the action.


4. A short video

Record yourself explaining one tip in under 60 seconds. Phone, good light, no script needed beyond three bullet points.


5. A quote graphic

Pull the most quotable line and put it on a simple branded graphic.


6. A checklist or download

Turn the steps into a one-page checklist. Offer it as a free download in exchange for an email. Now the post builds your list too.


7. A “myth vs fact” post

Find the common misconception in the topic. “It’s rude to chase invoices.” Then correct it in a short post.


8. A question post

Ask your audience a question from the post: “What’s your payment terms: 14 days or 30?” Questions start conversations.


9. An FAQ or website update

Add the post’s best answers to your website FAQ, or link to it from a related service page.


10. A sales tool

Send the post, or the checklist, to prospects and clients who ask about the topic. It saves you writing the same email twice and shows you know your stuff.


How to repurpose content: a simple workflow

  1. Publish the post.

  2. Pull out the pieces. Read it once and highlight: tips, steps, quotes, stories, questions.

  3. Make a list of the 10 pieces in your content calendar.

  4. Create in one batch. Write the social posts together, design the graphics together, record the videos together.

  5. Spread them out over three or four weeks, not all on one day.


One post, a month of content

Owen runs a small IT support company in Salt Lake City. He wrote one post, “7 Signs Your Small Office Needs a Better Backup,” and then repurposed it.

It became a newsletter, seven LinkedIn posts (one per sign), a carousel, two short videos, and a one-page checklist offered on his website. That was about four weeks of content from one piece of writing. The checklist alone brought in more email sign-ups than anything else he’d posted that year. (Owen is an illustrative example.)


The honest part: repurpose, don’t copy-paste

Each platform has its own style. Pasting the same text everywhere reads as lazy and usually performs poorly. Adjust the length, tone and format for each place. The idea stays the same. The packaging changes.

And like most content work, repurposing takes steady hours: cutting, formatting, designing and scheduling. It’s work that suits a content repurposing assistant well. You write the original and approve the pieces. Someone else does the slicing.


FAQ

What does it mean to repurpose content?

Taking something you’ve already made, like a blog post or video, and turning it into new formats for other channels, such as social posts, emails or checklists.


Is repurposing content bad for SEO?

Not when you change the format and add value. Copying a whole post onto another website word for word can cause problems, but short social posts and emails based on it are fine.


How often can I reuse the same content?

You can share the core ideas several times, spread over weeks or months. Most of your followers won’t have seen every post.


What’s the best content to repurpose?

Practical how-tos, checklists, lists of tips and stories with a clear lesson. They break easily into smaller pieces.


Do I need special tools?

No. A document, a free design tool and your phone’s camera are enough to start.

Pick one post and start

Choose your most useful blog post, pull out ten pieces this week, and schedule them over the next month. For help planning the schedule, see how to create a month of content in one day.

And if you’d rather hand off the slicing and scheduling, IncludeWork gives you 5 free hours with a trained VA, with no credit card and no contract. Start your free hours.


Share Now

facebook_logotwitter_logolinkedin_logo

More Blogs

All Other Latest Blogs

View All other Blogs

IncludeWork company logo — virtual assistant services

IncludeWork is a global virtual assistant agency that helps businesses scale with skilled, reliable support. With 24/7 availability, flexible monthly plans, and a proven track record across 76 countries, we deliver fast, consistent results, without the burden of hiring full-time staff.

BASIS member — Bangladesh Association of Software and Information Services
BACCO member — Bangladesh Call Centre and Outsourcing Association
company_1
company_2
company_3
company_4
company_5

Bangladesh

Road # 7, Block # E, Kaderabad Housing, Mohammadpur, Dhaka 1207

India

25, Cantopher Lane, Near Cheap Store towards CIT ROAD, KOLKATA-700014

USA

1209 Mountain Road Pl Ne Ste R, Albuquerque, NM 87110

company_name
╳